Home

WebCenter 14.1 User Guide - Product Documentation

1. 2 characters as search operators to refine the search Examples Use before a term that must exist somewhere Use box products to search for projects in the fields of a single project document documents that must contain box and may contain products Use to exclude projects documents that Use box company box products to contain the term after the symbol from the search for projects documents that contain box results company but not box products Use as a placeholder for 0 or more characters Use box to search for projects documents that This means that any number of characters or no contain either box or boxes character can be at that position Use as a placeholder for 1 or more characters Use box to search for projects documents that This means that 1 or any number of characters jcontain boxes but not box can be at that position but there has to be at least 1 character For more information about advanced search characters click the information icon Ee 20 Search Result Options WebCenter Use the Search Results Options to determine what you want to see in your search results and in what order Search For Projects Fill in one or more fields Prefer less fields Try Keyword Search Use Advanced Search Characters a Project Name Description Loo E Project Status shwa S r Created Coo T Modified Coo T Due v Customer Location Loo E Sal
2. Customer No Customer Location Description Y Members Invite Members Select 215 my ESKOS WebCenter Note The Completed statuses are not shown because you cannot create a Project in a completed status 11 2 12 Searching based a Project Status 216 You can search for projects based on their Project Status Choose Search from the menu bar and select Project or Tasks On the advanced Project Search page and the Task Search page the list box will contain the list of all the Project Statuses In addition to all individual project statuses the list also contains the following e Show All default show all projects or tasks of all projects e Show All Active show only projects or tasks of projects with an active status e Show All Not Active show only projects or tasks of projects with a non active status e Show All Completed Search For Projects Fill in one or more fields Prefer less fields Try Keyword Search M Use Advanced Search Characters Search Panel Design Search Results Options Search _ Wiew List Column Order Editable Sort Order Clear this form Project Name Po iv Description Project Status Show All w Created Non Active Active Initiation Canceled Wo 4 Save this search b x Iw Modified Due Customer Location Salesperson S ad O Project Manager x Too oo oO oO oO 4 Manager s location Attributes
3. You can select this attribute via a SmartName or by manually typing in the attribute Based on the resolved value of this attribute this node will create multiple projects For example e If the SmartNames resolves to a multi value text attribute indicating languages the created projects will be language variants You will get the same result when you type in the attribute values For example if you type in Dutch French English the iterator value will be Dutch French and English As a result or running the task in a Project you can expect three new Projects corresponding to each language Note While iterating project creation you can send only the related attributes to the created projects by specifying them iterator value as the attribute in the Project Attributes tab e If the SmartName resolves to an integer or if you type an integer for example you type 3 the projects will be created based on these numbers For example if the value resolves to 3 the iterator value will be 1 2 and 3 You will get three new projects when the task is finished Note If the attribute is missing in the Project you will get an error Ae eG LOUCE sino mele Important e Do not aim to create more than a hundred projects using the Create Project Node You will be warned if you do so Maximum number of projects that can be created at once exceeded 294 WebCenter Tip You can use the Iterator Value SmartN
4. Characteristics WebCenter 11 2 13 Filtering based on Project Status In Favorite Projects Projects Manage and in Projects am Invited to you can filter on all Project Statuses individually You can also use the filters to look for a combination of statuses Show All Show All Active Show All Not Active Show All Completed 11 2 14 Document creation settings in a project In a project go to the Configure gt Document Creation to view the template from which the document upload configuration is taken To change this select the template from the drop down list You will see a list of templates with a custom document creation configuration This will update the project document creation settings with the selected template s settings Project 000247 Manager plead aa Upload Multiple Documents Due On Mail link to Modified More actions Description DM_9505 Mar 18 2013 Jan 10 2014 Bar le Duc Documents 2 Bill Of Materials 0 Tasks 18 Discussions 0 Characteristics Attributes Project Informati Workflow Connection Document Templates Project Creation Document Types Document Creation Project Document Creation This project is using the settings of template 118676 Click to see details If you want to use another template select the template from the drop down box and save the settings 118676 2r my ESKOS WebCenter 11 6 Managing Project
5. Note You cannot view empty pages You can view the blank pages but you cannot annotate or compare them Tip You can collapse other widgets to make more space for Page List panel while viewing large multi page or page list Read also Viewing Multi Page Documents and Page Lists on page 153 The page thumbnails of a page list or multi page document are displayed according to the binding type Left edge binding the first page and the odd numbered pages are displayed on the right The even numbered pages will be on the left Page list s Right edge binding the first page and the odd numbered pages are displayed on the left The even numbered pages are displayed on the right WebCenter Page list g 5 2 9 Annotation List The Annotation list panel provides a listed view of the existing annotations in the currently viewed image You can collapse this panel to hide the annotation list panel You can see them in the created or modified order depending on the setting and filters Replies are visible immediately below the corresponding annotation in the created modified order Annotation List a ae on Custom Filter is Enabled Custom Filter is Enabled T 3 of 11 threads shown t T Cl peeters mipe MIPE1 Mar 31 2015 This is an old logo please update the logo to the new one af Accepted Peeters Michiel MIPE af Accepted peeters mipe MIPE2 peeters mipe MIPE2 Mar 31 2015 Ido not hav
6. To change the primary sort field click on the sort icon next to it 23 ESKO secon 24 Up arrow in the column header indicates that the results are sorted on this field in ascending order To sort the results in the reverse order click 7 koa Down arrow indicates that results are sorted on this field in descending order To reverse the a order click In the Grid Layout If the search results are in the grid layout you will see a drop down with sortable fields instead of the sort icons Name Reversed Name Description Reversed Description Project Manager Reversed Project Manager Modified Reversed Modified Due Reversed Due For example sorting by Name Reversed Name will make the name field in the ascending or descending order Note The configured sort fields will be applicable in both the grid and list layouts Advanced Searches Use the Search menu to search content in WebCenter You can search for e Projects e Documents including versions and revisions e Tasks e Reports You can create Saved Searches based on your chosen search criteria If you are an administrator you can create advanced asset browsers this way Read in Working with the Asset Browser on page 30 To Save a Search 1 In the Search menu click Projects Documents or Tasks depending on what you want to search 2 Define your search criteria For more information see Search on page 17 3 Click Save this S
7. WebCenter Note When you edit a task type use the Document Creation tab to setup the document creation settings e Default The default document creation options will be e Browse Copy e New when a template library is configured e Custom When you select this you will see a list of customizable options Where the document will be sourced from Label The link description You can create a custom label such aS Upload a graphic ile e Standard e Simple e Translated Details Additional information such as e Allowed Extensions e Document Template Selector Here you can select the already specified document templates Document Templates Operation The operation depends upon the Source button For example if you have chosen Project Folder the operations would be Copy Move or Link the document Sections The configured upload source is made available in these sections By default all the options will be available and enabled You can deselect the sections to disable some of the locations Target Folder The destination folder If this setup is configured you can create tasks with custom document upload options from this task type lf a task is created from this task type and if you can upload documents you get these custom document upload options in the task execution page lf the task type does not have a document creation setup the setup defined by the task s project is used as the upload options
8. 3 If the report requires parameters the Reports Details page appears Specify the report parameters the mandatory parameters are marked by an and click the Run Now button Working with the Asset Browser The asset browser is a user friendly feature to search and find assets in a large collection of WebCenter assets The administrator can customize the Asset Browser into a Menu for easy access You can use the configured Asset Browser to browse for assets stored in the WebCenter This is an advanced way of searching which is available from WebCenter 12 onwards WebCenter WebCenter al Admin My Work Ne emo Show Left and Top Image Panel Show Left Panel Show Top Image Panel Current i Show Left and Top Image Panel st Projects v Asset Browser Search v My WebCenter v Upload Projects v Save Search Results Document Name Sub Brands OO Selection Packaging __ Packaging Sub Type i Product Type gt Brand gt Packaging Variant P Product B Selec rteron E 4 Aaaa ay G ISET Brand Packaging Product Your cart is empty Found 16 items Show as Grid Page 1 of 1 Name v Description Project Brand Sub Brand Size Packaging Packaging SubType ProductType Variant E 3 Green display header ai Asset Library Esko Green 3Nos Display POS Lubricants Petrol play header al Value E 3 Green display header ai 12 020 JMAS TEST Esko Green 3
9. The Reset O button Use it to reset the layout of the viewer to the default The Java Viewer button Use this to switch to the Java viewer The Show Keyboard Shortcuts button Click this or type in to see the keyboard shortcuts The Help button to open help pages Tip To access online help use the keyboard shortcut F1 or click The Close button x Use this to close the viewer and return to WebCenter If changes have been made to annotations or to the approval state the user will be prompted to save or discard the changes Print Dialog Use the Print to print e the current view e the selected image area e the annotation overview When you click on the Print button the Print dialog opens Specify your Print Type in this dialog Print current view default Select this option when you want the entire view area to be printed Your print preview will contain e all panels in the split view mode with borders e visible ruler end point and read outs e annotation shapes and annotation note icons The floating annotation text boxes are not printed The resulting Print preview changes the background color and the titles of the windows to white If only some of the channels are selected select the Print only selected channels option You will get all the channels in the print if this is unchecked Print a selected image area Choose this print mode to get a clean print of the current document page without the anno
10. This node collects the documents referenced in each of the input documents and sends them as the output documents Based on the settings this task may output the incoming parent documents as well In the following example the node selects the artwork document referenced in a design file Yo Yoghurt_final pdf start Select Artwork Completed document Double click the node in the canvas to fill in the following options 290 WebCenter Parameters Fail if no Documents found Add Input Documents to Output e Attribute drop down listing all the document reference attributes defined in the system Parameters DEKE DocRef_PNG IPG only DEKE DocRef PNG only DEKE DocRef Search Actions Docket Selected Revision DEKE DocRef Selected Version DEKE DocRef_Single DEKE _DocRef_View Creation DEKE DocRef View Default e Project name use SmartNames or type in the name of the project where the referred document is located This is handy when you want to filter the multi valued document references located in several projects This field is optional and by default empty e Fail if no Documents found check this when you want the workflow to stop if there are no document references for the attribute you selected This option is turned on by default e Add Input Documents to Output check this to send the incoming documents the documents containing the document references also to the output pin in addition to the sele
11. VAS ir ESKO WebCenter 12 9 2 Add Task Statuses Tasks have three statuses by default Created In Progress and Completed Adding more statuses improves the accuracy of task progress This comes in addition to the estimated date The task status is reported in all task overviews Task statuses can have high quality icons This allows making these overviews much more visual Note Only Administrators can create task statuses but the task type owner can select task statuses from the list Task statuses have a sequence and this sequence is automatically adopted by the task type e To create new task statuses as an Administrator a Click Task Types gt Statuses gt Add Status b Type names of extra statuses and browse for an icon If you don t add an icon the name of your status will be displayed in the status column so avoid long names or use icons Icons can be jpg jpeg png gif bmp file type They are put without any scaling in the task column so you should be careful not to use large icons Good sizes are between 15 and 30 pixels high and between 15 and 130 pixels wide Using wide icons allows showing progress very visually as in the example below c Click Finish e To add task statuses to a Task Type as a user with the User Can Create Task Type privilege a On the Task Types page click your Task Type b Go to the Status tab and click Add Status c Select the status you want to add and cli
12. WelbCenter 7 Click Launch 11 2 Editing Projects Project Managers can e edit the project s general information in the Project Details gt Project Information page e add specific information to the project like characteristics and attributes e update the links to documents in the Project e change the Project status Note Only Administrators can save Projects as a template so that other Projects can be created based on it See the Administration Guide for more information 11 2 1 Add a Salesperson Project Managers can associate a Salesperson with the project This can be any user in the system but has no specific rights in the project On the Project Details page click Project Information Click Salesperson Select a salesperson and click Finish Click Save A QO N Note The salesperson does not gain access to the project unless he she is invited as a user Project Manager or is part of the Admins group It is possible to search for all projects associated with a certain salesperson across WebCenter 11 2 2 Specify Project Characteristics Log in as a project manager Open the Project whose Characteristics you want to specify Click Characteristics AA N Select the checkboxes of the desired Characteristics The selected Characteristics will appear in the list of Characteristics Click the plus sign next to a Characteristic to see its children Characteristics 5 Click Chang
13. 3 ESKOw WeeCanter 36 Set Project Manager S mple ips Close Status Project Value Comment bulk_operations_test_0001 User Group Berg Brune BRUNE change Project cannot be created modified You do not have permission to perform this action Detail Permission Denied User Group Berg Brune BRUNE change bulk_operations_test_0003 User Group Berg Brune BRUNE Y change k_operations_test_0004 bulk_operations_test_0002 User Group Berg Brune BRU bulk_operations_test_0005 User Group Berg Brune BRU User Group Berg Brune BRUNE Y change bulk_operations_test_0007 User Group Berg Brune BRUNE Y change NE jc bulk_operations_test_0006 BREREREBEESA g bulk_operations_test_0008 User Group Berg Brune BRUNE Y change bulk_operations_test_0009 User Group Berg Brune BRUNE Y change bulk_operations_test_0010 User Group Berg Brune BRUNE Y change bulk_operations_test_0011 User Group Berg Brune BRUNE Y change 7 Click Close to close the dialog Your search results will automatically update Updating Attribute Category Project Member or Project Permissions in Bulk You can change the Project Attribute Category of multiple projects from Project Search results in one go Also you can add Project Members to multiple projects and set their permissions 1 2 Goto Actions gt
14. 7 Set the project permissions as desired these permissions apply to all members being added in this step Then click Finish A successful status message appears along with a list of suggested subsequent tasks Note If the project already has any number of roles among its members a dropdown list containing these roles is displayed at the top of the New Member Selection step of the Add Member to Project wizard By selecting a project role while specifying users groups to be invited to the project the project manager can at the same time assign the desired new members to the selected roles The Set Project Security for New Members step fills up the security matrix with the original setup of the selected role Take into account that you cannot assign a role to another role in a project any role objects selected from the list of the desired new project members will be disregarded they won t even be invited to the project if a role assignment is specified using the appropriate dropdown list while picking up new project members By introducing roles than can be assigned to multiple user or group members it is now possible to have a same user or group member invited into the project via different role assignments i e Joe Designer can be invited into a project both as assigned to DESIGNERS role and independently without any role assignment Every such combination of a member and its assignment is considered and
15. Microsoft ISA Proxy server If you will be using the Viewer through a Microsoft ISA proxy server using authentication in an HTTPS session use Java 1 4 2 on your machine not Java 1 5 To check the version of Java installed on your machine double click the Java applet in Control Panel and click About If needed download the J2SE Java Runtime Environment JRE 1 4 2 from the following URL http java sun com j2se 1 4 2 download html You must be able to download and install Java applets automatically for the Viewer to work properly If Java is installed but a red X appears in the browser consult your system administrator to see if a firewall or proxy blocks Java downloads Returning to WebCenter To leave the Viewer and return to WebCenter click the x at the top right of the Viewer next to the question mark Do not close the Web browser window by accident 5 1 4 Viewing RIPped Data in the WebCenter Viewer You can view RIPped data from Odystar or Nexus TIF or LEN files in the WebCenter Viewer This allows you to approve RiPped files in the powerful Viewer Workflow Overview To make sure WebCenter recognizes your RIPped TIF and LEN files as digital film use the following workflow 1 In Odystar or Nexus set up a flow that contains the following stages e Split Pages to split the pages of a multi page PDF document e RIP to RIP every page to separated TIF or LEN files e Compress to gather the separations back into a ZI
16. The incoming documents will be processed according to the Send incoming Documents option setting If there are documents to be sent they will be copied to the specified Job or container and will be added to the start node of the workflow in Automation Engine When the workflow is finished in Automation Engine the WebCenter node will continue over the green output pin During execution the workflow feedback shows that it is running on Automation Engine Note Your Administrator must have configured a Workflow Connection of the type Project Workflow JDF for this to work See Configure Workflow Connections in the Administration Guide Parameters Tab Workflow Connection 308 13 ESKOw WeeCanter 304 Select the JMF type workflow connection configured by your Administrator from the drop down Read in Configure Workflow Connections Workflow name Enter the name of the Automation Engine workflow to launch You can use SmartNames Attention The Workflow name is case sensitive Send incoming Documents by default Check this to send the incoming documents to Automation Engine e g because of an earlier submit or a sync operation Choose if you want to launch the Automation Engine workflow on the files in e an Automation Engine Job in this case enter the Orderid and the Sub orderid of that job e an Automation Engine Container only if you use Automation Engine 12 1 or newer in this case enter the path to
17. isd comparela pdf Version 1 compare1b pdf Mas Current Reference Using Anchor Points 1 Select and load your documents to the Viewer 2 Select the Current and Reference documents in the Document Select on page 105 The viewer starts the last used Compare mode except the View Reference Version or View Current Version modes with those documents Your document select panel will have Orientation and Alignment tools when you select two documents to compare Select your preferred Compare mode for example View both side by side am view Click on the Anchor Point Alignment a tool The Viewer will transform to the anchor point alignment mode You can access the navigation and orientation tools in the top panel You can also use the Auto align BS function in combination with the anchor points 147 ESKOw WebCerter Project SKVA_HTML5S Document Eco_Speed_front wcer pdf Version 1 Speed Label Blue front pdf Version 1 ld 4 2of2 gt p User ADMIN ADMIN oO rs aa aaa g Or Navigation Orientation Anchor Point Alignment Select your anchor points in the current left and the reference middle documents x Cancel Align Use your keyboard arrow keys to fine tune Click align a co_Speed_front wcr pdf Version 1 Current Speed Label Blue front pdf Version 1 Reference Alignment result MAKE YOUR MAKE YOUR WORK FLOW WORK FLOW TIME TO MARKET TIME TO MARKET Not
18. task starts automatically when the Review task has been completed Starting tasks options Tasks can be set to start e Manually the member changes the task status manually e Automatically depending on the due date and lead time in working days e Automatically depending on the completion of the predecessor task s Note lf the Due Date is different from the Due Date of the predecessor plus the Lead time i e the earliest the task can be finished the Reset Start Date button will appear Clicking this button will set the Due Date to the Due Date of the predecessor plus the Lead Time This option is only available if the task is in Created status and if the Start Task is set to Automatically after predecessors complete e A combination of the above options Also task completion can change the project status Create New Task Dee cancel Tip indicates required field Task Type Simple Task gt Status Created Created by Me at this moment Assigned to Me vi Previous Assignee Name Review complete imposition Description Start after completion of Add predecessor s Task Name Assigned to Due Date Design new Chocolate Ice Cream packaging ADMIN Thu Sep 20 2012 10 30 ow Automatically link documents from predecessor tasks when task is started Lead time 1 days 0 hours Due Sep 21 2012 EE 10 30 gt Estimated ge xi Start task Man
19. 1 Open the project and folder containing the document to update Select the document to update To update more than one document at a time select as many as desired Click Update in the Actions menu All documents in the folder that you selected for which you have Update permission are updated A list is shown of the updated document s the containing Project the old version number and the new version number 4 3 9 Open a Document 6O Opening a document means having WebCenter open the document using the document s default application as defined in the Web browser 1 Navigate to the document by searching for the document and clicking its name in Search Results or by clicking its name in a project Click Open on the Document Actions menu PDF files have Open in Acrobat as well on their Document Actions menu you must have Adobe Acrobat installed for this button to work correctly For PDF files that are also Graphics files clicking Open opens them in the Viewer The document is opened by the default method defined by the browser for files of that type Note ArtiosCAD documents generate a 2D view instead of opening in ArtiosCAD WebCenter For documents created by external applications such as Microsoft Word or Adobe Acrobat the Web browser may attempt to launch that application to view the document within the Web browser window or it may open a new window Be careful to not close the browser window Not
20. Attribute Set Project Status at set Project status Set Workflow Specification Set Workflow Status Set Workflow Status Start Approval Cycle Submit Workflow 20 Submit Workflow Sync Workflow o sync Workflow Wait WebCenter Sets the value of one or more project attribute s automatically Automatically changes the status of the current project Automatically sets the value of one or more specification s for the current workflow Automatically sets the status of the current workflow to a new status Starts an approval cycle on a document and waits for its approval status See Start Approval Cycle for more information Launches an Automation Engine workflow that is configured in WebCenter See Submit Workflow for more information Synchronizes the project with the configured workflow are taken from the project template setup See Sync Workflow for more information The workflow waits pauses for a specified amount of time 289 13 13 ESKO 290 WebCenter Add to Bill of Materials Use this node to add documents to the current Project s Bill of Materials automatically Parameters Count Set the documents Count in the Bill of Materials Tip You can use a SmartName for example a document or project attribute to set the count Copy Move Document Use this node to copy or move one or more documeni s to a new location Parameters e Copy
21. Click 2 to approve the document to reject it Ed to comment it 2 to force approve it if you are a Project Manager 2 to force reject it if you are a Project Manager 3 In the pop up that opens do the following if you are you can approving or force approving the document set a condition for your approval if the approval cycle allows this see Allow Conditional Approval or Noton page 22 select Set Approval Condition and type your condition in the box rejecting or force rejecting the document type a reason for your rejection in the box commenting the document type your comment in the box 4 Enter your password if your WebCenter server requires it 140 WebCenter lf unsaved annotations are present the Viewer alerts you about this while trying to Approve Reject Comment 5 Click the Commit button Once you have approved or rejected the document you may not change its approval status later only a Pending status allows future changes lf you have entered an approval condition a rejection reason or a comment it will be shown in e the Approval tab of the Document Details page e the Action History tab of the Document Details page e o the Java Viewer s Document History panel e the HITML5 Viewer s Approval Details panel To see all the documents you have recently evaluated go to My Work gt My Recently Submitted Approvals Note If you cannot see My Recently Submitted Approvals
22. Click the Show Rich Text Controls link to view the broad pallet of text options The Project Managers with change properties rights can add content from a document to the Rich text editor window Here the text also Chinese special characters font types bullet types color tables and headings are preserved Values choose either e Prompted if you want to allow the user to enter any value e Calculated if you want to use an ArtiosCAD formula to calculate the attribute value enter the ArtiosCAD formula in the field Note You should set Calculated attributes to read only as their values are automatically updated from ArtiosCAD and should not be changed by WebCenter users e Restricted Set to limit the possible values Note To choose a Restricted Set it must be created before defining the attribute see Create a Restricted Set Make sure that the Type of the Restricted Set is the same as the attribute type 22 WebCenter In the field Note For Document Reference attributes you will have only Prompted as the value 5 If you are creating a document reference specification Options i Description Use this field to point to the exact version of the document you need as the document reference link This is especially useful when you want to point to an approved version By default it points to the latest version but you can set this to Versions and Revisions e Latest Version When yo
23. Folder Document and Project Template names You can use SmartMarks to populate these fields c Enter your User Name and Password for the selected WebCenter site d Click the Approval tab and enable Approval if required 181 ESKO sesame 6 Click the Launch button to upload the imposition to WebCenter Note This automatically adds the imposition to the Pilot s Pages view at the same time 7 6 3 Upload an Imposition using the WebCenter Upload Feature 1 6 7 8 Either go to the project folder you want to upload the document into and click the umaa T button or just click the Upload menu from anywhere On the Upload page select the Project and Folder you will upload the document into if you are already in the project folder those are filled in automatically but you can still Change the Destination Select Browse in the Source list and click the Browse button to open a browser dialog and select your file Select Page List in the Document Type list Type the index number of the first page in the file in the Index of First Page field For a new document this will typically be 1 but it might not be if you plan on adding additional pages later or if you are updating a selection of the pages in an existing Page List The document Name is automatically detected You can still change it if needed Optionally specify a Description for the document Click Upload The Page List is uploaded to WebC
24. Read in Custom Filters for Annotations on page 137 Custom Filters for Annotations Use custom filtering to create advanced filters Click the Custom Filter Y button to enable this option Annotation List Pee te Custom Filter is Enabled Custom Filter is Enabled 3 of 11 threads shown F Cl peeters mipe MIPE1 Mar 31 2015 This is an old logo please update the logo to the new one af Accepted Peeters Michiel MIPE af Accepted peeters mipe MIPE2 peeters mipe MIPE2 Mar 31 2015 Ido not have the correct logo can somebody else change it please af Accepted peeters mipe MIPE1 Custom Annotation Filter 4 Match All Y of the following Review State lis Accepted Add a Filter Row 137 ESKO secon 138 In the custom annotation filter dialog you can combine the basic Author and Review State filters with a logical AND OR operator Click Apply Filter to apply the changes and close the dialog An active custom filter will show a message Custom Filter Enabled in the normal filter Locking the custom filter Click the pin button to lock the custom filter If you lock a custom filter It stays active for other documents and consequent viewer sessions Note You can always switch back to the basic filter by selecting a value from the drop down Hide Annotations To hide annotations you can click Hide annotations in the toolbar You can view them again by clicking
25. Read the details about this option in Document Creation Settings Each Task Type can have an icon The Icon gallery stores icons for Task Types Project Statuses and WebCenter statuses You can add your own icons to this library as jpg jpeg png gif or bmp images The Project Statuses Task Statuses and Task Types can load icons from the icon gallery Icons between 15 and 30 pixels high and between 15 and 130 pixels wide appears without scaling The gallery allows filtering of icons by its name kon Gallery Total 438 Filter Approve 1_ green png Approve 2 green png L Approve 3_green png B Approve 4 green png ea CAD 2 green png we CAD Design_green png rs CAD approve_green png aia CADi_green png x Canceled_green png Collect_green png 12 9 7 Delete a Task Type 1 Click Task Types on the main menu 2 0 WebCenter 2 Select the task type s to delete 3 Click Delete in the Actions menu Note You can only delete task types that are not used in a task 12 9 8 Creating and Editing Task Specifications Specifications work like Attributes and in fact they are a separate set of Attributes only used for specifying tasks Note Just like Attributes specifications can only made by an Administrator Create a New Task Specification 1 Goto Task Types gt Specifications A list of specifications opens this list can be empty if this is the first time you use specifications 2 If your specification
26. Represents the version of the complete Page List The List Version is updated every time you upload a new version of the imposition from Automation Engine Index versus Folio For example the page with Index 7 may have vii as its Folio or the page with Index 1 may actually be page 3 when the cover is not part of the imposition List Version versus Page Version When new versions of a selection of pages are uploaded the List Version number and the Page Version number of the uploaded pages are incremented As a result in very asynchronous workflows e g magazine printing you can easily have 15 Page List Versions Every update to the Page List increments this version number However most of these updates will only affect certain pages their Page Version will be incremented By the time you reach Page List Version 15 many pages will be at version 3 or higher but some will still be at Page version 3 Empty and blank pages Empty pages are ignored for approval For example if you upload a 32 page PDF file as a Page List but change the Number of pages to 64 afterwards creating 32 empty pages at the end of the Page List These 32 empty pages are ignored you cannot approve or reject them Blank pages require approval WebCenter detects when PDF pages have been added to the imposition that have no visible content The blank pages need to be approved just like any other pages VLE ESKO secon When is a Cycle Finished
27. and give each stage a Lead Time of 2 days the shortest time the approval can take is 6 days But the final due date leaves room for uploading new versions restarting stages and people being late Note If a stage takes longer than its allocated Lead Time the lead time of the next stages has to be reduced lf the first stage of our example takes 8 days the two following stages will have to be completed in 1 day each to still make the final due date Note that stages lead time will never be reduced by more than half the original lead time a two day stage won t be reduced to less than a day Note The Fixed Due Dates and Lead Times with Final Due Date options are only available when setting an approval cycle for a document not for a project or a folder Define How to Handle a New Document Version When a document s approval cycle is started and someone uploads a new version of that document the approval cycle is automatically stopped You can define what happens when the approval cycle restarts e n the When a new version is uploaded setting choose either e Approval Restarts from Beginning to restart the approval cycle from zero People who already approved rejected the document will have to evaluate it again e Approval Restarts from Current Stage to keep the approval stages already completed typically approved and restart the current stage People who already approved rejected the document in the current stage wi
28. click More actions then Download in the header of the Project Details page 4 3 12 Download Documents from Multiple Locations To conveniently download documents from several projects you can use the Cart You can add documents to download to the cart as you are browsing the projects then download them in a zip archive when you are done 1 For each document that you want to download click Add to Cart in the Actions menu 61 ESKO scone 2 Click the Cart button in the top row menu or next to a document name to go to the Cart 3 Select the checkboxes of the documents to download 4 If you are downloading ArtiosCAD documents choose the format in which to download them in Download As lists You may only download in those formats for which you have permission and you may only choose one download format for designs and one for manufacturing files respectively 5 Click Download in the actions menu 6 Choose where to save the archive and click Save Use a decompression utility to extract the documents from the archive The documents are now on the hard drive and may be manipulated as desired 4 3 13 Viewing and Printing a Document s Annotation Report You can view the annotation report page with an overview of annotations done in a document without opening the document in the viewer To view the annotation report go to e Document details gt Annotations Note This feature is only enabled for graphic files You can
29. go to My WebCenter gt My Work Setup to add it to your My Work page 5 2 21 Compare Documents in the Viewer You can compare two versions of a document or two documents in the Viewer Use the different comparison modes to have a close look at the differences between the two files First se ect the documents to compare and then align them as required Once you have opened the documents to compare there will be extra comparison modes buttons in the Top Tool Panelon page 95 Channels on page 122 Orientation and Alignment and Annotation List View Cunent Version h i view the current version the file in the first document selector See Show Current and Show Reference Modes on page 150 m view the reference version the file you opened in the second document selector See Show Current and Show Reference Modes on page 150 View Reference Version a he keep switching from the first to the second file rapidly Read details VIEW BOT Sinking in View Both Blinking on page 150 View both Show on Top a view both files on top of each other Difference Compare view both files on top of each other and highlight the differences in red Read more in Difference Compare Mode View both highlight differences on page 150 iew both files side by side be Mode 141 ESKO an Channel Matching in Compare Mode Channel Matching in Compare The Channel Matching influences the way differences in images are displayed while compari
30. o Gen ne Sn eee ene eee eee ee ee 257 12 6 Overview Of My Group s TaSKS cccccccccccecsssecssscscsvseevscsecsvseesssseevsssecssstsevsssessissevssietevsesstssseissitiecasieevess 257 12 6 1 Group Task MANnagGela cnccccccccccccescsssscscscscsvsscevsesecsssssecsssesevsssevsssesssssesssissevsssecavseevsssessesiecavsecaveeeeea 257 1262 USNO MY Group S TASKS usii T ka ee ee eee 257 Ne CCID beth US ttc azsci ects Seneca A ect aceebeh emiencan Sone nara eae eerie eigen neem 260 12 6 Linking Documents TO TASKS cists sicesssateon th trtetcaaedieabendoancnteadeies Sedcanstecnoreicbealienonseeshe iE aa TE etek 261 12 8 1 Why Link Documents tO TASKS occ ccccccccceecsssececsesecsvsesesssseevsesecsssesavsssetesseserssieesitserasseevetsecanieen 262 12 8 2 Link a Document tO a TaSk cece cisstetisissrtssisstsiisisstsisiississieasieseieess 262 12 8 3 Find Documents Linked to a TaSk cccccccscseccesscsscssssssscsssscsssssrstsstsieecasreaten 262 12 9 Working with Task TYP S ccccccccssscsssssscsssscscsssscssssescsssssevssescessseesssescessssessusssesessesesasceseseeceseseecesesaseseeseseseasa 263 12 9 1 Create a Task My DC i siivessonsuarsestirincesspcnaces absireneondrenmesta rune eunataesahsinetousersdestislnatsspoqeatsshabessasoamaestaehiceesstemnctaior 263 oL Aad Task ts 0 cy gt ae ene een ne ne ee eee ene E E eee 266 12 9 3 Define Task DOCUMENTS SettiNGS cccccc cc cccecscsececscecsvseecsssscevsssecsssssevsssecevsesecsssecevssiecavseevesee
31. this brings it forward relative to the background 188 WebCenter F http rdvmwcsql2 projsearchresults E Project DEKE_test_Collada Document Crisps Salt zae Yersion 1 x had Control Panel B Done Use to zoom out this sends the design back F http rdymwcsqlz projsearchresults k Project DEKE_test_Collada Document Crisps Salt zae Yersion 1 x l Control Panel Done 189 ESKOw WebCerter The info button i will be red if your system doesn t fully meet the System Requirements on page 187 Click it to get details 8 4 3 Advanced Tools Click Control Panel at the bottom right of the Viewer window to show the advanced tools http rdymwcsqlz projsearchresults k Project DEKE_test_Collada Document Crisps Salt zae Yersion 1 x 4 ES SS G EEr DOC6260308059562016551 zae ft e se es fe gt 7 1 Control Panel Done se A to return the design and the background environment to their default positions Se Use to rotate the design and the background environment in sync Use to rotate the design while the environment remains stationary 4 ran Use to move the design horizontally and vertically with no rotation while the environment remains stationary Me to rotate the environment while the design remains stationary MoO to zoom in thi
32. when a user is only invited to a project through a Role or Group you can change his her permissions when re inviting him her as an individual user This allows you to either restrict permissions for a specific user or give him her more access Note In this case when inviting the user individually his her existing Group or Role permissions for the project will be suggested and you will see a warning explaining that changing the user s permissions at that point may interfere with his her ability to perform project tasks For example if the user has a Designer role and you remove her Add permission she won t be able to upload designs to the project 11 4 ArtiosCAD Default Projects You may see WebCenter projects with names starting with ACadDefaults Do not modify these projects as they are automatically created by ArtiosCAD and Cad X to store defaults They are named with the following patterns e ACadDefaults lt version gt lt language code gt Shared where lt version gt can be for example 12 0 and lt language_ code gt en These projects are created when you run the ArtiosCAD Defaults Installer ArtiosCAD users should have View and Download rights on these projects Do not delete these projects as this would take away some CAD functionality However if you want to install new defaults or in case the defaults installation was interrupted you will have to delete the corresponding ACadDefaults_ project before rein
33. 1 Compress End 2 Receive End Split Pages mt OF WebCenter Output Compress wee oga pes RIP End 2 Receive Table Gateway details Split Pages Splits the pages of submitted multipage PDF documents so they are sent to the RIP gateway page by page RIPs the pages to TIF files Compress Collects the separated RlPped TIF or LEN data and gathers it in a ZIP archive WebCenter Output Selects the ZIP file and uploads it to the desired WebCenter Project Prepare the Nexus Workflow e Set up the following workflow 84 WebCenter Select Page split Pages Rasterise Separations Table Activity details Split Pages Splits the pages of submitted multipage PDF documents so they are sent to the RIP gateway page by page RIPs the pages to TIF or LEN files Compress Decompress Collects the separated RIPped TIF or LEN data and gathers it in ZIP a ZIP archive WebCenter Output Selects the ZIP file and uploads it to the desired WebCenter Project Submit Files and View Once you have set up your Odystar or Nexus workflow you can submit PDF documents The submitted documents will be RIPped and uploaded to WebCenter in the form of ZIP files which can be recognized by WebCenter as digital film files Log on to WebCenter and navigate to the Project you selected as the upload destination in the WebCenter Output gateway activity You should see the digital film files appearing in the
34. 125B 1 125 B Kraft Part 2 K5J2 02 ARD KS S amp T Canya 1 I 125B 1 125 B Kraft Part 3 KSI2 03 4RD KSJ S amp T Canvas 1 I 125B 1 125 B Kraft Part 4 KSI32 04 ARD KSJ S amp T Canva 1 I 125B 1 125 B Kraft Part 5 KSI2 05 4RD KSJ S amp T Canya 1 I 125B 1 125 B Kraft Part 6 KSJ2 06 4RD KS S amp T Canya 1 I 125B I 125 B Kraft e the Part name as defined in ArtiosCAD e the Document file name when not managed in WebCenter or a WebCenter document name if it is managed in WebCenter If the current user has the rights to view the document it will be displayed as a hyperlink to the referenced document s details If the document is not found you will see a warning listing the possible causes e the Project name if the document is managed Separately saved to WebCenter This will be displayed as a hyperlink to the referenced project s details If the project is not found a warning will be shown hinting at possible causes If the part is not managed in WebCenter the Project field will be empty e the Version number for the parts managed in WebCenter The number will be O for the documents not managed in WebCenter e the Board name e the Board Description details of the board assigned to this specific part 2D View tab shows a 2D view of the canvas file default side 3D Model VRML tab e When you click on this tab a VRML file extension wrl will open in the browser generating a 3D view Note The browser ne
35. 7 6 1 Requirements for Page LISS cccccccsccscscssscscsscssssscsssscssessersssscssesserssescecessecssestecesessasesierasereg 181 7 6 2 Upload an Imposition as a Page List from Automation Engine 181 7 6 3 Upload an Imposition using the WebCenter Upload Feature ccc 182 7 6 4 Update Pages in a Page LIS icccietnsiiseinsinssnniisiissnsseinseisireseieses 182 8 Working with SD FIIOS nc ccscissssssiesississecsssscsssesecsusenevssvscrevsevsssdnevsssesnsvsavsunservedsvovevsevsasdnousedsonsvaoveensveuesanonissoveassnsutsuarventestennys 184 Gl ADUT SO 6c teen eee nee ner ene rr RT eer nee eee eee ee ee ee ee ee 184 8 2 Creating and Exporting 3D Fil S ccc cccceetscrseecetscsseescsrssssetsssessscsresssissssessesrareseessesenes 184 road E Mest 0 2 24 PAOA ene A A E A eee nee ee eee 184 o2 ATOS Gy Benen nee nee nr te E eee eee ee 185 8 3 Uploading 3D Files to WEDG GIIlel viacisserseonsatenoneesnctnpnccosn asin pnorietlentarieentasn vatennvetnetsesnstananiasnansineisasverteatellonatayiette 185 8 3 1 Working with 2D and 3D Fil S ccc ec cessreisisscrsisiustsiisiussisisssiseaseesee 186 8 3 2 Creating a TAUMDN Al iciissciscsccnisisacvsactsdsianniaderivemisinnasledirnda E A SE Aaa ENa Ea 186 8 4 Viewing SD FIGS orsieianaieninoro enn iaeei aiene ai cae a eii i Ea EO iniiai 186 8 4 1 System REQUIPTEMENES cccccccccsesssssssssvsesssscssssssvsssevscssevscsvecsssevsessvecsssevsesuessisersssuessisssesscessecsseevseesvecnses 187 8 4
36. Assignee This transfer of assignments only happens if the current Assignee loses access to the Project by getting unassigned from the Role In situations where a User or a Group is only invited to the Project via a Role Assignment a Role reassignment will result in that user s group s removal from the project Approval and Task related dependencies are checked to prevent leaving the Project workflow in an inconsistent or blocked state Lelegating Roles As Go to the Manage Roles page If you have been given permissions to assign Members of a Role or to change Role assignments it will be displayed If you do not have the permissions to manage any roles a message will indicate this You don t have the rights to manage any roles in this project If you happen to remove yourself from the Project use the next actions menu Task step 11 3 2 Add Members to a Project Users and Groups need to be added to a project before they can access and use it 1 Log in as a project manager 221 17 ESKO WebCenter 2 Open the project to which you want to invite members 3 Click Members A list of the current members is shown 4 Click Add Members in the column header 5 Either filter or click Go to show all the users roles and groups available 6 Select the users roles or groups to add and click Continue Note While inviting a user or group you can assign it to a role by selecting the role name at the top of the page
37. Attribute BAMT Languages Case sensitive Project Attribute Route to is BAMT Languages Document BAMT Languages Document no match No Match If your project attribute Languages has the the value English the router will select documents with the attribute a multi value attribute with values as different languages that resolves to the value English lf the document attribute values are English and Dutch the rule will be evaluated as e Project English is Document English OR e Project English is Document Dutch In this example the router will direct all the documents with English to the first output pin and the others with Dutch to the no match Routing on Document Reference Attributes If you are routing on document reference attributes the router will treat it like text attributes If you have a multi valued document references it is possible to route based on the referred documents It will route based on the document name of the references Routing on Document Name Route based on Document Name Indude the file extension Case sensitive contains ard Design Remove no match Error Note Select Include the File Extension if the entire document name has to be checked for Otherwise the extension is parsed off before doing any comparison Routing on Document Attribute Route based on Document Attribute A
38. Autodesk Media Entertainment Portions of this software are copyright 1998 2003 Daniel Veillard All rights reserved Portions of this software are copyright 1999 2006 The Botan Project All rights reserved Part of the software embedded in this product is gSOAP software Portions created by gSOAP are Copyright 2001 2004 Robert A van Engelen Genivia inc All rights reserved Portions of this software are copyright 1998 2008 The OpenSSL Project and 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation http www apache org Adobe the Adobe logo Acrobat the Acrobat logo Adobe Creative Suite Illustrator InDesign PDF Photoshop PostScript XMP and the Powered by XMP logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries Microsoft and the Microsoft logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries SolidWorks is a registered trademark of SolidWorks Corporation Portions of this software are owned by Spatial Corp 1986 2003 All Rights Reserved JDF and the JDF logo are trademarks of the CIP4 Organisation Copyright 2001 The International Cooperation for the Integration of Processes in Prepress Press and Postpress CIP4 All rights reserved WebCenter The Esko software contains the RSA Data Security Inc MD5 Messag
39. CAD file CAD Options Help Hide Bridges and Nicks Show Nicks Need Show Bridges w Show Bridges and Nicks Cat Ss ei Layel Ere w Normal Graphics A Lighten Graphics Some M Lighten Graphics More EE Dimensions Approval Details No Approval Setup Defined You can choose to view or hide Nicks and Bridges in the CAD file 126 WebCenter e Hide Bridges and Nicks or Show Bridges and Nicks e Show Nicks Enable this to view Nicks in the display You can also see the size of the nicks e Show Bridges With this option you can view the bridge gaps e Show one up names While viewing manufacturing data you can see the names of the One ups using this option This option is turned off by default This button is disabled when displaying a single design file While viewing CAD linked with Graphics When a Graphics file with a reference CAD file is opened the CAD line work is shown on top of the graphics file in the view You have also options in the CAD panel to View both Graphics and CAD data Ag View Graphics only ay View CAD data only iii CAD T te W dp Layers g All Layers Main In CAD options you can also set various degrees of dimming the graphics data to make the CAD data more visible e Normal Graphics e Lighten Graphics some e Lighten Graphics more Note When you re open the viewer CAD line work will be displayed on top of the graphics file The modes in the CAD widget are not persistent While
40. Change Attribute Category or Actions gt Manage Members Permissions Go to Search gt Saved Searches Select one or more projects from the Saved Search Results Select the Projects for which you want to change the Project Parameters menu Delete Change Attribute Category Manage Members Permissions h h hi it O ji noe Due Date m i fl iw nge Project Manager fl nge Project Status i To change the Attribute Category pick an attribute category from the list To add a Project Member first choose whether you want to add a User Group or Role After that select a user group or role from the list or start typing to find the one you want Once you have selected your desired new project member you can immediately modify the new member s project permissions You can specify Custom folder permissions for inviting Project Members in the bulk operation Use Add folder link to add a new line Specify a set of permissions for the folder by typing in the folder name inside the provided edit field Only the specified folders permissions will be changed Permissions on folders that do not exist in a given Project will be skipped You can take out the Root permissions from the list If no Root is in this list but the member is new to the project he will only get view rights on the Root Note The selected User Group or Role will be invited if it is not yet present in the Project WebCenter 4 Click Start
41. Characteristics Attributes Project Information Approval Notifications Members Security Configure Folders 1 Actions T all Documents 1 Actions T Version Approval Uploaded Fi hunebed jpg 123 6KB L Feb See ee RS PA ct nawa Code Keizer Debbie Total Documents 1 Hide Thumbnails Show as Grid fF Project Documents 1 An administrator can limit the statuses for a project and this can be done for every project separately Go to a project or a template as an administrator and click on the Configure tab By using Add Project Statuses and Remove Project statuses Select with the check boxes and take remove from the action drop down you can get a specific set of statuses Preferences w CAD Project Management Companies Users Groups Roles Characteristics Attributes Project WCR1i2_ProjectStatus Status Active Se Manager Keizer Debbie Customer Upload Multiple Documents Due On Mail link to oan Modified Feb 29 2012 More actions Description Documents 1 Tasks 0 Discussions 0 Characteristics Attributes Project Information Approval Notifications Members Security Workflow Connection Document Templates Project Creation Document Creation Project Statuses Project Statuses Project Statuses 28 Add Project Statuses Fi Name Actions Active Non active Non Active Active Active Medium Blue AUTOSDK_CUST_PROI_STATUS_0O1 Non Active Yellow thinking phase Ac
42. Click Page List to open the Page List view Click the More Actions button and select Upload New Version Browse for the PDF document containing the new versions of the pages you want to update O oo FB Q N a Provide the Index of First Page information pages from the new PDF you are uploading will update the existing pages in the Page List starting at the Index you specify For example if you upload a four page PDF document to a 16 page Page List and enter 5 as Index of First Page WebCenter will update pages 5 6 7 and 8 in the Page List with the newly uploaded versions 7 Click Finish 183 Be Esko POr Working with 3D Files With WebCenter you can upload view and approve 3D files This is an option available with the Advanced Approval module This is based on Esko s Visualizer technology and enables you to e Communicate the final packaging in all its realism to clients e Use WebCenter as an online medium to share 3D mockups e Enhance artwork and shape approval with its 3D representation 8 1 About SD Files WebCenter works with Collada dae and Zipped Collada zae 3D files Collada is an interchange file format for interactive 3D applications It is an open standard based on XML managed by the Khronos Group a not for profit technology consortium For more information go to http www khronos org collada A Zipped Collada file is a zip file containing e a Collada file e amanifest x
43. Description 34 WebCenter Note The administrator has to enable project creation this in the Saved Search settings Read more in Configure Project Creation from the Asset Browser Using Searches to do Bulk Project Operations Updating Project Due Date Project Manager or Project Status in Bulk If your administrator has setup a Saved Search Results for bulk operations you can change e the Due date e Project Manager e Project Status in bulk 1 Goto Search gt Saved Searches Select one or more projects from the Saved Search Results 2 Select the Projects for which you want to change the Project Parameters 3 Click the pencil icon for the parameter you want Or select the desired bulk action from the Actions menu Due Date Manager f TEMA DESIGN A Simple bulk operations dialog will open 4 Do any or all of the following operations e To change the Due Date pick a new date and time using the selectors e To change the Project Manager first choose whether you want to select a User or Group After that select a user or group from the list or start typing to find the one you want e To change the Project Status pick a new status from the list 5 Choose Advanced if you wish to assign different values to your selected projects You can return to the default mode by clicking Simple again 6 Click Start and wait for the action to complete You will be notified of any issues regarding the operation 35
44. Document Use e A Rotate to rotate the reference document e Mirror F to mirror the reference document s If Invert to invert the reference document 144 WebCenter Tip Use this when comparing a positive and negative version of the same document Note The buttons indicate whether the rotation mirroring inverting of the reference document is Currently on or off Aligning Files You will get Viewer tools to align files in the document select panel while e comparing two graphics CAD files e viewing a graphics file and a linked CAD Overlay Read in Aligning CAD overlay and Graphics on page 162 View Both Side by Side Current PE_linked_O 180_front pdf a Project HTMLS Viewer 14 1 update Compare to 5 PE_linked_O_ 90_back pdf ans Project HTMLS Viewer 14 1 update Channel Matching Orientation and Alignment Orientation 5 F 3 Th Alignment R ha EEF HH Offset xY 0 00 0 00 mm CAD Overlay Click to select a CAD overlay Document You can align the current and reference files during compare using e auto align e anchor points e corners margins Trim boxes or offset values 145 ESKO an Auto aligning Files while Comparing Graphics Auto Align e aligns the currently visible view of the two compared images automatically Tip Using this tool along with the zoom in function is a quick way to align the current and reference images in th
45. Note You can also start an approval cycle on your uploaded document directly from the workflow It uses is the default approval cycle inherited from the project or folder you upload the document into If you have the Change Approval Setup permission you can also set the approval due date For details on how to upload documents from Automation Engine Odystar or Nexus please see the corresponding user manuals Upload from ArtiosCAD For details on how to upload documents from ArtiosCAD please refer to the ArtiosCAD user manual Note You cannot start an approval cycle from ArtiosCAD 4 3 Working with Documents Once a document has been uploaded to WebCenter you perform a number of basic operations on it such as copying deleting updating or locking it to ensure it can complete its lifecycle within the system 4 3 1 Move a Document 56 Note When a document with approval settings is copied or moved to another project the approval settings are not copied or moved A document with a started approval cycle may not be moved or copied as a link until the approval cycle is stopped WebCenter Open the project and folder containing the document to copy and select it If desired select more than one document by selecting their checkboxes oh NO Click Move document s in the Actions menu 3 4 Do one of the following If you chose to move the document Then you must in the same project Select the fold
46. OW EUO ynia ts vaseline a enchnstcs donated nia nackte ideals esa alien A 282 13 5 Creating and Starting a Workflow from a Task TYPe cccccccccccccececscecersetetsseerssetesiesetasetereeearen 283 13 6 Cr ate es NV OTTO Wonca lence oracle dla leona Da aol aa E N 284 ud VW ORITIOW INOOCS vests detent tae eau canted toc eae Ae ee Dea ae eee ina eee 286 On al PAULO WASKS i E E uatleeandaced aur tena aio aia ended RT 286 NO Gee NASI YPES aan aa aA ead esaiananee R eetyeear nae 306 13 17 39 WOrKIOW CONS MUC Sirari hcl ash tad dla ernest la he ater eel ek ened setae heehee T 315 GB Ger Ro e EE Ee A E ee RE ce eee ee re ee EE E re ee ee 324 13 2 WOrKHOW Exa PMD Sassen td lisa an hae ao a ees eed GAD eat a ch te A 324 FO WOKO WII WOIKUOW Sis cetacean A A A ENA 326 139 1 WOKHOW ACION Saciarse EE TEE E E E E 326 1 92 Reiresning a WorKHOW asmoa ee ee 327 13 9 3 Pausing and Resuming a WorkflOW s sssssssssnrrersrnrnunnrnnkinrttnnrnrnttnrn rk nnvtnnnANnNErErENENEErENENEE EEEE EE EEEE Errei 327 13 9 4 Solving a Workflow Failure ccc ccccccecsceecsssecsvscsscsvseesscsscevsesesssseerssiecssissevssietevstecsvseivaseanes 328 vii ESKO aa 1 Copyright Notice Copyright 2015 Esko Software BVBA Gent Belgium All rights reserved This material information and instructions for use contained herein are the property of Esko Software BVBA The material information and instructions are provided on an AS IS basis without warranty of any kind The
47. Projects and DOCUMENMS c ccc ccc cecccecettecscersscecsecessessessvsetsssecessessesvsetssiscesiesittaretsseniseens 49 aT VON ro al ere E E ee ee ee eee eee 49 42 Adad OGM ages cece geese ysecatet eset ten et eg erste ace sca EEA Tn acne gee EEEE Eaa EEEE TENRA 49 4 2 1 How Documents are OLrGaniZed ccccccccccccccseeeccssescscssssscscesseecscsssesscsresssessssteeststessesesess 49 42 2 DOCUMEN UY SS eaa hts es heap ahhh ios Teg stank tonnage 50 4 2 3 Different Ways to Upload DOCUMENTS ccccceceeccescesissessstsecsssstseissiecesetereteasereeg 50 4 3 Working With DOCUMENTS ccccccccccesecscsecscsecsscessssersecsssevsssessesavsessssevseseseeassecsssevsssesiecassesassersetesitsassesensariesesey 56 Ee MOVE A NOS UNE a A tratae E eto E E E E E 56 Ao GOY a DOCUMEN eae en eee eee ene nee a a Ea E aa ee ee 57 4 3 3 Delete a LOCUM OI ssyacccsccsst ss csasscersevsssan os tirenoneaetie edna clestinsssa ban tapannacacetshielusheesieseete elaaeiteedead eiaop mens eee of Fe MOGI Sey DOCU ON oiir ea Sancta ce EEE E EE oes EEE EE 58 4 3 5 Unlock a DOCUMENT sosida aiaiai 58 4 3 6 Upload a New Version or Revision of a DOCUMENT cece ices 58 4 3 7 Delete the Last Version of a DOCUMENT ccc untk ttnt nnNntrrEEENENEEEENANEEEEEEEENEEE EEE EEE Errana 59 4 3 8 Update a Document across Projects sceetccetecssesssesscsecscesssssrstassesesetteen 60 ISG no Open a DOCUMEN eae tn ene ener E EE EE eee eee E eee ee 60 43 10 Downoad a Docu mMeNi
48. Task Documents Name sa terate lab You can iterate task creation from a Task Type node The Task Type node will create tasks depending on the Iterator value aranges_big JFG apples jpg L Completed 0 3 e o Simple Task with Docs English_1 In Progress ADMIN ADMIN Simple Task with Docs Dutch_1 In Progress ADMIN ADMIN start select Document simple Simple Task with Docs Spanish_l In Prog D Docs The default option is Do not Iterate To create multiple tasks over a Project Document attribute or a Task Specification choose iterate over Attribute Parameters Notification Tteration No Iteration Tterate over Attribute Attribute BAMT Languages Document Do Not Iterate You can select this attribute via a SmartName or by manually typing in the attribute Based on the resolved value of this attribute this node will create the tasks For example e If the SmartNames resolves to a multi value text attribute indicating languages the node will create tasks based on the language variants You will get the same result when you type in the attribute values 310 WebCenter For example if youtype in Dutch Spanish English the iterator value will be Dutch Spanish and English As a result there will be three new Tasks corresponding to each language attribute value m cL 0 Simple Task with Docs Spanish 1 simple Task with Docs Dutch 1 Edit
49. Tasks 20 Discussions 0 Characteristics Attributes Project Information Approval Notifications Members Security Configure Members Search IL les iE a Grou pS Name Company Members 1 Roles only Add Members Fi Members in Project Actions Role Assignment 2 Roles 4 aPpPpROvVER Role members are displayed in the list as regular members under the Roles project member type section WebCenter Il 4 Members in Project Role Assignment ae Users D User Casual USERL a8 PRODUCER 25 Roles JJ DESIGN MANAGER J PRODUCER a Groups D DESIGNER GENT S5 PRODUCER Assignee DOJI J DESIGNER Tokyo 25 DESIGN MANAGER You can see the Roles assigned to the Users and Groups in the Role Assignment column for user and group project members lf a User is specified from the Group for a particular Role this information is displayed next to the Role reference in the Role Assignment column as Assignee USERNAME Managing Roles in a Project Log in as auser who is a Project Manager Open the project for which you want to manage the roles Click the Members tab A list of the current members is displayed A Q N Click Manage Roles link in the column header Manage Roles For each Role first select the Group to be assigned or leave it on Select Group to specify a User Assignee use the second list for that Use Invite Group checkbox to specify a Group User Member Assignee w
50. The start page defined by your administrator appears this is generally your My Work page Note You can later change the contents of your start page WebCenter WebCenter My Work Projects v Search v My WebCenter v Create v Upload My Work gt My Approvals gt My Recently Submitted Approvals gt My Tasks 3 2 Understanding the WebCenter Page Layout Header The top right of the WebCenter page always shows e the name of the current user a A icon to go back to the user s start page the Cart e alink to the WebCenter Welcome page e Admin if the user is a member of the Admins group e Contact e Logout Top Menu Bar By default the top menu bar contains the following menus My Work Projects Task Types Search My WebCenter Create if you are a Project Manager and Upload see The Default WebCenter Menus on page 14 for more details An administrator can customize the menus WebCenter My Work Projects Task Types Search w My WebCenter Create Upload If you have the optional Task Management module and the User Can Create Task Type permission Task Types also appears in the top menu bar Documents Pages Below is a sample of project s Documents page in grid layout for a user who Is a Project Manager tz WebCenter My Work v Projects v Search v My WebCenter v Create v Upload Projects 1 Project Brune s Approval Project Status
51. These modes differ in how they display the unchanged parts in the compared documents Select from 157 ESKOS View both default Ti WebCenter This mode displays the unchanged image parts as it is in its normal colors and changes in its highlight colors e Channels only present in the current version is indicated with a after the channel name e Channels only present in the reference version is indicated with a after the channel name eB lt MS Shel bl View both highlight difference This mode hides the unchanged parts Select this to view unchanged image parts with lightened colors This way you can spot the differences in a colorful image ition Orientation Measure fae aces Aino chn bis al PA View both show difference 12 WebCenter The unchanged image parts are displayed in white In this mode you can see the differences in its highlight colors and the rest of the image in white This way you can spot even small changes easily Orientation Measure Conn m mm Annotations in Compare Modes By default all annotations are hidden and you cannot make new annotations in compare modes However in the annotation list you can specify the Show annotations for as either Current or Reference Select e Current to view and make annotations in the current document e Reference to view the annotations present in the reference document You cannot draw new annotations in the referen
52. Thumbnail By default WebCenter shows the default Collada thumbnail for Collada files R To add your own thumbnail e use the Create a preview image file alongside when exporting the Collada file from Vizualiser see Creating a 3D File in Visualizer e choose either PNG or JPEG in the Include bitmaps as option when exporting the Collada file from ArtiosCAD see Creating a 3D File in ArtiosCAD e upload your own thumbnail in WebCenter a in the Document Details go to the Document Information tab b click Thumbnail and upload your thumbnail image Note The best sizes for thumbnails in WebCenter are 100x100 and 200x200 pixels 8 4 Viewing 3D Files Hyper realistic 3D viewing experience is now available in WebCenter You can view 3D in e the Java Collada Viewer e the HTML5 Collada Viewer e Click the thumbnail of a Collada file to open WebCenter s 3D Viewer As a regular user you need to have both View and Download rights to use the Collada Viewer 186 WebCenter ES http rdvmwcsql2 projsearchresults gt Project DEKE_test_Collada Document Crisps Salt zae Yersion 1 x Mt Control Panel E Note If your Collada file contains a background environment env file you will see it in the background WebCenter supports all the default Visualizer environments e Read about HTML5 3D viewing in Viewing 3D in the HTML5 Collada Viewer on page 164 8 4 1 System Requirements For P
53. Time or a Due Date Use Lead Time if you Know how long the task will take but haven t calculated a precise due date for it for example for a task in the middle of a project This calculates the Due Date automatically by adding the Lead Time to the current date Note The Lead Time only takes working days into account The Estimated field will be mostly used by the task assignee to indicate when he she expect s to have finished the task 9 Define when to Start the task e Choose Manually if you want the assignee to decide when to start the task him herself e Choose Automatically at due date minus lead time to have the task start automatically a certain number of days the Lead Time before the due date This makes sure that the task is automatically started when there is still enough time to finish it e Choose Automatically after predecessors complete if the task has predecessors and you want it to be started as soon as they are finished e Choose Automatically after predecessors complete and after due date minus lead time to have the task start automatically a certain number of days the Lead Time before the due date but only after the predecessors are finished e Choose Automatically after project creation if you want the task or workflow to be started right after project creation from a template containing this task Note If you are making the task start automatically you can still give the assignee the option
54. To activate the tool click on the Compensate Distortion tool 117 ESKO 118 Info Document Size 198 89 x 153 00 mm Resolution 787 402 ppcm GEHI ai ia Co wteti rt You can e Compensate distortion only WebCenter ig 8 WebCenter chia 2p wel wi tairi Y View Hoar mO L l a Compensate Distorbon Currently On Vertcal Distorbon 100 0 Honzontal Distorbon 90 0 Info Document Size 220 99 x 153 00 mm Compensate Scale Currently Off Resolution X 708 661 ppcm Vertcal Scale 50 0 l 787 402 ppcm Honzontal Scale 100 0 El 4 e Compensate scale only 119 ESKO Compensate Distorbon Currently Off Vertcal Distorbon 100 0 Honzontal Distortion 90 0 Compensate Scale Currently On Vertcal Scale 50 0 Honzontal Scale 100 0 gt B Document Size 198 89 x 305 99 mm Resolution X 787 402 ppcm Y 393 701 ppcm e Compensate both distortion and scale 120 EA ie Y WebCenter WebCenter Annotation QA Y er e AZE 4A FOB ition Orientation Measure T a a 7 z zs tee mn oe ae a w View HE JEE Info Document Size 220 99 x 305 99 mm EN Resolution X 708 661 ppem ay A Y 393 701 ppem f i y You can activate or deactivate one of these options by clicking on that option After the compensation of distortion or s
55. User Can Create User privilege For more information about this privilege see Create a User in the Administration Guide 1 In the Create menu click Create User Step 1 User Info in the Create New User wizard appears 2 Type the basic user information into the appropriate fields Username First Name Last Name Note Required fields are indicated with an asterisk 3 Provide the user s initial Password and confirm it Enable the option Require the user to change the password at first login to force the user to choose a new password when they first log on to the system 4 Do you want this user to see custom menus instead of the default WebCenter menus WelbCenter Custom menus allow you for example to simplify the user interface so the users only see the menus they need to use For more information see Menus Preferences in the Administration Guide e If yes choose the menu to assign to the user in User Menu e lf no leave Default in User Menu 5 Click Continue 6 In Step 2 Assign to a Company optionally select a company to which you want to assign the user Note that this can be very important to filter the content and users the new user will be able to see 7 Click Finish Your user is created 11 10 Editing Users and their Preferences 11 10 1 Edit a User 1 Inthe My WebCenter menu click My Users This shows all the users you have created 2 On the My Users page filter the list of users i
56. View both cE View both side by side See Compare Documents in the Viewer on page 141 for more information Approval Tools only when an Approval Cycle is set up The Approval tools are only available when an Approval Cycle is set up and you are an approver for the document The number of Approval tools may vary depending on the approval setup 2 Approve WebCenter e Reject Ed Comment If you are the Project Manager in WebCenter you have tools to 23 Force Approve 2 Force Reject See Approval on page 139 for more information Interactive ZOOMING You can use the zoom tools from the Navigation Tools to view the fine details of your file Activating the zoom Select the Zoom tool 4 to activate the zoom Alternatively activate the Zoom tool by pressing the Z key When Zoom is activated the mouse pointer changes to A icon Use the following shortcuts to effectively use the zoom function Click Zoom in by a factor of two Right click Zoom out by a factor of two A Reverse the zoom to Zoom out Zoom in out with the location of the mouse as center Tip Double clicking on the zoom tool A will fit the document back to view from whatever zoom factor it was in Zooming into a specific area Use Click drag action to zoom into a specific area to examine the finest details of your document When you hold the left mouse button and drag a selection rectangle will appear You can change the size of the
57. Viewer What is the HTML5 ViewerViewer The HTML5 Viewer is a fast and comprehensive viewing tool introduced in WebCenter 14 88 WebCenter From 14 1 1 onwards the HTML5 Viewer is the default WebCenter Viewer However you may choose to work with the Java Viewer default by changing it in the Viewer Preferences What does the HTML5 Viewer offer you e Speed fast viewing for Graphics and CAD files High speed 3D viewing 14 1 and later e Compatibility high speed performance on the new client browsers Internet Explorer 9 0 or higher FireFox 4 0 or higher 4 0 or higher Chrome 5 0 or higher 5 0 or higher Safari 5 0 or higher e Reliability high accuracy in displaying your data e Detail advanced zoom to see finest details measuring exact distances Fast zooming e Customizable widgets You can even restrict access to certain features depending on the user preferences e Keyboard shortcuts To see all of them press e Easy access to help and knowledge base Search in the Help widget or press F1 to access help Note The default Viewer in the WebCenter versions upto 14 1 will be the Java Viewer You can set the preferred Viewer as the HITML5 Viewer in the General or User Specific Preferences Read more in Viewer on page 40 Preferences 5 2 2 What is New in the HTML5 Viewer Restricted mode A simple Viewer layout without advanced widgets is now possible Read in Viewer Preferences Custom annotation filter
58. a Click a document thumbnail to view it in the Viewer Use the Viewer to zoom in compare to previous Document Heineken_1_RippedByOd versions annotate or approve the RIPped page p io eee ee i oe W oe ee r ee ee ee ee ee ee ee a a a ee a a a re ul 7 x N f iL EL W z kd a a 5 z r mie Str ere pene tee ashing tes FP Prd Peed LO bith REAT art ele PEE nI ne Pate Petes ne thie a l nt son no doa tse ke Fal Fu Tra a a i i i ia Aia Tra Erias a oe Ea pim hen F t Pee mpi PL pA igi k E LFS ean a g g andas PAR mi tag gee i HE k Tt T E Pht iia T pir baa i eek A aE a a E ni Se a ey ey EEA ET ee ay Pe L T Pigg E E a E 86 WebCenter Project RippedinOdystar Document Heineken_1_RippedByOd Version 1 User Vanhollebeke Matthias 7s E Cyan O Magenta E Yellow Combine with a Workflow Folder Configuration You can combine the workflow to view RIPped data in the WebCenter Viewer with the workflow folder feature to create a user friendly digital film viewing and approval solution Note Workflow folders are sometimes also referred to as push through folders More information can be found in About Workflow Folders on page 207 To achieve this proceed as follows 1 2 Log on as a WebCenter administrator and in the Admin mode go to Configuration gt Push Through Configuration To create a workflow folder click N
59. a Due Date for each stage Choose how to define those due dates e Choose No Due Dates if you don t need to use any due date Note Approval cycles tend to take longer when they don t have a due date e Choose Fixed Due Dates to specify a fixed due date for each stage You can either Define your due dates manually Have your due dates calculated automatically For each stage choose a due date from Click Due Date Calculation to generate the calendar or type it using the one of the evenly spaced due dates for your stages following formats 2 May 2010 5 2 2010 or 5 2 2010 In the pop up choose either e Give Each Stage to specify a number of Then choose a due hour from the list days and or hours to allocate each stage e Shift Due Dates with to shift all stages due dates by a certain number of days and or hours Pe Pa WebCenter 1 Define your due dates manually Have your due dates calculated automatically e Shift Due Dates to have Latest On to shift all stages due dates so that the final stage ends at the date and hour you specify The other due dates will be calculated from the final one For example if the due date of your third and final stage is May 8th and each stage takes 1 day the first stage will be due on May 6th and the second on May 7th Shift Due Dates to have First On to shift all stages due dates so that the first stage ends at the date and hour you specify For example if the due
60. a given Project Document Version and to the Project Manager of the parent Project The following steps describe how to send a download link s to a non WebCenter user 1 Select the checkboxes of the document documents to download Choose Mail Download Link from the Actions menu Your default e mail client will open with an e mail containing a link URL generated by WebCenter If you selected a large number of documents you will get a pop up from which you can copy links Click Open New Mail Message to generate a new mail If you selected a large number of documents copy and paste the contents of the pop up into a new mail message You can add a recipient and edit the content of the e mail message 6 ESKO aa 5 Send your e mail Note e The recipient of the e mail will be able to use the download link to download the file for as long as the link is valid In case the link is no longer valid the recipient will be informed it has expired e When a recipient clicks a link that is invalid expired or tampered with for example if the URL was changed he she will see a web page stating that the link is invalid 4 9 Viewing the Action History The Action History page for a document shows an overview of actions performed on the document sorted by most recent date e To view the action history click the Action History link on a document Sorted by action type the page shows e When the document was uploade
61. aE E T eieweedeenannael 214 11 2 1 1 C stomizing amp Project Status vost sccontersmccuneaceticnshanctnenacacntutadlacaliuncadlaeth Ea 214 11 2 12 Searching based a Project Status cccccscseessssccscscscssssesssesssescssvsvesesesssseeesssseee 216 11 2 13 Filtering based ON Project Status ccc ccc N R 217 11 2 14 Document creation settings IN A PLOfeCt cece ec cessteeissesstessrsreretitetatreen 217 11 3 Managing Project Members and PerMiSSIONS cccccccccccecceceecsesecscsecessessscsvsecsssecestesseavsetssietestesensaniena 218 Eo 1 O ra A E E E E E O 218 11 3 2 Add Members toa Projet esea iaaa E EA a AADA AIA Aaa ASEE AAEE 221 11 3 3 REMOVE Project MembelS erinin a ENN E N 222 11 3 4 User Group and Role Permissions in a Projet ccccccccesceecesesscsetesescsseterserareeeen 223 het ArHOSGAD Default ProjeCIS ennonn N TNA E OS 223 Lo DEMANG APP OV al SENGS aiiin Au A A A T E N AA a 224 11 5 1 Simple Approval and Staged Approval ss ssssesssensisrrrsrnsrkrrsnnrnnrnrinnnrnnrkritnnrnnrnrirrnrnnrnrevrnrnnrnrerrnrns 224 11 5 2 Setting Up a Simple Approval Cycle ccccccccccccecscsetscsrssitssssetsressessteieerenn 225 11 5 3 Allow Conditional Approval or NOt ss sssssssssrssrsrnrnitrnnnnnnktt rnrn utt r tn n NEA KEPEEENEEPEEENEEKEPEEEEEE PEPEKE EEEE 229 11 5 4 Require Review State on all ANnotations 0 cccccccccccsecscsesecssseersssecsssesscsssecssseecarseesetean 230 11 5 5 Setting Up a Staged Approval Cycle si
62. alignment tools in the Document Select widget has Invert Reference magedi option When this is enabled the reference image will be inverted 115 116 WebCenter Note If you enable the Invert View option in the View widget after inverting the reference image your reference image will be displayed in the original state Show or Hide Trimox Margins The Show Hide Trimbox margins option allows you to toggle the margin trim box lines on or off While viewing an image with trim box information this option will display the trim box as colored margin lines If there is no trim box the margin lines will follow the image outline media box GEFI i wa 25 eteti cbt Right click on L for options e Show Margins on the Current Page e Show Margins on Both Pages in Reader Spread Mode e Set Margin Trim box Color sets the margin color for the current image while comparing two images e Set Reference Margin Color sets the margin color for the reference image while comparing two images e Set Current and Reference Margin Color sets the margin color for both images while comparing WebCenter e Reset Margin Colors reverts to the viewers default margin color settings Clio Document to Margin r a The Clip document to margin bmd option limits the content to the trim box margin rs Right click on to get more options e Clip to the margin trim box in reader spread mode only prevents overlapping
63. amp Flavours Customer Care details Manufacturer name amp address Names of ingredients in descending order Net Weight 5 2 16 Channels The Channels panel shows the file s channels and offers separation viewing possibilities omposite Channels Ald all a k a E y E E cut dyap 6 Apa sen en i z t gt Cu We PIMA TO MARKET m z a ne 0 O 4 F one Viewing Separations MUN Click the View channels in separate windows button HH to switch to a tiled view of the individual separations The separations will be visible in the same order as in the channel list T22 WebCenter The composite view will always be shown as the first view followed by the visible channels in the displayed order Right click EH to choose from e Automatic tiling e Horizontal tiling e Vertical tiling Viewing and Hiding Channels Channels Widget displays the channel list in the printing sequence The first in the list is a channel All The list displays activated channel button e channel swatch indicating the color of the channel In the case of All swatch box will be white e the channel name for each channel Use button next to the channel name to hide it Note By default all channels are enabled Viewing a single Channel Right click on the eye button of a particular channel to view it as a single channel When all the channels are displ
64. and due date 12 6 2 Using My Group s Tasks To access My Group s Tasks feature log in as Group Manager Click My WebCenter gt My Group s Tasks to view the Group Tasks for Group page 2of rm ESKO WebCenter Viewing lask Assignments You can view the tasks assigned to a selected group and also for a group member within the group 1 The task list for assigned group appears Note If a Group Manager manages or is assigned to multiple groups WebCenter displays the list of managed groups You can only view the tasks for one group at a time 2 In the Tasks assigned to drop down list box select the group or group member for whom you want view the task assigned 3 A task list assigned to the selected group or group member appears Also in the list are e Task Name e Project Name e Assigned to e Status e Lead Time e Due Date e Created Date e Started Date e Estimated Date e Task Documents Viewing a Workload Overview During editing re assigning the Group Manager can have an overview of number of tasks assigned and how many are overdue The Task Count is the number of assignments assigned to a group member The Task Count displayed is based on the filtering criteria and tasks with past due date always appears The non active projects do not appear and are not counted 1 The task list for assigned group appears Note If a Group Manager manages or is assigned to multiple groups WebCenter displays the lis
65. and the angle degrees of the line in the pop up When there is no screen in a channel the value will be blank You can change the units of the measurements from the information pop up Click the settings te button and select your preferred units Your units will revert to the User Preference settings when you close the active session Dmm Ipem Ipi degree lpmim degree w lpocm degree Ipi degree Screen Orientation CW af Screen Orientation CCW To change the orientation of the angle to either clockwise Screen Orientation CW or counter clockwise Screen Orientation CCW To make an annotation from this pop up click on the Make Annotation Ll option You will get a rectangle annotation with the measurements as its content 101 ESKO sesame Measure Color Percentages You can use the densitometer Pi tool to measure ink coverage at a certain point or at the selected area Click in your file with the densitometer tool to measure the color percentages at a certain point or drag it to measure densities within an area The densities are shown in the Channels panel and in a pop up near the location you measured Channels Channels FA Cdl all 106 13 b c 0 00 is D g 16 00 106 13 v 90 13 l m e Make Annotation a K 0 00 sa cut 0 00 You can also click the Pi tool button to make a measurement based on the current view In this case the densities are o
66. approving the document set a condition for your approval if the approval cycle allows this see Allow Conditional Approval or Noton page 22 select Set Approval Condition and type your condition in the box rejecting or force rejecting the document type a reason for your rejection in the box commenting the document type your comment in the box 4 Enter your password if your WebCenter server requires it 5 Click the Commit button lf unsaved annotations are present the Viewer alerts you about this while trying to Approve Reject Comment Once you have approved or rejected the document you may not change its approval status later only a Pending status allows future changes lf you have entered an approval condition a rejection reason or a comment it will be shown in e the Approval tab of the Document Details page e the Action History tab of the Document Details page e o the Java Viewer s Document History panel e the HITML5 Viewer s Approval Details panel To see all the documents you have recently evaluated go to My Work gt My Recently Submitted Approvals Note If you cannot see My Recently Submitted Approvals go to My WebCenter gt My Work Setup to add it to your My Work page 6 2 Evaluate a Document in the Document Details Page When you need to evaluate an office file like Microsoft Word Excel PowerPoint etc you can first download it and open it in the corresponding application then evaluate i
67. be saved for your next use See also The Viewer Window on page 90 Note lf your browser window becomes too small the sidebars will be collapsed automatically Make your window larger to view the sidebars again The modal widgets will stay in its location 5 2 5 The Information Bar The Information bar displays e The Project name e The Document name e The CAD info icon If your CAD files were saved using ArtiosCAD 14 0 2 or newer you will see CAD info icons U ee The icons are e Grain Flute direction Horizontal or Vertical _0_180_front pdf Version 1 y H Honzontal Aute Corrugated or Grain Folding Carton e Side Inside or Outside e Die Side Die Knife Side or Back Side only for MFG files These icons will follow your rotate or mirroractions on the file e The Version number and the Revision letter Note In Compare mode the two document names and version revision details will be visible separated by comparelb pdf Version 1 comparela pdf Version 1 e The User Name Note This will be used in Annotations and Approvals lq 4 af 3 Page Navigator This is only available when a multi page document is active Use this to navigate through the pages of open documents Or navigate to a page by typing in the number and pressing Enter Read also Viewing Multi Page Documents and Page Lists on page 153 93 ESKO scone 94 The Print button This opens the Print Dialog
68. be set as the document image after checking and registering You have to enable Make project thumbnail during the upload of documents to use this feature Attributes Name Value Type Make project thumbnail E yes or no Note When a document with the Make project thumbnail attribute set to yes is moved or linked or copied to another project that projects thumbnail will also be changed to the thumbnail of this document Remember This attribute has no effect when the document s thumbnail is manually changed to another thumbnail Notes on Thumbnall Images When specifying a custom thumbnail consider the following e WebCenter automatically scales the thumbnail as needed to two sizes depending on where it is used The larger size is 100 x 100 pixels the smaller 50 x 50 pixels e The maximum file size of a thumbnail is 1 million bytes whether it is custom or generated This limit is configurable contact Professional Services for more information 11 1 5 Create Folders in a Project You may only create one level of folders in a project under the Project Documents folder Log in as a project manager Open the project you manage which will contain the new folder If it is not selected already click Documents on the Details menu In the Folders column at left click Add Folder in the Actions menu Enter the name of the new folder in the Folder Name field O 0O FB Q N a Optionally you can e Select Wor
69. can only copy from projects you manage If you are a project manager you can also copy a project from the project details More Actions menu 5 In the Copy setup from an Existing Project pop up select what you want to copy from the old project into the new project and deselect what you don t want to copy Copy setup from an Existing Project Copy Project Manager Copy Members Copy Approval Settings Copy Folders Including Documents Including Bill of Materials Copy Attributes Copy Characteristics Copy Tasks From Template Y Please select or start typing Copy Security Settings Copy Notifications For Tasks you can choose to copy the Tasks from the original Template or from another Template by typing in the template name The default setting is to copy Tasks from the Project that is being copied Click OK Fill in the new project s Details If desired add Documents to the project Add Members to the project O ON O If the template has attributes defined fill them in the Attributes section 10 Click Create 205 my ESKOS WebCenter This brings you to the new project s details page 11 1 4 Automatic Project Thumbnail Images from Documents When a new graphics ArtiosCAD or CHILI document is being uploaded to a Project or Template the user will have an option to check if the document image needs to be taken as the Project Thumbnail If this option is checked the Project thumbnail will
70. comments will also be deleted irrespective of the author e Duplicate the annotation Use this to make a variation e g correction of an annotation made by another user e Save the annotation Filter annotations by author or review state Create or edit Custom filter Click Y to get the Custom Annotation Filter window Lock custom filter by clicking the pin If you lock a custom filter it stays active for other documents and consequent viewer sessions 5 2 10 Approval Details 110 In Approval Details you can see the current approval status the approval actions approval info WebCenter v Approval Details 1 Stagel Approver Peeters Michiel MIPE Type User Status Version Qs Pending Approver skva SKVA Type User Status Version f Approved Approval Date Jun 3 2014 at 15 29 You can collapse expand this widget and drag it around 9 2 11 3D View The 3D View widget always shows the HIML5 version of the 3D viewer After the 3D generation you can view the 3D mockups in this widget 3D View EA yf From within this widget you can E A Open the 3D Viewer in a new window e close the 3D View widget 5 2 12 Navigator When you open a document in the Viewer you can view its thumbnail in the Navigator This gives an overview of the current view position Use this widget to quickly navigate through the entire document The navigator highlights the area visible in the view port wit
71. create a Workflow by combining workflow nodes 3 To start the workflow make the task status active such as in progress 13 6 Create a Workflow You can create a workflow from the Workflow Editor of any Task Type Workflow a Auto Tasks Add to Bill of Materials oe TEKEE f S ES Copy Move Document B k Select Document Completed Send notification g 5et Document Attribute Set Project Attribute set Project Status es Set Workflow Specificat AR Set Workflow Status vf Start Approval Cycle ms a a ai se Maximize Zoom In Zoom Out Zoom to fit Delete selected items Reload Resources SQ Submit Workflow 1 Click on the Task Types from the top menu items 2 Click on the Workflow tab to open the editor You will get a blank canvas containing only the Start and Completed nodes 3 Drag and drop your chosen nodes from the workflow nodes list onto the canvas You can add nodes to create a workflow There are four types of nodes e Auto Tasks on page 286 e Manual Task Types e Workflow Constructs on page 315 e Statuses on page 324 284 13 WebCenter See Auto Tasks and Workflow Constructs on page 286 for more information about nodes Tip e To find a node quickly you can either use the filter or the search field on top of the workflow nodes list e To delete a node right click and select Delete 4 If desired double click your nodes names to rename them 5 Connect your nodes with
72. date of your first stage is May 3rd and each stage takes 1 day the second stage will be due on May 4th and the second on May 5th Distribute Due Dates Evenly From to space due dates evenly between two dates you specify For example if you space a 3 stages cycle between May 1st and May 31st each stage will take 10 days the due dates will be respectively the 11th 21st and 31st of May Note By default stages due dates are spaced one day apart before you define the fixed due dates Choose Lead Times to define how much time each stage should take as a maximum For each stage define the Lead Time in Days and or Hours The lead time is added to the date a stage starts to define the stage s due date For example if a stage starts on May 2nd and has a 2 days lead time it is due to be completed on May 4th Attention WebCenter only takes week days into account So if you start a stage ona Friday with a 3 day lead time it will be due the next Wednesday and not the next Monday Choose Lead Times with Final Due Date to give a lead time to each stage and give a final due date for the approval cycle lf a stage has to be repeated it will be given the same lead time again The final version of the document has to be approved by the final due date For example the approval cycle starts on May 1st and has to be completed by May 11th The Final Due Date is 10 days away 233 my ESKOS WebCenter If you have 3 stages
73. e To use a custom thumbnail click Change beside the default Thumbnail Select Specify New Thumbnail and enter the complete path and filename in the associated field or Browse for it To use the default thumbnail leave that choice selected f If desired enter a project description in the Description field g To specify an optional due date click the calendar at the end of the Due Date field and select the desired due date To set the due time click the drop down list to the right of the calendar control To add Documents to the project click Add Item in the Documents section and either e Browse to the document to add e Copy a document from another project select the project then the document to copy Tip Use the icons to search for a project or document name You can then change the document s Name and add an optional Description Invite members to the project select each member role or group to invite in the Invite members list To remove a member role or group click the associated minus sign Click Create This brings you to the new project s details page 11 1 2 Create a Project from a Template 200 A OO N Log in as a project manager In the Create or Projects menu click Create Project Choose Use a Project Template in the Create list Select the Template to use Tip To view the contents of a Template click Show Details This opens the Template in another window Explore the co
74. e You can give a reason for your rejection in the text box 9007908 Rejected Please re enter password ADMIN ADMIN iene Cancel For example if you reject a document because of a specific image detail use annotations and add this as an approval comment e You may also just Comment without approving or rejecting 139 ESKO socom Note lf you Comment the approval status is Pending until you approve or reject it later e Commit button to save your approval or rejection and comments to the server The approval status will be displayed in the top toolbar in the place of Approval tools This status will be Pending if the Approval Cycle is still on going Remember If you are in the Compare mode you can only do the approval actions on the current document page Read also Evaluate a Document in the Viewer on page 140 Evaluate a Document in the Viewer When you need to evaluate a graphic file or a page list see Document Types on page 50 for information about the supported file types you can first open it in the Viewer to look at it in detail You can then approve reject or comment it directly from the Viewer 1 Click the document s thumbnail or the amp button You can do this from e the My Work page under My Approval if you have documents to approve or under Approvals to Follow Up if you are an Approval Master e the Documents tab in the project e the header of the Document Details page 2
75. finished This allows you to be as close as possible to your company s real life approval process while taking advantage of WebCenter s automating and tracking capabilities For example if adocument needs to be approved by the marketing finance and legal departments you can use three approval stages e Inthe first stage one or several people from the marketing department will be asked to approve the document e Inthe second stage the finance department will have to approve or reject the document e Inthe final stage the document will be sent to the legal department for approval 11 5 2 Setting Up a Simple Approval Cycle WebCenter enables you to define a number of approval settings who approves the document when what happens when the document is rejected etc to match your real life business process as closely as possible Note You need the Change Approval permission to create or edit an approval setup To get to the simple approval setup page for a project a folder or a document 1 Go to the Approval tab a project the project page s Approval tab Tip If your project has sub folders go to the project page s Documents tab first and click the top level folder at left called Project Documents This ensures you have selected the project and not one of its Sub folders a folder the folder you want to define approval settings for on the project page s Documents tab Then click the Approval
76. in Using the Cart on page 47 Creating a Project from the Asset Browser Your Packaging Projects often involve modification of existing packaging or creation of new packaging with recurring elements You can use a template for the recurring elements Asset Browser will help you to browse for these templates and existing packaging projects You can start creating a project directly from the Asset Browser You can do this by e using the Cart to collect items and starting a project using Create Project from Cart link e or by selecting the Create Project from Selected option from action list menu This will lead to the WebCenter project creation user interface My Work New Request Projects x Asset Browser x Search x My WebCenter x Upload Documents iy Search Results Show Left Panel Ly Selection Packaging S Packaging Sub Type _ Product Type gt Brand gt Packaging Variant LT gt Product Search Select criterion w Currently in your cart El Select All in Cart Create Project from Cart Remove from Cart VALUE _ 3_Green 3_Green CN Print ES a b ce ope D 3 IMAGE j E Speed 5L E display E display REDUCTION jpeg f IMAGE_COLOR Jpeg 2 finishing zae header ai header ai Found 17 items F Actions View and Annotate Compare in Viewer Dovmload Add to art Create Project from Selected Name 3 Green display header ai Description Name 3 Green display header ai
77. information V Do not show this again for apps from the publisher and location above g More Information Run Cancel you need to 1 optionally click Do not show again for apps from the publisher and location above if you don t want to see this security warning the next time you open the workflow editor 2 click Run e If you see Do you want to run this application y Name wfapplet amp Publisher Esko Software bvba _ Location http rdvmwc04 WebCenter_Inst This application will run with unrestricted access which may put your computer and personal information at risk Run this application only if you trust the publisher V Do not show this again for apps from the publisher and location above g More Information Run Cancel Me you need to 1 click I accept the risk and want to run this app 2 optionally click Do not show again for this app if you don t want to see this security warning the next time you open the workflow editor 3 click Run Read more in Create a Workflow on page 284 13 5 Creating and Starting a Workflow from a Task lype Creating and Starting a Workflow To create a Workflow you need to 1 Create a new Task Type or use an existing Task Type 283 Ky ESKO WebCerter Note Task types can only be created by Project Managers with the User Can Create Task Type permission or by Admins 2 In that Task Type open the workflow tab and
78. list images You can use the green lt button to go back one step at a time e Click on Search to get the assets filtered to your selections Note If the Search button is not available in your Asset Browser your results will be automatically set according to your criteria Using the Cart from the Asset Browser You can use the Cart in the Asset Browser to assemble the assets selected from the Asset Browser From the Cart you can e start the viewer e download the assets e start a new project with these assets 33 ESKO sesame e modify the assets You can do several rounds of searching and browsing to add documents one by one to the Cart and then proceed with the actions listed above Note The Cart has to be configured by the administrator while determining the settings of the Asset Browser the Saved Search Read more in Configuring the Cart in the Asset browser AssetDemo Show Left Panel x Selection gt Brand b Packaging Variant _ f gt Product Search Select criterion Currently in your cart E Select All in Cart Create Project from Cart Remove from Cart Shrink Wra p 6 A 3 VALUE A VALUE 3_Green h f IMAGE_COLOR jpeg IMAGE_GREEN jpeg pari Orange ai Name r Description Project Brand Sub Brand Size Packaging maa 3 Green display header ai Asset Library Esko Value Green 3Nos Display You can read more about Cart
79. may also Change Color of the annotation e Enter your comment inside the annotation window and save Read also Annotation Window on page 129 Annotation Window While creating an annotation an annotation window appears where you can add comments 129 5 130 WebCenter O skva SKVA qT B ZUS xx Clear this WW change Color ig Delete You can emphasize parts of the text using the formatting options You may also undo and redo any changes you made in the text Tip You can move the window to move the annotation to a new position Annotation Pop up If you select an existing annotation the corresponding annotation pop up opens The pop up contains e the type of annotation e the annotation sequence number e the annotator s name e the annotation text e the list of replies e the list of review states DO skva SKVA q7 Clear this we Q ooo In the annotation pop up you can e Pin the annotation pop up By default the annotation pop ups are unpinned Use the Pin icon to pin the annotation pop up to the location To unpin click on the Unpin 7 button The setting you choose will be remembered e Close the annotation Set the review state al of the annotation Choose the review state from the sub menu WebCenter eT KvA ee eee Rejected Cancelled e Completed None The annotation list panel will display the new review state including the name of the reviewer Sav
80. needs to shift to later or to earlier and apply the same shift to all others e Shift due dates to have the first one starting on a certain date select the tasks to change enter the start date of the first task and click Try This will look how much the task with the first starting date shifts and apply the same shift to the due dates of all tasks This would be typical for a set of tasks of which just one is started This starting date allows calculating the rest of the track Note You cannot move tasks to before Today e Re distribute due dates to start on a certain date and end on a certain date Select the tasks to change enter the new start and end dates and click Try This will compress the selected tasks lead times to fit within the given dates By default the starting date is today and the end date is the project due date Tip You can also use this to do backward planning by only giving an end date and disabling the start date checkbox or forward planning by only giving a start date and disabling the end date checkbox 4 If you are not satisfied with the changes you can click Reset to go back to the original dates You can then Try to change the dates using a different method When you are satisfied with the changes click Save This will send an e mail notification to the task assignees if this is configured You can also click Cancel to return to the task list without saving your changes You can also see your
81. on the same button Viewing Annotations in Compare The annotations are hidden by default when comparing two documents Set Show Annotations for e Current e Reference to display annotations from either the current or the reference version Annotations are hidden because Side by Side compare mode is active Show annotations for BI Current mj Reference In Blinking compare mode the annotations are hidden Note You can edit the annotations from the current document but not from the reference document Annotating in a Multi page Page List Document While Viewing Multi Page Documents and Page Lists on page 153 you can make annotations e onthe active page e onthe adjacent page e across both pages WebCenter When you draw annotations in the non active page area a message will ask you to confirm if you want to draw an annotation outside the current page This warning does not appear when you draw an annotation across both pages Note Reader Spread View on page 154 displays only the annotations from the currently active page 5 2 20 Approval You can evaluate and approve the documents in approval cycle from the Viewer using the approval tools Clicking on any of the approval too s opens the approval pop up e You may set a condition for your approval if the approval cycle allows this Select Set approval condition and type in your condition 0O 7908 Approved Set Approval Condition eee Cancel
82. one another To do this click a node s green pin and drag it onto the next node This links the two nodes with a green tube Jo Bdle Select Document Add to Bill of Materials Note e You can connect a node s output to several other nodes e To remove a connecting tube drag its arrow head to a blank area on the canvas Warning Since 14 1 you cannot self reference a node Self referencing happens when the error pin is connected again to the input pin of the same node This will result in an error when when you start the workflow 6 Double click each node and fill in its parameters in the Edit Parameters pop up 239 ESKO WebCenter a Oo Edit Parameters of Select Document Project Name Project Name Select is Documents in the project Name Folder root O Documents in the Bill of Materials El Fail if no documents found Ooo ak Cancel U 7 When you are done click the Save button to save your workflow 13 7 Workflow Nodes 13 7 1 Auto Tasks An Auto Task is a step in the node which does not demand human intervention Auto tasks are automatically executed using predefined parameters the attribute values or SmartNames Auto Tasks and Workflow Constructs Add to Bill of Materials Adds the incoming document s to the E current project s Bill of materials Add to Bill of Materials The workflow completes when all operations for a workflow have finished
83. output of this task type node will depend also on the Output Tab settings 311 ESKOw WebCerter ola Tip You can use the Iterator Value in combination with other node parameters such as Role Assignee Select Role Role Editor Iterator Value Assign To All of Role One per Group a gt Select Group gt Select User If you select multiple assignees for example by selecting All of Role for a task the node will execute the Iterate over an attribute function first Based on the Iterator value and Assignee it will then create tasks for the multiple task assignees all of role in this example This allows using the iterator SmartName in the assignee fields for roles and groups Read in Parameters Tab on page 306 Notifications Tab This tab allows you to create and send Notifications without adding a Send Notification node The configuration is almost the same as the Send Notification on page 299 node However the are extra SmartNames available in this tab to refer to the just created updated task WebCenter Send Notification To Current Task Owner E mail Subject A E MAW om Brus A Aa none default In the To field type the e mail addresses of the receivers or select them using SmartName The following SmartNames are supported e Project Manager e Sales Person e Workflow Master the project member who is assigned the whole workflow as a task in the projec
84. page margins with image content in reader spread view mode This option is useful while viewing multi page documents e Clip to the margin trim box clears the content outside the trim box This is the same as a rn y simple click on the Clip document to margin 2 button Compensate Distortion and Scaling Distortion is a technique used to pre compensate graphics which will be printed with a non uniform printing technology Distortion is typically done during the RIP ping process In some workflows scaling is used in place of distortion to pre compensate for distortion in printing process The Compensate Distortion tool allows to compensate both distortion and scaling You can use this tool while comparing files with and without distortion or with different distortion values Note This tool is available in the View widget only when the active or reference file has a distortion and or scale Hover on the tool to see the current distortion and scale values for the documents Compensate Distorbon Currently Off Vertical Distorbon 100 0 90 0 Honzontal Distorbon 90 0 100 0 Compensate Scale Currently Off Vertical Scale 50 0 Honzontal Scale 100 0 Use this tool to compensate e the distortion of the active and reference document when the documents only have distortion e the scale if the active documents only have scaling e both the distortion and scale of the documents if the active documents have both
85. picker to select a color for the image and window background Select the image background color and click the to view the result Note Your color choices are remembered for your next session When you enable the background color options the same colors will be available 113 5 114 WebCenter i Reset Background Colors Note The Viewer retains the last used colors for your next session However if you select different background colors for different pages or documents those will be remembered only in the current session To turn off the tool and view the image with white background click the View trom Back Use the View from Back F to mirror the view You can see the image from the back side and the channel sequence will be reversed This is a useful tool if you are inspecting an image to be printed on a transparent medium Set Overprint Highlight Color The Set Overprint Highlight Color _ _ lets you select a mask color to display in all areas where two or more active channels are overlapping This allows you to check if trapping is done correctly Click the tool on or off to have the overprint color highlight on or off M 5 b A he a w p pei g k B a amp amp z eyo af Use the Invert View Li option to invert the image or images being viewed While comparing if you enable Invert View option both the images will be inverted Invert View The orientation and
86. point and drag either one of the four border lines You can also grab one of the four corners and resize with the help of a resize cursor To move a rectangle annotation click and drag it to the new location Note Highlight annotations can be modified in the same way as Rectangle annotations To change an oval annotation shape use any of the anchor points Click and drag to move the annotation Hold and drag the end points to modify line annotations or arrow annotations You can also select and drag the line or arrow to another location Select and drag freehand annotations to change its location within the image However the size and shape cannot be changed WebCenter e You can use More actions gt Edit annotation in the annotation window or in the Annotation List on page 109 to edit the annotation or reply text Note This is only possible if you are the author of the annotation reply After editing you can either Save or Cancel the text changes Linking Annotations You can add multiple annotation areas to a single annotation note The linked annotations share the same text sequence number replies and review state This helps you to draw multiple areas to one single annotation 1 Select the annotation to be linked with the new annotation shape 2 Click on Add Annotation and choose the annotation shape 3 Create the new annotation holding the Shift key The new annotation is linked to the selected annotation T
87. presented as a separate project member 11 3 3 Remove Project Members ae Note You may only remove Project members who are not Approvers in an active Approval Cycle 1 Log in as a project manager 2 Open the Project from which you want to remove members 3 Click Members A list of the current members is shown If desired use the filter to refine the list 4 Select the users groups and roles to uninvite from the Project In case you want to unassign a user or group from a role select the specific entry for this combination 5 Click Remove in the actions menu 6 Click OK to confirm the removal WebCenter The member s are removed from the Project 11 3 4 User Group and Role Permissions in a Project When a user is invited to a project several times as an individual user through the Add Members function as part of a Group and or as part of a Role his her permissions on the project are calculated as follows e As a general rule all permissions are added so that the user has the most permissions For example 1 The user is invited to the project with the View and Download permissions 2 He is added to a Role that has the Add permission on this project 3 Then the user will have the View Download and Add permissions on this project e Exception 1 when a user is already invited directly as an individual user to a project re inviting him her through a Group doesn t change his her permissions e Exception 2
88. see all the documents you have recently evaluated go to My Work gt My Recently Submitted Approvals Note If you cannot see My Recently Submitted Approvals go to My WebCenter gt My Work Setup to add it to your My Work page 6 3 Evaluate Multiole Documents at Once Ka If you have several documents to approve or reject and you have made the same decision about all of them you want to either accept them all or reject them all you can do this in one operation 1 Go to your My Work page 2 In the My Approvals section select the documents to approve or reject Tip To select all the documents at once select the check box at the top of the documents list 3 At the top of the document list click to approve the documents you cannot use conditional approval on several documents at once to reject them to comment them WebCenter Note e Use the buttons at the top of the list and not the ones beside a document or you will only approve reject comment that document e If you are not Project Manager for some of the documents you selected Forced Approve and Forced Reject are not available If you are commenting the document type your comment in the pop up s box If you are rejecting the document you can enter a rejection reason in the pop up s box Enter your password if your WebCenter server requires it Depending on your choice click Commit Approval Commit Rejection or Commit Comme
89. select this if you want to copy a document to a new location while keeping it in the original location You can choose to e Link the new document to the original document e Create a New version if the document already exists in the new location e New revision if Document already exists enable this to raise the revision while copying or updating This will raise the revision letter and create a new version if the document already exists Note The option is visible only if your Admin gt Preferences gt General gt Allow increment Document Revision when uploading a new Document Version is on e Copy Viewer Annotations use this option to copy viewer annotations of documents while copying e Move select this if you want to move a document to a new location removing it from the original location Project Name Enter the name of the Project into which you want to copy move the document Folder Enter the name of the Project s folder into which you want to copy move the document Name Enter the name to give the document in the new location if desired Tip You can use SmartNames for the Project Name Folder and Name parameters Create Project This node allows you to create or update projects from your workflow You can also iterate the project creation to create multiple projects at once For example using a multivalued attribute Note This node is only available if you have the WebCenter Advanced license You need at l
90. selection rectangle by dragging the mouse without releasing the left mouse button To move the selection rectangle around hold the left mouse button and space bar while dragging When the left mouse button is released the viewer zooms to fit this rectangle If you are zoomed in with a ratio 1 10 or more each document pixel is displayed with a small border as a grid In compare modes you will see the active document area as grid Zoom to 1 1 Pixel When you have artwork with a defined resolution you can use it to zoom to the image resolution Right click on A and select from or ESKO scone 98 e Zoom to 1 1 Pixel use this to view the image in its rasterized resolution e Zoom to Actual Size use this to view your artwork or image in the size corresponding to the printed size You may need to set your monitor resolution to make this accurate Note When the monitor resolution is not set or when the image resolution is not set the Viewer takes 72ppi as default e Set Monitor Resolution use this option to set your monitor resolution Your set monitor resolution will be stored in the Viewer e You can specify the resolution as a decimal number e g 36 05 ppcm or as a fraction in the pixels size format Read more about this in the Knowledge Base article Note Your settings will be saved for your later use Using the Pan Tool To pan the view click the Vs Pan tool or activate the Pan tool by pressing the H key The p
91. sequence of a workflow Workflow Auto Tasks q 3 Add to Bill of Materials ES Copy Move Document B k Select Document Completed Send notification 4 Set Document Attribute Set Project Attribute Set Project Status WEA Ika TE Set Workflow Specificat Set Workflow Status 2 Start Approval Cycle a Xe iia ifm seh Maximize Zoom In Zoom Out Zoomtofit Delete selected items Reload Resources Submit Workflow The workflow canvas By default this only contains a Start node and a Completed node You can monitor your workflow while it is processing files and you can diagnose a finished workflow The Workflow editor tool bar Use it to e Maximize the canvas in your browser window and minimize it again Zoom in Zoom out or Zoom to fit Delete the selected items Reload Resourcesreload the resources used by the workflow task types attributes and any data used by SmartNames like documents projects users 3 e Use the filter to select certain workflow node types see Workflow Node Types Using this you can choose to display All or only 281 13 WebCenter e Auto Tasks e Statuses e Task Types e Workflow Constructs e Use the search field to search on node names The search field accepts wildcards The Task pane shows all the Auto Tasks Statuses and workflow constructs that you can use in a workflow Drag and drop them onto the canvas You can easily
92. ssar AEE R aea 61 4 3 11 Download Multiple DOCUMENTS ccc ccc cece ccsecetecetsssetssssrsstessetesseressevsstesietassessserietesiesaseriteens 61 4 3 12 Download Documents from Multiple LOCAtIONS ccc cece ecetecetsrersteristesetererstereeen 61 4 3 13 Viewing and Printing a Document s Annotation REport ccc 62 4 3 14 Online Document Editing with CHILI ccc escesscsescrsesrssrssrassestenen 62 4 4 Assigning Document AttriDutes ccc cccceccceecsreecscessrsscssessscesscsssstsecsssscesssissssceseetseirsseseresetes 63 Contents AAV ASSIGN IDOCUMENE ATIMIDUTCS iscsi cst cos ccess E EE tae cnet caged nia TAE AE 64 4 4 2 Change DOCUMENT ATIMDULCS 5 crscacccrscssenantacsctabessasiiacstsies uae uresnunwensuslpencphueasraceiactboriatastnonensadlegsaeestubsteaddetue 64 4 4 3 Change an Attribute Category cccccccccccsccecccscsetscsrsssecsssssecsrssssssistssssesetstesseesseseerenenn 64 A EO OIE ANDES TO JDE urean seat hed Metres tna EA A 64 4 4 5 Import Attributes from JF irstuits i tiaesoicisianredaums a pcditeasar tit onde baa aaa ed ene 65 A ASSIONING DOCUMENT Characteristi S asics ax iis suceesselanasiie tarsi Swi itelhl na reas ria bccn eee ben tes obit escalates 65 AB DOW MOA GING A PIO CL ienion als aeisesswusnotal E E E 66 4 7 E Mailing Links to Documents and PYrOjeCts ccc ceteceecssetscsscsstessetesetsssscistesittasetsserisritareds 67 4 8 E Mailing Links to Download DOCUMENTS ccccccccccccescetecessc
93. tab a document the Document Details page s Approval tab 225 17 226 WebCenter Note You can also get to the Approval tab by e clicking Setup document approval right after uploading the document to the project clicking the Setup Approval Cycle link corresponding to the document on the project s Documents tab several documents Actions gt Setup Approval Cycle after selecting the documents in the project or folder Note This will start the approval setup from zero even if some of the documents selected already have an approval setup 2 Click Setup Approval Note You can only set up an approval cycle for a project folder document that does not already have a Started approval cycle You can also convert a simple approval to a staged approval click Convert to Staged Approval on the simple approval setup page Set the Approval Due Date For a simple approval you can set a single due date which is the same for all approvers Choose how to define the Due Date Choose No Due Date if you don t need a due date for your approval cycle Note Approval cycles tend to take longer when they don t have a due date Choose Fixed Due Date if you want to give a fixed due date to your approval cycle Choose a due date from the calendar or type it using the one of the following formats 2 May 2010 5 2 2010 OF 572 2010 Then choose a due hour from the list Choose Lead Time to define how much time t
94. templates See Document Templates in the Administration Guide for more information about document templates and Assigning Document Attributes on page 63 for more information about attributes 2 You can then change the document s Name and add an optional Description Add Project Members In the Members section of the Create Project page you can either Invite members to the project select each member or group to invite in the Invite members list To remove a member group click the associated minus sign If the template project you are copying from contains roles you can assign user groups or individual users You can see roles the template original project contains and are available for assignment at project creation time in the Members section e To assign a role to a user group 1 Select that user group in the Group list 2 Select who in the group will be the User Assignee Note Leave the option Select User if you want any user of the group or all of the group users depending on what was set when adding the role to the template original project to be Approver Task Assignee Project Group Approver Task Assignee Invite Group DESIGNERS STAR DESIGN AGENCY a Doe Jane JANEDOE wi WebCenter Note If you are using filtering the role s name is the first word of the name of the group you want to replace it with you will only see the groups matching that filter in the Group
95. the Attributes to export Click Attributes Set the values for the Attributes as desired and click Save to set them If they are already set as desired skip this step Click Export WebCenter WebCenter automatically names the file lt document name gt attrs jdf Any periods in the document name will be converted to underscores 5 Save the file in the desired location 4 4 5 Import Attributes from JDF Important If you want to import Attributes that are not generated by another WebCenter system you should generate a sample JDF file for the people using the other system to use as a reference so that they format their JDF file correctly The important lines are the ones similar to lt eg SmartName Name Attribute Name Value Value gt there must be a Value tag for each Name tag To import a JDF file containing Attributes with changed values for a document do the following 1 Navigate to the document with the Attributes to import 2 Click Attributes 3 In the Import from JDF file field enter the path and name of the file or click Browse and select it that way 4 Click Import The values for existing Attributes are updated if necessary If there are either too few or too many Attributes defined in the file as compared to the document WebCenter will mention it in a status message 4 5 Assigning Document Characteristics Characteristics are descriptive tags that can be assigned to projects or do
96. the case of Router Documents in the Workflow There are a few ways to attach input documents to a workflow e You can upload them to the project where the Workflow task is added to In this case these are inputs for the Start node e You can use a Select Document node to pick up documents e You can have a Human Task to upload documents For example when a designer creates and uploads an artwork Workflow Tokens Documents and operations processed by the workflow are represented by tokens traveling through it The position of a token indicates what is currently happening which node is being executed A red token indicates an error Using a Router node you can split a token and its documents into multiple tokens which will follow their own path through the workflow network After certain workflow tasks you can use a Data collector to aggregate these into a single token again SmartNames Certain parameters of the workflow nodes are SmartName enabled This is a variable that will be resolved only when the node is executed When the value is resolved for example an attribute value is found this will be used as the value during the execution of the node Click the SmartName L button in an input field to use this feature WebCenter 13 3 Tne Workflow Editor The workflow editor appears as below By default it contains a Start node and a Completed node A node or step represents an individual operation performed in the
97. the roles in the system visible to the current user e Project Manager default The project manager of the project containing the workflow e Sales Person The sales person of the project in which the workflow runs Note The Sales Person should be invited to the project e Workflow Master User group role to which the workflow is assigned task assignee of the workflow task e All other configured roles visible to the current user Use the Assign To field to specify the iteration settings for the task e One of Role setting for creating and assigning one task for the role e Allof Role One per Group setting for creating and assigning individual tasks for each group user in that role Only one task is created and assigned per group e All of Role setting to create and assign individual tasks for each unique user in the role including users in groups assigned to the role Select Group You can select the assignee from the drop down listing all the visible groups Specify the Assign To field as e One of Group to create one task assigned to the group e All of Group to create and assign tasks for each user in the group Select User from the drop down of all the users visible to the current user The user should be invited to the project Note The role group user should be invited to the project If you are using a SmartName or free text the resolved role group name should be invited in the project Note If the Pro
98. tmumonan na version UTTSetA Urrse A 1 toothpaste ard 1 39 947238 170 6 Navigator Inks in Viewer View Add Ink s Thumbnail Dt a a p es T S AA N aada e e R NE O eeN E E Pantone Process Cyan C i m Pantone Process Magenta C F al Paviona Procpes YoiowG oo n fp o a een eT a ca IR aie GE oe 16 95 B Pantone Process Black C View oA S ToS TEER Add Icon s pA lel an Checklists o Final Checklist Select All Deselect All F All annotations have been reviewed Check overall appearance E All other checklists are complete 4 m J Layers All Lay Annotation List wow Ma Custom Filter is Enabled X Overall dimensions Custom Filter is Enabled ad LEE as Document Size 291 00 x 50 mm 2 Trim Size 287 00 x 152 50 mm E Resolution 200 787 ppcm ag C Approval Details z Search Knowledge Base al m No Approval Setup Defined earch Knowledge Base The Information Bar Top Tool Panel Toggle Side Bar Document Select Attributes Annotation List Approval Details The View area 9 3D View 10 Navigator 11 View 12 Channels 13 CAD 14 nfo 15 Help 2 eo Pe YS See also HTML5 Viewer video tutorial 91 ESKOS 92 The Viewer Window Layout WebCenter The Viewer window will be in the desktop layout if it is opened in a HIML5 compatible desktop browser When you open the Viewer in a tablet or a smart phone you will get a mobile optimi
99. to select documents with any rejected status Rejected or Force Rejected e All Completed to select documents with any approved or rejected status Tip You can search for document revisions The revision field can be shown in the search results and can be used to sort the results You can search for revisions only if your administrator has set this up for you Read about this in Configure Search Crawler Setup You can specify the revision you want to search for from the drop down Select e Latest Revision to search the latest revision of the document you are searching for Only the latest revision will appear in the results A document can appear multiple times in the search results if multiple versions are linked to different projects Note The search results will show only the document revisions linked to at least one project If a version is linked to a project all the revisions prior to that can be found in the search For example a document has three revisions Base versions 1 2 and 3 Revision A versions 4 5 and 6 and Revision B version7 lf the revision indexing is not enabled the search will find only version 7 if this is the only version linked to a project currently When revisions are indexed all the latest versions of the previous revisions will appear in the search results The search will find version 3 Base 6 A and 7 B e All Revisions to display all revisions of the document e Base Revision to search fo
100. to your reference date depending on this setting e lf your Planning is set to Forward the Lead days and hours are added 314 WelbCenter e lf your Planning is set to Backward the Lead days and hours are subtracted Percentage Lead Time Compressing Another way to specify the due date is by specifying the lead time in percentage A percentage of the difference between the current date and the reference date The Based on date is the SmartName enabled reference date Use Current Date Workflow Duedate Workflow start date and any date attribute as the reference If your workflow due date is on 27th Thursday and the current date is the 13th e The number of days is calculated as 10 working days e f your percentage set as 20 the task will add two working days to the current date to calculate the task due date August 2015 Project Due Date Based on The lead time is calculated based on the percentage 20 40 working days between the start date 137 and the Project Due date 0 2 working days are added to the task execution date When the task is started on 20 there are 5 workign days before the due date and task due date is the 21 13 7 3 Workflow Constructs Workflow constructs are tools nodes that help you build the workflow They help control the flow of data and or documents through the workflow 315 IK ESKOS 316 WebCenter Error Handler The Error Handler node is a workflow construct
101. use it to collect items from several rounds of searching You can then download or start with a new project from the Cart Tree Browsing in the Asset Browser You can see an example for tree browsing in Asset Browser below 31 3 WebCenter Current Selection Brand Esko Value Document Name _ Ss Sub Brand Speed OR Color OR OR Color OR Brand Esko Value Speed 7 7 m z Brand Esko Value Color Packaging Tertiary OR Display Packaging Sub Type e Product Type Lubricants OR Specia Brand Esko Value Innovation _ e Do E S Packaging Tertiary Packaging Display Search Packaging Secondary S Packaging Primary Your cart is empty S Product Lubricants S Product Speciality Brand Name r Description Project Brand Sub Brand i Packaging Packaging Sub Type Product Type Found 10 items Show as Grid gt Enfocus Value Y Esko Value Esko ides Color Primary Flexible Bag Speciality E J Color Tray zae Asset Library gt V Color Error Color Tray zae 12 025 hve demo 002 Primary Flexible Bag Speciality _ Expert Green Shrink Wrap 6 Pack mans ge ai Asset Library Boites OA Asset Libra Primary Flexible Bag Speciality Innovation Profit Speed Shrink Wrap 6 Pack oe TE R 12 024 JMAS Test Primary Flexible Bag Speciality 1L 2L E 5L gt Trust Esko Value Shrink
102. will bring you to the Approval tab of the document details page If you have the task management license you can also upload a document to a task in a project The user interface is the same as the upload document user interface The result is also the same except the document will immediately be linked to the task Note TIFF and JPG bitmap files using indexed color spaces or RGB are not supported by the WebCenter Viewer Note When you try uploading a document which already exists in the project the upload of this document will fail You won t get a new version Use Upload new version instead Tip Click Help in the top menu for detailed information about uploading documents The first time you save a project document you enter all its database information The next time you work on that document you can e lock a document e upload a new version or revision It is up to you to decide if it is a draft revision or version according to your company s best practices Some people publish minor changes as revisions and major changes as versions others do the opposite and yet others just save drafts 53 ESKO an 54 Upload Multiple Documents T Either go to the project folder you want to upload the document into and click the umaa button or just click the Upload menu from anywhere On the Upload page select the Project and Folder you will upload the document into if you are already in the project fol
103. yet completed you can already show what you have by linking the current version of the document to the task A specification as a separate file Although tasks can have structured specifications it is possible that you want a complete document to specify the task You can then upload that document and link it to the task The input for a task Creation of graphics for packaging demands a definition of the cutting shape So you can link the ARD file to the graphics creation task or upload it to the task Collateral information Tip Documents can be linked to multiple tasks A typical example is where the same document is the result of a first task and the input for a second task 12 8 2 Link a Document to a Task There are multiple ways of linking a document to a task From the documents overview select the document s and click Link to task s in the Actions menu This allows you to quickly associate multiple documents with multiple tasks Within the task details click the Documents tab and then click Link document s in the grey bar Select the document s to link You can directly upload a new document to a task In the task details click Documents and then click Upload Document This will give you the well known upload dialog but you will immediately create a link to this task 12 8 3 Find Documents Linked to a Task 262 In the task click Documents This shows what documents are linked to this task and it also shows their ve
104. you cannot see My Tasks or My Recently Handled Tasks go to My WebCenter gt My Work Setup to add them to your My Work page 12 4 Working with Tasks 12 4 1 Create a Task 250 Click the Tasks tab in your project Note If you don t have a Tasks tab you probably do not have the Task Management license Click Create New Task On the Create New Task page select the Task Type To know how to create custom task types see Working with Task Types on page 263 Choose a Status among the statuses available for that task type Assign the task to a project member or user group using the Assigned to list Note If you assign a task to a user group in WebCenter all members of this group will see the task show up in their My Work pages and they will all receive notification e mails if set up by your site Administrator Any member in the group can then take on the task and complete it 6 Enter a Name and Description for the task If this task needs to start after another already created task you can Add predecessor s hover over Add predecessor s and select another one of the project s tasks as predecessor WelbCenter Note See Sequential Tasks on page 260 for more information on tasks links with their predecessors Repeat to add other predecessors if necessary You can also choose to Automatically link documents from predecessor tasks when task is started 8 Define when the task is due you can use a Lead
105. 00 75 007 pe i 225 00 60 007m BB kr225 00 45 00 n A multi page PDF file uploaded by BackStage Automation Engine 18 WebCenter E Propect HAH Document 01 008 AS edt page 2 CP of a Jal woe youment History ml x nent pipii _AS od page 2 it of di age L rion kuthor Stage Back rion Dammen A i i Pot e ee ee Pe parcel Dae Cute ee a et or UREP M Baa bi coed l a i es te i i ee ri a e T aaa fam CH ia i me b x r Wie A Le 2 ee Of pies Fos P g i kimim a m n n _ 1 15 3 PPTI Maaa o ENET i 4 d ah UE TE aie b kammer a ek O mi aa d ns i H or H T Channel LIF eai H enint en leni ioumussisisu se Loe i curret 5 mnr T i a oe i m TESTS H a E ii ee j aJ bik Sm a 7 K ee H shes be W Y Annotations 2D Ge gy a ae a H Co ex T info Tie 41999 x Po Rendution 15 75 pomm MO mim YY Gm 19 5 WebCenter Z WebCenter Viewer Microsoft Internet Explorer Wwe Ele Edt Yew Favorites oos Heb we ay vied Center Viewer S9 Project 31704 Document 90 1 p08_PS pdf page 2 2 of 4 Version 1 gt 5 1 3 More Help with the Viewer 80 Help To learn more about using the Viewer click the question mark at the top right of the screen Note Some browsers conside
106. 1 Goto My Work gt My Approvals gt gt My Tasks 2 Click on the drop down Documents waiting for Approval and select the Me Indirectly option When you select this an additional drop down On Behalf Of will be displayed 3 Select the Representative on whose behalf you are approving the document or doing the task All Documents Tasks to which he she is assigned through a Role or on behalf of a Group are loaded in this page You can now do the Approvals from the My Approvals section 15 e Sort by Due Date bd Finished whithin Last 14 days ESKO sesame Note Project History will indicate that those Approvals Tasks were executed on behalf of the Role that is represented by the Group 3 3 2 Projects 16 The Projects menu contains the following menu items e Favorite Projects on page 16 e Projects shows all projects visible to your user e Projects Am Invited to on page 17 If you are a Project Manager you can also see e Projects Manage on page 16 e Create Project Favorite Projects Favorite Projects shows those projects for which you have clicked Add to Favorites in the project s Actions menu The Favorite Projects Actions menus contains Remove from Favorites Add to Cart and Update Project s e Filter the list of projects by entering a filter in the Show Projects field or by changing the value in the Modified list and clicking Go e To sort the list of projects click the co
107. 2 f al 9 lt ee en Ven et ne neni eee ee 188 SARS Advanced TOMS eeens EAE ERA ESES EEAS EERIE DD AA REEE 190 rope APPO VNO S DFO Se ee EA eee 191 9 Working with ArtiosCAD DOCUMERNTS cc ccc cccccececeecesseecessecessesecsvseesssseerssietssiesersssetssitserssessitstanenanees 192 ae 7210 e ee ei eee nee ee ee ee ee ee 192 9 2 Opening Documents in ArtiosCAD Standard Edition Enterprise Edition ccc 194 10 Discussions in VV SID COIN CM srcceciascotzcice senses cncensenaccsannagedd erasiceednncpadunsernadiannthundtiteranieedanatlebacnaddeaneajandernteindenebidiadctcdiontion 197 10 1 Start a New DISCUSSION ccc ccetececsceescstsssesecscsseeessrssesssecssssesscsresisseiecssesessscsresiseiesssetesteseeeeee 197 10 2 NON a DISCUSSION spectre nes Rea teen aaas sateen uote eco saree erecta eed atte medina eee eee enced 197 10 3 Add a Message to a IIIS CUSSION sarmu E a a 197 TOA Print a DISCUSSION oarnein a iad e aaa aiaa naina 198 Contents 10 5 Delete a Message from a DISCUSSION ccc cctcscesrscserssstscssersssstecsssscssestecssestsssesisearsestenes 198 TOO ISVS TS A DISCUSSION acl sehen cetera ees teeta et te ea soma eae tein TAA 198 11 Project Management in WebDCeNTEDS 0 ccc ecsceecscsececsesecsvseesssseevsssessssesevsssetesstsevesiecsvinsecassessesieanes 199 11 1 Greating Projects Aric FF Ol SS iis ies cise tesa trot encase E Pd ee al tba O Nad tad 199 Ved re AteS a gt PrOjSSb ON ZEO arsan a oA leas nse E
108. 3 Martinez Teresa TEMA 6 a y 11 Martinez Teresa TEMA 6 Dect 12 Martinez Teresa TEMA 6 aj wes a i her Dec Snoepjes 5 miei 13 Martinez Teresa TEMA 6 2012 2012 E Snoepjes 6 Dec mol 12 Martinez Teresa TEMA E See 10 Martinez Teresa TEMA 6 Snoepies 8 Dec 5 13 Martinez Teresa TEMA 6 This creates a quick dashboard overview of your projects and points out which projects need your attention As this is part of a saved search this page or My Work section can be further enhanced with drill down parameters etc The displayed blocks are based on the status changes stored in the project history So in order to be able to show the real project feedback the project status history option must be enabled Admin gt Preferences gt Notifications gt Project status change gt Include in Project History 25 ESKO secon Note To be able to use some of the calendar view functionality you need the lifecycle management license See license function How Can you Set Up a Search with the Calendar View e As an administrator Go to Search gt Projects e Make sure the Project status View checkbox is enabled e Click Show Result Layout Options e Select one of the calendar view options in the Project Status dropdown e Specify width in pixels for the calendar column minimum is 200px but you get better results with 500px e Decide whether to also show the p
109. 32 ag Info HTML page name extension lt WebInstanceRoot gt custom AttributesHelp e Assign this attribute category to a graphics file Alternatively configure document types in your Project Template and assign your attribute category containing CAD REFERENCE as the default attribute category for graphics e Select or upload a CAD overlay file to the category of your graphics document 160 WebCenter Document barandbraille pdf Mail link to Document barandbraille pdf 944 7KB Open in Acrobat Pq Ble Version 1 View and Annotate i i Hite Description d a Project More actions al Approval No Approval Required raphics Information Document Information Approval Action History Annotations Projects Attributes haracteristics Discussions 0 Show Attributes in Category MIPE Linked CAD Change Category Print CAD design list Search f Boxes002 ard 9 e Open the Graphics file in the Viewer once the View files are prepared The Viewer will load the linked CAD reference in the CAD Overlay section of the Document Select widget Document Select Current barandbraille pdf a id Project HTML5 Viewer 14 1 update Compare to Click to select a difference Document page CAD Overlay Boxes002 ard Project HTML5S Viewer 14 1 update co barandbraille pdf Orientation 5 Fl Alignment Ore T Offset X Y 31 99 203 25 mim
110. 39 11 5 6 Start or Stop the Approval Cycle Note You need the Start Stop Approval permission to start or stop approval cycles This is the same as the Lock Update permission e You can start the approval cycle from e the document list on the project page in the Approval column e the document details page s header e the Approval tab of the document details page e the upload page click Start Approval Cycle right after uploading your document e your workflow system Select the Start Approval Cycle option before sending your document to WebCenter e You can stop the approval cycle from e the header of the document details page e the Approval tab of the document details page 11 5 7 Editing Approval Settings Permissions Needed You need the Change Approval permission to create or edit an approval setup Note When editing a folder or a project s approval settings the new settings will only affect the documents added to the project folder after the settings are changed Started and Stopped Cycles You cannot edit approval cycles while they are started If you want to edit an approval cycle that is already started you must first stop it You can do this from e the header of the document details page e the Approval tab of the document details page 209 my ESKOS WebCenter Editing a Simple Approval Cycle After stopping a simple approval cycle that was already started you can only edit the ap
111. A 199 11 1 2 Create a Project from a Templat cuirinn a AE 200 11 1 3 Create a Project Based on Another Project esssssssssessrssrsinrrnrnininrrnrnninnnrrnnnvnnrnrrernrnnrirrnrnrnnrerens 205 11 1 4 Automatic Project Thumbnail Images from DOCUMENTS cette ttre 206 tle 10 Greate Folders IM a PrO SC ic sssssit contac nant aa eaveasniaumalanternnam oneniaataumenetataatn 206 As VOD O UL VVOFITIOW FOlO CPS utes ea bee act Satta ANS E Seda E NR 207 11 1 7 Synchronize the Project with a Workflow JOD cccccccceeceecstesscsetssserstareereecarieieens 207 11 1 8 Create a Project from Automation Engine ccccccccccsecsceecscececseetssssersssetessesecsssecesssecarieeea 208 Ha Ney E O Er OC anne ea eee em A te Re en eee 209 Vides PANG et Salesperson ls cada cet heaters eae cosa td a enc eves causal deka tda E ARO 209 11 2 2 Specily Project Character iSite anueiai E N 209 VA ZS SPS CITY Proet AN WSS oiia o flea cs soa endear eae eae toad 210 11 2 4 About Exporting and Importing AttriDUtes 0 ce secesscicisstssrstsisearreen 210 Ale EXPON I MO SC Eu CUl OUI Si raises cleus sss a wav toed sa cacensae tase amends TEN N 210 11 2 0 Import Project ADUTE S i scsircsninrcnacerumanntanatouniuinin nat manana aN etine 211 T2 Update FO OSI ca rssh hese ives eile De eta clea Sasa aa a ead ene a aetna aetna 211 TiO ROCCE AUSES erona ee Ne ec ee AA 211 1129 GANGES TMS Proeck o taUs cein A EA a AE N 213 11 2 10 Displaying a Project Stat Suena parked acs
112. Actions D0 D Document Templates Version A project purely containing document templates organized in folders WebCenter Description Download As ArtiosCAD v Demo CAD file ARD File for Gaelic Ghost Manager Modified Dewitte Hans Sep 9 2010 You may start the Viewer on documents in the Cart by selecting the desired documents and selecting View and Annotate or Compare in Viewer from the Actions menu WebCenter A Working with Projects and Documents This section contains information on using WebCenter from an everyday use non Project Manager s perspective 4 1 View a Project e To view a project click its name in Search results My Work Favorite Projects or Projects Am Invited to The Documents page for a non Project Manager is shown below e Click an underlined item to see more information about that item e Click a folder name to open a folder e Click a document name to see the Document Details page By default clicking the document name leads to the Document Action History page but if you click a different page WebCenter associates that desired page with the document type for the duration of the session e You can use the Actions menu to perform various actions based on the security settings you have in the project e To view a document in a project you can either click its name on any of its Details pages or you can download it to your computer if you have download permission If you click
113. Active Mail link to Manager Berg Brune v n m Customer View history Due On More actions oa Modified Sep 14 2010 Description Folders 2 Actions C Documents 5 Actions B Project Documents 5 Bim Folder 6 C candy_front pdf 455 1KB O hydraqua_orange pdf 187 4KB Version 1 Version 1 4 D ik 5 W Approved SW Forced Approved Start Approval Cycle C Neo pdf 96 7K8 O Phuzaz pdf 2 6M8 Version 1 2 Version 1 2 g Total Documents 11 Hide Thumbnails Show as List Start Approval Cycle Approve Reject e Area 1 is the project actions area allowing you to perform actions on the whole project for example mail a link to the project to a reviewer add the project to your favorite projects e Area 2 is the Project Details area containing the project icon the name and description of the project the project status e Area 3 shows links to the project pages For example click Members to view the project members The page you are on is shown in bold e Areas 4 and 5 are part of the content pane that changes depending on the project page you are on Here on the Documents page they show the project folders and documents e Area 4 is the Folders pane showing the projects folders Click a folder to see the documents it contains e Area 5 is the document pane that can show the documents in a list or grid view with or without thumbnails Notes e To act on many documents
114. Asset Library Project 12 025 hve demo 002 Project Asset Library Project Brand Esko Value Brand Esko Value Brand Esko Value Brand Sub Brand Color Sub Brand Color Sub Brand Color Sub Brand Size 1L Size 1L Size 1L Size Packaging Primary Packaging Primary Packaging Primary Packaging Packaging Sub Type Flexible Bag Packaging Sub Type Flexible Bag Packaging Sub Type Flexible Bag Packaging Sub Type Product Type Speciality Product Type Speciality Product Type Speciality Product Type Variant Performance Greases Variant Performance Greases Variant Performance Greases Variant e There are three lists Brand Packaging and Product in this example You have multiple Attributes under each of these lists For graphical Asset Browsing you need images configured for the lists and Attributes Administrator rights are necessary for adding images to Attributes and lists e To select sub brands of Esko Value click on the image representation This will bring out the images representing sub brands on the top image pane In this example Color Innovation and Speed are by selecting their respective images Note that if you select the main branch all the sub branches will be automatically included as search criteria For instance in this example all the 1L 2L and 5L will be selected under Speed e Refine other criteria from other lists according to your needs In this example all Attributes under Packaging and Product are selected by selecting the
115. C Clients System 32 bit or 64 bit Memory 1GB RAM minimum 4GB RAM recommended Java version Java 1 5 or higher Video card DirectX9 compatible 3D graphics board from ATI or NVidia supporting fragment shaders and with at least 256MB video memory For example e NVidia GeForce FX series GeForce 6 series GeForce 7 series GeForce 8 series GeForce 9 series e ATI Radeon 9600 9700 9800 Radeon X series Radeon HD series Tor WebCenter Note ATI FireGL boards and Intel embedded graphics are not supported For Mac Clients Video card For Intel Macs e NVidia GeForce 6600 6800 7300 7600 7800 8600 8800 Quadro FX 4500 5600 e ATI Radeon 9600 9700 9800 Radeon HD 2400 2600 X600 X800 X1600 X1900 For PowerPC Macs e NVidia GeForce FX 6600 6800 7800 e ATI Radeon 9600 9700 9800 X800 X1 900 For example Power Mac G5 iMac Gd PowerBook G4 from 2004 or later Browser Limitations The Collada 3D viewer is currently not supported for use on Firefox 4 for Mac and Chrome for Mac With Firefox 3 for Mac there is a known problem when using tabs when the Collada 3D viewer is open opening extra tabs will also display the Viewer image in those tabs 8 4 2 Basic Tools You can click your design in the 3D Viewer and drag it to rotate it in any direction You can also use the basic tools in the bottom left corner Use to return the design to its default position e Use to zoom in on the design
116. Completed Create Project This node allows you to create or update projects from your workflow You can 286 Copy Move Document Data Splitter and Data Collector Error Handler Mark and Select WebCenter also iterate the project creation to create multiple projects at once For example using a multivalued attribute Note This node is only available if you have the WebCenter Advanced license You need at least one Concurrent Power User License Copies and moves the incoming document s to the given project folder and optionally renames it Document If you have two or more documents with two different tasks assigned to each of them then use the Data Splitter node This node will put each document separately on this tube after which these follow their own path 7 Once the tasks are completed the Data Collector will wait until both tasks are completed and then proceed to next node Data Splitter Data Collector See Workflow Example on page 324 for more information Use this to collect failed tokens when x e other nodes go into failure make sure the other nodes error dots are not connected to anything Error Handler See Error Handler on page 316 for more information The Mark node marks the documents bad arriving to the node with a named tag For example main design original data Mark or admin data Later the Select node can pick up the am same documents based o
117. E Me skos POr Contents T CODEINE NOICE e E A E O EE E 8 2 What s New for WebCenter USCIS 2 yi iaiseencassescosce inacanstacncwsinsl sn itaonasaaeeni tba sietanstioie mbenags leds Wtdnnstchioasns ban tinpmapsabagaiadunenheastie 10 3 Getting Started with W EDC STEN 5 sssesicstssissassacaresisaiessioeaatonnoitiierabee nn hacitscesiiestsnuinesiceds ttilsedon tina ataimusn tata iv kahnslecostinsteos tien 11 Be le OCR VVC DC CRC ara EA AE N O AEE cae EEA 11 3 2 Understanding the WebCenter Page LayOut cccccccissseisssissesssssisereesiseeieeneen 12 3 3 The Default WebCenter M NnuS ccccccccccceccecssstecscsssssscsrscsssssscsresessscsresssessscsresessecssesisetssesessessssieseesg 14 SM MY WOK aceon connie eis reise nee anv ae lett ee cite ipo EA A ean tes 14 lt 6 IG FAM al 9 nee ere eT eee 16 SECIS al oho dl hv lt lo a ener E E ee ee ee ene E 17 Ss e a E N bree events eee accent cee eee cscs bad A E A A AT 17 SESH OM NF VEDE ON ett ee ee ee een ten eee eee ce ee ee E ee eee 39 BF MN egestas asc sirgcce te weston heen ase na cet es ia eh eben a annotate aa at eda aroioman due cian ie polbenionenn A E 46 oe NON A spss an eaten eae a nosed cad spe ass E E i oaeeonsenare 46 34 EWS OMI scandent asec cheese Raie aE a iE ea dmeeeelece 46 3 5 Using the CANT so secu arcs ncswonessnag stn nen street dacvssoy ut anuk obsess acpune senna ong nessa ce burp eantdueysbenesns auea deaosnon enaatiausobuini 47 4 Working with
118. EEk E E E a b EE a m N 8 E E E E E E 4 foo g E E d L a pas a i A ETT O J E 4 itthitinn st i N EF ttt 2 5 a2 8 BENKE 7 F tf Hf E E s E e i a T E F i a s T E g a 8 a T EE a ff ff tf ff tht fee he ee Pe ee tf amp amp amp fh bho E E k i r T a T E T T 1 T F T l L r s i a a amp OE p o en 2 oe se 2 oe i ff 2 om 2 2 oe E bme i i b i ok a H ih amp E T T E E E E E z bth E E tH E E if F a a bof E 2 8 F Se Pe ee J E Es LETS r Faaa Vm g Cii a B a i a E E g k fa CPN Pa wey F k Bn a i F mi 3 Mhh Aes gm P a E ha Eji PETA Ea a Mu aF L s H F p E F AtA ETETA ped g kp a 7 i Ega E bt a SNN piesa PLETE AE j PERA B TAA i m a E gn Pm ys i P i 2 Lin EN E k Pa i Patat Pria Pe Tap t Em a al r ee eg ey soy Pees ee ee eg ee eG 62 C Q C O Q S User Vanhollebeke Matthias 1 Version Project RippedinOdystar Document Heineken_1_RippedByOd Note Of course you can build on this basic workflow to include approval or even use workflow folders in WebCenter to send PDF documents to Odystar or Nexus hot folders at the start of the flows Prepare the Odystar Canvas Set up the following Canvas 83 WebCenter End Split Pages 7 _ End
119. LF and XML files The report diagram file usually a JPG is optional e uploading a single ZCP file When you have uploaded a ZCP file check the Cape Information tab in the In the Document details page to see the information from the XML document To view the report diagram file click on the document thumbnail e Page List a multi page document that will be treated like a Page List in WebCenter A Page List represents an imposed multi page document the individual pages of which can be approved and version controlled separately in WebCenter e Other any other file Mostly these are office files like Microsoft Word Excel PowerPoint etc Video files must also be uploaded as other e URL Here you can enter a link to another document anywhere on the network or on the Internet WebCenter does nothing else than remembering this link and allowing to define attributes 4 2 3 Different Ways to Upload Documents 50 There are multiple ways to upload documents to WebCenter WebCenter e Upload via Upload Document use this if you only have a single document to upload or to upload documents one by one e Upload via Upload Multiple Documents use this to upload multiple files at once if you do not want or are not able to use a Java applet e Upload via Advanced Upload Java Applet This opens a Java applet allowing you to browse or drag and drop multiple files These files are all uploaded in one go e Upload from a workflow sy
120. Members and Permissions Project Managers are responsible for managing who gets access to their Projects they can add members to a Project remove members from a Project and set their permissions 11 3 1 Roles 218 Roles are created at a global level which the Project Managers or the selected Project Managers can use in individual projects and templates You can invite these Roles just like Users and Groups Roles are effective after real members Groups or and Users are assigned to each of the Roles A project Role assignee will be treated like a standard project member Once you assign the Role to a project these take over the role s security setup approval setup and task assignments Multiple assignments of Roles are possible For example if you have a Designer Role you can invite this Role to all the Projects that require a designer either after creating a Project or via the Project Template with assigned Roles Note You need administrator rights to create Roles The visibility of the Roles can also be determined by the administrators Read more about Roles in the WebCenter Administration Guide in Roles Role Assignments in a Project The Project Manager and all the Members of a project can view all existing Role assignments in a project in the Project Members page Note You can filter on the Users Roles and Groups in the Members tab Alternatively you can search using the Role name in the field Documents 187
121. Nos Display POS Lubricants Petrol play header al Value J E 3 Green display header ai 12 025 hve demo 002 Esko Green 3Nos Display POS Lubricants Petrol Value E PN 3 Green display header ai 12 026 JMAS Pringles Demo ard Green 3Nos_ Display POS Lubricants Petrol Esko Performance r a y ry E 2 Color Tray zae Asset Libra Vakin Color iL Primary Flexible Bag Speciality ean gt Esko i Performance Cc gt i ms 2 E lt Color Tray zae 12 025 hve demo 002 Valio Color 1L Primary Flexible Bag Speciality Greases oma A In the Asset Browser you can 1 Select the browsing options in the Asset Browser You can choose to see the left Panel the browsing tree or the top panel with images You can also choose to have both options 2 Browse the tree s on the left panel to select the items based on the visible attributes 3 You can use the options in the Search Panel at the top to refine the Asset Browsing Searching results in addition to the tree selection 4 If you opted for the image panel you can browse through the image representations 5 Select the assets from the results to download or view them by clicking the Actions menu You can select the assets and start actions directly from the action list menu if you have all the assets that you need in one single page You can download the assets view them or start a new projects with the selected assets from action list If the Cart is configured in the Asset Browser you can
122. P file that WebCenter will recognize as digital film e WebCenter Output to upload the ZIP files into the WebCenter project of your choice 2 Submit a PDF document to the flow 3 Log on to WebCenter and navigate to the project you specified in the WebCenter Output stage of your Odystar or Nexus flow 4 Click a ZIP file in the document list to view the RIPped page in the WebCenter Viewer 381 ono C Q C O Q S User Vanhollebeke Matthias n Fa at E Flay 1 F at aa Version tag Mi Arns rua Document Heineken_1_RippedByO dh RippedinOdystar Project X sae j T BERT Ta a 9 a a a a a ld l s 6 6 a a a a a i zh J 1m 7 Hann Ega L eet eT Loig JE aai hampa ae F Ti r ma TIETE F api fod ben Fag ead a g E 1 ip E E E L atts an E Black ea Cyan ie Magenta Yellow ie eo ag el eee Ta eo Seo ee a E 7 a Cai b Paay Pig E Pary f eeg Eag fete Lr ma tha gy tea a i ap ote a i CA m Ma Pen Fa Faun i T sa tii Te Er H Fi i a a Son gt Ta H i th oh Fa Wa Fa oo aly a a th a E TE a i i ia Fae nak ht cog bene g ar m ae a im i a e al ae ig E ita a t P na f he f a 1 oh st 2 2 htt te 82 8 2 FE Res FE NEE a EF a TE E Ll ase a E c 5 a a E E a b
123. RMAN a m v v v v v v amp Ness Mike MIKE v v amp Pilgrim Scott SCOTT as SAMPLEMAKER w v Z v E v v v amp Skywalker Luke LUKE as 3D DESIGNER v 2 amp 2 CHOCOHOLICS BELGIUM w w w E v v v v 3 CHOCOHOLICS DENMARK as SAMPLEMAKER w w v E v v v v 255 3D DESIGNER E 2 SAMPLEMAKER w v E E v v v v 242 WebCenter To set edit the project permissions choose Project from the menu and check or uncheck the desired permissions for specific users user groups or roles When you first enter a project s security menu this menu is selected by default Project level security controls access to the project and whether the contents of the project documents folder are visible and searchable A checked item indicates a granted permission no check indicates a denied permission Note View is automatically granted upon invitation to a project View permission to the root of a project cannot be denied for an invited project member Tip To grant or deny all permissions check or clear the Full Permission checkbox The changes are effective immediately Set folder level permissions a Click Folders b Select the folder to change from the Permissions for folder list c Check the checkbox in a column to grant it to the user group or role in that row clear the checkbox to deny it To revert to default project permissions click Reset Tip To grant or deny all permissions check or clear the Full Permission checkbox The changes are e
124. Return Status Assigned to Me Due Estimated Y Specifications Name Value Agency Return Created gt Please Select i v Please Select Agency A stal Agency B Agency C Agency D Agency E Complete Task Nov 1 2012 at 11 00 AM es ES Task 12 13 lask Reporting Project Approval Project WebCenter Project Details Type Agencies WebCenter has a number of areas where you can see progress of tasks and sets of tasks The most obvious one is the tasks overview within the project Here you can rapidly see how the project is doing and which tasks are in trouble You can also create reports that encompass multiple projects The way to do this is through the task searching combined with saved Global Searches A typical task search for a follow up report Search For Tasks Fill in one or more fields Prefer less fields Try Keyword Search Use Advanced Search Characters WY Task Name Task Description Task Type Name Task Type Description Task Status Start Date Due Date Completed Estimated Date Modified Created by Assigned to Specifications Project Name Project Manager Project Status Task Documents zi Not Completed EJ 12 07 2010 12 31 2010 M User O Group O Me O User O Group Me Me Show All Active v View List v O L Search Results Options Search Sort Order Cle
125. SSIA Sisters x z L 1A Mess Dotted anc s wiappod thoir OVO OI O10 SChoci glamour and pouco PEIER pa quae sd sophistication creating beauty range Femme Fatale te eee My desk is wih ay J 1895 products Sm amp KE Size 500 81 x 311 84 mm Trim Size 243 0 x 297 0 mm Resolution 173 2 ppcm ma X 422 27 mm Y 0 0mm V Fit view to selected annotation v Show only selected annotation Reader Spread view Click the Toggle Reader Spread View button in the top toolbar to activate the Reader Spread view mode Page List panel Click the Display Page List Panel button in the top toolbar to display the Page List panel This panel shows thumbnails of all the pages in the Page List document Click on a page in the panel to display it in the viewer Tip You can dock and undock this panel to optimize your workspace in the Viewer 176 WebCenter Click the Show Margins Trim Boxes button on the View toolbar on the right hand side of the Viewer to display the trim boxes for the displayed page s Trim boxes are displayed in blue Show Margins option For more information see the Viewer s online help 1 4 Notes on Page Lists and Approval Cycles Page Properties Index Represents the sequential position of the page in the Page List Folio Represents the name of the page as it is used in Fastlmpose Page Version Represents the version of the individual page in the Page List List Version
126. Send Error Email will show the error WebCenter D Get Legal Q 8 7 oF y Data Collector Produce Completed by Ds E Start Upload design Start Approval Cycle 3 Edit dasign board selector png Errors One of the documents has aleady an appro x ae Error Handler Send Error Email Router The Router workflow control Lis serves to automatically decide the route that your workflow tokens should follow When a workflow arrives at this node the workflow will continue over one of the configured output dots based on the specified rules You can also create SmartName powered rules for routing 7 2 J KRJA DW 4 2 Bylo Approval Type Approval Setup Select PDE Ey Select POF and RTF Os KRJA DW 3 33 New Version Upload The screen shot above shows how to route a document through different paths depending on its project attribute The router decides which department should approve the document based on this project attribute e These are the settings in the Router S17 13 318 WebCenter Route based on Project Attribute al Attribute KRJA RES DW Routing Options Case sensitive Project Attribute Route to Marketing gt NPD gt Regulatory Marketing gt NPD gt Regulatory Marketing gt Regulatory Marketing gt Regulatory Regulatory Only Regulatory Only No Approval Needed No Approval Needed no match Error The rules we
127. Simple Task with Docs English 1 For each iterator value the node will create a task with the value of iterator value filled in as the value for the corresponding parameters mi mi e lf the attribute task specification is Integer type or if the SmartName resolves to an integer or if you type an integer for example you type 3 the projects will be created based on these numbers For example if the value resolves to 3 the iterator value will be 1 2 and 3 As a result this task type will create three new tasks Note e lf the attribute is missing in the Project you will get an error Attribute not found e Ifthe resolved attribute is empty your error message will be Resolved iterate attribute value is empty If you iterate over a project attribute or task specification all incoming documents are added to the tasks When you iterate over a multi value document attribute for example Dutch Spanish English e if the incoming document has two values for the Languages the Iterator attribute Dutch and English this document will be attached to the Dutch and English Tasks e if you have documents where this attribute is empty they will not be added to the iterated tasks e if you have documents without this attribute category they are attached to all the created tasks However these documents will be transferred to the output pin of the task type node only once to avoid duplication Note The
128. The approval cycle s status is changed to Finished when any one of the following conditions are met e all Approvers have either approved or rejected it e the Project Manager or an Admin has Forced Approved or Forced Rejected it Note that in this case the final status is Forced Approved or Forced Rejected instead of Finished A finished approval cycle may not be stopped or started without uploading a new version of the document These status rules apply to each individual page in the Page List Only when all the pages in the Page List document have reached their Finished or Forced approval status will the Page List get the Finished status 7 0 Approve or Reject a Page List To approve the pages in a Page List you can choose from a number of different methods 7 5 1 Use the Viewer 178 1 Navigate to the Page List in a Document list and click on its thumbnail image The Viewer opens displaying the Page List 2 In the Viewer tool bar click J 2 to approve the document Q to reject it f to comment on it 9 to force approve it if you are a Project Manager to force reject it if you are a Project Manager 3 In the pop up that opens WebCenter A Approval Certified pdf Page 1 Pages w Current Page C4 Selected Pages C7 All Pages Approval Status Approved T _ Set approval condition Authentication Please enter your password User Bere Brune BRBE a Choose to approve reje
129. Time and press Enter WebCenter then calculates a New Start Date if the task isn t started yet and a New Due Date all the dependent tasks are moved accordingly For example if your project is late you can shorten some tasks lead times to make sure it still ends at the planned date Note e The Lead Time only takes working days into account e The fields in yellow show the tasks on the critical path Those are the tasks that directly influence the project s end date the last task and its predecessors To make the project end sooner you can shorten the lead times of the tasks in the critical path in yellow e Click Make estimated dates the new dates this takes the Estimated Start Date and Estimated Finish Date as New Start Date and a New Due Date Use this for example if your project is late and you want to update your planning accordingly 200 Show Task list days onl New Dur Project due date Ji rm ESKO WebCenter e Shift due dates with a certain number of days select the tasks to change enter a number of days and click Try Note Selecting a task automatically selects its dependent tasks too You can use this if your project is late or you can enter a negative number to speed the project Up e Shift due dates to have the latest ending on a certain date select the tasks to change enter the due date of the last task and click Try This will calculate how many days the latest task
130. User or Group entries assigned to these Roles to unassign them from this role if the Roles are already assigned Click Remove from the Actions in the header Click OK to confirm the removal The selected Role s and its assignments will be removed from the Project Using Roles in Approval Setup You can use Project Roles in approval directly as an Approval master and or as an Approver When adding a Role to an Approval setup as an approver the user doing so has to choose between two options for the Type One of Role Only one of the role assignees needs to approve on behalf of the Role This is the default setting Tip It is possible to change Role assignments after starting the Approval cycle if you select One of Role option Use One of Role if there is only one role assignee All of role One per Group All of the User and Group Role assignees will replace the Role as Approvers When you choose this for each Group its representative Role assignee will become the approver on behalf of the whole group All of Role When you select this all the User and Group role assignees will replace the role as Approvers In this case all the members of the Role Groups will become the approvers Project Approval Setup Approval setup has changed since last Save Ho Due Date Ra E APPROVER lt Role gt a E mail Notifications No Notifications Show Notifications Due Date Approval Master Add Approver Appr
131. Windows and Mac OS X 10 7 or later you will get a security warning as the one below when the applet is downloaded This makes the WebCenter applet look like a security risk for your computer WebCenter Security Warning S x Do you want to run this application An unsigned application from the location below is requesting permission to run Location http webcenter4 esko comy viewer applet jnlp Running this application may be a security risk Select the box below then click run to start the application I accept the risk and want to run this app Do not show this again For this app You can adapt how this security warning will look like when downloading the applet In Viewer and Workflow Applet choose either e Signed sandboxed if you want to run the applet in a strict sandboxed environment with no access to your computer s resources As the applet is signed by Esko the security warning looks less threatening Do you want to run this application Name WebCenter Viewer Publisher Esko Software bvba From http irdvewcOS signed viewer applet jnlp This application will run with restricted access that is intended to protect your computer and personal information J Do mot show this again For apps from the publisher and location above EJ More Information Cancel 41 ESKO sesame Note As the applet is sandboxed it will also show a warning when trying to print fr
132. Wrap 6 Pack Bottles Orange ai 12 026 JMAS Pringles Demo Primary Flexible Bag Speciality Y Packaging Y 7X Display Speed 5L Print Asset Library Primary Lubricants finishing zae POS Y X Primary Speed 5L Print 12 027 hve demo dddd Primary Lubricants finishing zae Blister Flexible Bag Label Shrink Asset Library Primary Flexible Bag Speciality Y Secondary Carton Y X Tertiary 12 024 JMAS Test Primary Flexible Bag Speciality D gt 0 m 0O le e e m Corrugated VALUE Asset Library Esko Innovation 1Nos Primary Blister Speciality MAGE INNOVATION jpeg Value Product coal Y 7 Lubricants E Diesel Found 10 items Show as Grid F Petrol gt V Speciality e There are three trees Brand Packaging and Product in this example You have multiple branches for each of these as well e f you want to select the sub brands of Esko Value select them one by one In this example Color Innovation and Speed are selected Note that if you select the main branch all the sub branches will be automatically included In this example all the 1L 2L and 5L will be selected under Speed e Refine other criteria from other trees according to your needs In this example all branches of Packaging and Product are selected e Click on Search to get the assets filtered to your criteria Note If the Search button is not available in your Asset Browser your results will be a
133. You can create two kinds of task types e Manual Task type where human intervention is necessary Read more in Working with Task Types on page 263 e Workflow Task type where you attach a workflow to perform the automated action Workflow Step Node A step in a workflow is a WebCenter Task e Performing an action on an input file to produce an output file e Managing files such as selecting or copying a document using an Auto Task e Deciding the flow Router of the workflow or about other administrative decisions in the workflow The actual workflow operations take place in these steps They are sequentially connected to each other via tubes 219 13 280 WebCenter ee Set Document Attribute Approvec D T ws E BIBE Review Taz Router wr Develop Arvo Set Document Attribute Rejectec Stan Stan Approva Cycle e A Transition is the green line that connects each step in the workflow It is a graphical representation of communication of output file or data being sent as the input for the next step e By default each node step has an OK and Error Output Pins If the task ends in the OK state the output file will be sent to the following step If it results in error pin the step connected with the Error output pin will follow Note You can have more output pins depending on the possible outcomes e Workflow constructs can do administrative actions on the workflow such as in
134. ages can annotate the document while it is being approved e Pending Approvers and Approval Master Only an approval master or approvers who can submit an approval state Approve or Reject for the current version can annotate the document during the approval cycle e Pending Approvers Only Only approvers who can submit an approval state Approve or Reject for the current version can annotate the document during the approval cycle Note Project Managers who can Force Approve or Force Reject is not considered an approver They can add annotations only if the setting is All Users Collada Viewer Preferences Select your Collada Viewer Type as Java Viewer the default option to use the Visualizer quality Java applet Select the Collada Viewer Type as HTML5 Viewer to set this as the preferred Collada Viewer This allows you to view 3D files on browsers devices lacking Java Applet capabilities ArtiosCAD To open your document in the ArtiosCAD desktop application directly from the WebCenter server you need to set the ArtiosCAD Preferences accordingly Open ArtiosCAD Documents No Application This is the default Preference When this is selected you cannot open the documents in the ArtiosCAD desktop applications ArtiosCAD Standard Edition Select this setting to be able to download ArtiosCAD documents and open them in your ArtiosCAD desktop application ArtiosCAD Enterprise Edition Select this to open your ArtiosCAD documents i
135. ame from the Iteration category in the other node parameters such as the Project Name or description Edit Parameters of Create Project Project Project Attributes WebCenter Project Name BAMT Test Iterator Value SsmartWame all Iterator Value Attributes Document Attributes Project Document Iteration Project Description Iterator Value Refresh Project Attributes Tab For setting project attributes of the new projects click on the Add the e project attribute and the corresponding value Enter this value via a SmartName or by manually typing in Note The attribute values are set regardless the Attribute Category of the new project Note If the SmartNames are not resolved it will not fail project creation However the attribute value will not be set in the new project e You may also assign roles via attributes WebCenter Tab In this tab define the WebCenter on which you want the new project e Current WebCenter default Use this to create the new projects on the WebCenter where the workflow is running e Other WebCenter Use this to create the new projects on a remote WebCenter For this to work the parameters specified in the node for example the Project Manager should be present on the remote WebCenter e WebCenter URL The URL of the remote WebCenter e WebCenter User Name The user name used to log in to the remote WebCenter e WebCenter Password The password used to log in t
136. an tool lets you grab a location in the document and drag it to a new location Tip e You can pan the document by holding the space bar and dragging a line in the Viewer window When you release the space bar it returns to the previous mode For a single pan action use the ad Tip While panning you can zoom in out with the mouse point as the center in the following ways e double click to zoom in e right click to Zoom out e scroll to zoom in out Using the Navigator When you are zooming in the document the navigator shows the highlight area as the zoomed area To pan the document hold the mouse and drag this selected rectangle around The central view port will display the area correspondingly Clicking outside the rectangle will move the rectangle to the clicked point and update the current visible area When the zoom is not activated you may use these short cuts to work with the zoom Ctrl Cmd Zoom out by a factor of two Ctrl Cmd Zoom in by a factor of two Ctrl 0 Cmd 0 Zoom to fit This will adapt the zoom to fit the entire image in the current window Double click the zoom tool Zoom to fit WebCenter Rotate and Mirror You can rotate or mirror the document in view using the Orientation tools A Rotate view Rotates the current view by 90 degrees clockwise Tip e Ctrl Shift Rotates the view 90 degrees clockwise e Ctrl Shift Rotates the view 90 degrees counter clockwise F4 Mirro
137. ancel you need to 1 click accept the risk and want to run this app 2 optionally click Do not show again for this app if you don t want to see this security warning the next time you open a document in the Viewer 3 click Run Ge ESKOS Note WebCenter e You can only view the latest two versions of a document e f a document of type ArtiosCAD Graphic File or Other did not have view data generated when it was uploaded or does not have view data for some other reason WebCenter will ask you to create the view data when trying to view it You must have Update permission on a document to generate its view data after it is uploaded 5 1 2 Viewer Samples An ArtiosCAD workspace in the Viewer 74 WebCenter 19 s WebCenter y x coge Ghomeshi Nerissa Approval Status No Approval Required Approval Due Date A Packed Archive Format PAF file containing both CAD and Graphics data 16 WebCenter Center Viewer Microsoft Internet Explorer Edie Yew Favorites Tools Help ar SB WebCenter Viewer di x M 7 o poge PRINT SIDE HH W 4 iji k li fe casos I CEA E 225 00 60 00 A s w amp amp ie Al Legere al ari e Dimensione imer e H5 j Annotation Aniti Cf S WebCenter B c1225 00 15 00m FJ 4 225
138. and seconds to wait after the Release date For example if you set the Release 305 13 ESKO WebCenter date to Workflow Start date with an Hours offset of 2 the node will pause the workflow until two hours after the workflow was started You can use SmartNames in all these parameters Note To use an attribute SmartName for these you need to have created this attribute SmartName with a restricted set of values containing options for the days hours minutes or seconds you want to use This attribute then needs to be added to an attribute category set on the project in which you run the workflow See Project and Document Attributes in the Administration Guide for more details about attributes restricted sets and attributes categories Select Count only working days if you are setting the node to wait a number of days and you only want to count business days For example if you set it to wait two days and start it on a Thursday it will start again on the Monday after that This is selected by default 13 7 2 Task Types 306 A Task Type can be either Manual or a Task Type with a Workflow Both types can be added to a workflow from the canvas The manual tasks require human intervention and they can be used as either individual tasks or as workflow nodes Editing a Task Type You can edit a Task Type in a workflow by double clicking on a node and specifying details in the Edit Parameters dialog This dialog is ta
139. and wait for the action to complete You will be notified of any issues regarding the operation 5 Click Close to close the dialog Your search results will automatically update Updating Role Members in Bulk 1 Goto Search gt Saved Searches Select one or more projects from the Saved Search Results 2 Select the Projects for which you want to change the Project Parameters 3 Click the pencil icon for the Role you want Or select the desired bulk action from the Actions menu Due Date Manager TEMA DESIGN Assign Project Role Member dialog will open Assign Project Role Member Role Group User Assignee Invite Group Actions DESIGNER DESIGNER HADW GROUP w michalik jakub JAMI v DESIGNER GENT v Keizer Debbie DEKE v 7 on Add member s to role Replace member s of role Status Project Commen t bulk_operations ag or m m a 0 l l bulk_opera or O O O bulk_operations_tes aa lag tag o or O O i bulk_operations_tes je i 4 In this window you can Add members to role or Replace members of role 5 Change the value of the desired parameter a Select a User and or Group to assign to the role b You may add multiple assignments using the actions buttons c Select whether to add the members to the group and replace the members If the members are replaced all blocking tasks and approvals will be moved to the first of the new members 6 Clic
140. ang SecurityException checkPrintJobAccess If you see Do you want to run this application Name WebCenter Viewer Publisher Esko Software byba From https firdvewcOS signed viewer applet jnlp This application will run with restricted access that is intended to protect your computer and personal information J Do mot show this again For apps From the publisher and location above EJ More Information Cancel you need to WebCenter 1 optionally click Do not show again for apps from the publisher and location above if you don t want to see this security warning the next time you open a document in the Viewer 2 click Run Note You will also see a warning when trying to print from the Viewer You will just need to click OK to be able to print Note that due to a bug in Java 1 7 0_21 you need to leave Always allow this applet to access the printer deselected or you will get a security error Printing failed java lang SecurityException checkPrintJobAccess e If you see Do you want to run this application y Name WebCenter Viewer S gt Publisher Esko Software byba From http ff signed unrestricted viewer applet jnip This application will run with unrestricted access which may put your computer and personal information at risk Run this application only if you trust the publisher Do not show this again For apps from the publisher and location above EJ More Information C
141. ann 266 12 9 4 Define Task DISCUSSIONS SeTtiINGS c cece eters ceeetsteeestetssesssstsressetsrssseescinesesseseness 267 12 9 5 Specifications in a Task TYP ii ccccccccccccececscsecscsesecscsesvsssecsvsesevssseevsesecsvsecevsssecavseevesiecavieevesieagn 267 12 90 Edit a Task Gall gt carnii aE R EE eres 268 Contents 12 9 Delete a Task Iye nine OER ee are eee ees 270 12 9 8 Creating and Editing Task Specifications ccc ccecceecsceerssecessescsseissseecaressearieeees 271 12 9 9 Document Reference Task Specification s ssssssersssrsristrnrkittrt rtint kart rn rE NrErEEENEEEEPEPEEEEEEEEEE EEEE 214 1210 Semo UH Task Noica lOS recut soisicilszeritetoa tock EA N AAR 274 12 10 1 Set Up Notifications fOr TaSKSernnnnaia a e a e sistent 275 12 11 Tasks Templates and Copying TasSkS s sssssessreersenrrsrnutnnkrtkrntkntk ttn Nurk rt tnANENEANENENENEEEEEEEKEEEEEENEEEEE EEEE EEEn 275 12 11 1 Copy a Task from Another TaSk cccccccccceccscsecssecesscscsrsececssecsrssecssssersseessestssetssecaseasees 275 12 12 Example Assign a Role using a TASK cccccccccccescececsecsssecscssrsetesecssessssrsecssecesiesitaresserisiitariees 276 TAI TASK REDOMDO merdan E A 217 Tos WOK NONS ene ee OR a E E A N A er er ee ORR eee 279 T1 WNAE SA WOK NOW airan a a aa ae 279 T32 WOKHOW TS ASICS cca hse alse e a a tm cain adi lac ilaessn cel ohn Di atlas taint 219 133 MEWO OW EONO erresen nec an ene one Rn ne Peep ea ee 281 T4 Open tie VV ORK
142. annotations Show only selected annotation Only the selected annotation is shown in the View and the pop up appears when the annotation is selected In this setting you will see a warning Warning Only the selected annotations is shown Show only selected annotation pop up You can choose this option when the Show only selected annotation is unchecked All the annotations will be in the View but only the selected pop up will be present in the view Note This setting overrules the Pinning A warning message will indicate your current setting Warning Only the pop up of the selected annotation is shown Show or hide sequence label on the annotation Use this option to show or hide the sequence number of annotations Unlinked annotations with sequence label OOS E gt 135 ESKO sesame For linked annotations the sequence number remains the same for all linked parts A second number after a hyphen indicates different annotation areas EJ EEO PIP E Show or hide character and line count You can track the exact number of characters and lines in the annotation texts using this option When you enable this the character and line count will be shown in the Annotation pop up and in Annotation List panel skva SKVA at Change color f Q eee Characters 12 Lines 1 To turn this off disable this setting in the Annotation Options Ordering the Annotations You can order the annotations in the Annot
143. ar PARTH ETL e ere he 1 4 Sas oe Etj r a et ee n Pasg a Samy fg They Soy Peg Fy Ai Sm ery E on ee Le ha a in bag 7 Coie Gee ee Pee 1a a Pe ee ee ee op te ie es at tt ee La Fai ih re a ea an le ed a T 7 ih i ol lS ant thy nf ss he ek de ed ol a aa eg ag et a ol ee ee ee i FT CE F a PeR SIRE Ennes Tat Sen fe E a Pe miana ie af 3 i m i k at CE os a i it m en E C ka E mieten fset tl Sattent sis esti senate aise attend ora roae et Fe ig bl te aa tee a al ee a ea atg PESATA e A bl iat a T on A a a i ELE OT T a Ta 7 et ee i H j i ee iy i hee i a y g ee ge ee oggi in jj F ei g tig Fay F tei p A ey pill A aE te a ee et T niy E a i i hey a tet ge a T ii ETTEN a LTT ep Tia Crea Sey Ee gem E i afa a fl a oT oe he Oe Se al i 2 Meads P TAERAA BAA Ara dae baa pe a on a ee i P a i gt he pete Shee F a A a E a n T e ee a a N a g i a g poe oe a oe E ob t p i a M gi F ET om ge a op poe Pe ee ee me ee e a a i as F F F ae a i he E i oe fs Pi Fe Fan fies Porgy Pag on Sa Fg fon f Som Tii g Ten TPE j kiad ee F te he ee fen Fei a pent ha tae j ona Peay j bg P 5 a i r Is ee er SLY Rt ee re Yap a i et ol ttt i e raearthhtnitigt EL J I L a a j pe al Ti FE S a EENEN EZE atti igisee E a if amp amp b a s C E ee ee ee l E e e a g a T 2 f Li E E a L a oe Es F a
144. ar this form G 15 Save this search The search pictured here shows all tasks in projects have access to that need some follow up Completed tasks are excluded and also tasks in non active projects are not interesting Tasks with due dates far in the future or a long time ago are also excluded Alt rm ESKO WebCenter The result will show a set of tasks with their due dates Those overdue will be shown in red and you can rapidly click through to these tasks and take action ATG WelbCenter 13 Worktlows 13 1 What is a Workflow A Workflow associated with a task enables you to automate actions and events in WebCenter reducing the number of human interventions during the project Use these workflows to execute complex business processes in an automated way You can create smart workflows by using SmartNames subworkflows and routing You can use workflows in e task creation and assignment e approvals e communication to and from Automation Engine e project creation e setting the project status It uses attributes to decide what happens next for example who needs to approve a document perform a task or manage a project This reduces the number of templates required and also makes it possible to run many tasks in parallel 13 2 Workflow Basics Workflow is attached to a Task Type TheWebCenter workflows are attached to the Task types Task types are templates for tasks which can be added into projects
145. aracteristics Click the plus sign next to a Characteristic to see its children Characteristics 4 Click Save The selected Characteristics will be associated with the document To remove Characteristics from a document do the same as described above but deselect the checkboxes of the Characteristics to remove them from the list 4 6 Downloading a Project 66 Note Only those documents in a project for which you have Download permission are included when downloading a project To download a project 1 Open the project 2 Add the project to the Cart by clicking Add to Cart on the Project Actions menu You can also select multiple projects in a project list and click Add to Cart in the Actions menu to download them all at once 3 Click the Cart 4 Select the project s to download and click Download in the Actions menu button 5 If prompted choose where to save the files and click Save The project is saved as a compressed ZIP archive with the same name as the project Use the decompression software of your choice to open it some operating systems can open compressed archives without the need for a separate program When downloading multiple projects individual projects are compressed into their own archives and then those archives are nested together in one master archive Your system may be configured to download and open the archive automatically in which case you can extract the files as desired WebCen
146. art to the end point An information pop up located at the end point will display the measurements The location will be visible at the start point You can drag the line to another point and the ruler will update its measurements To move drag the start or end point to another location oH g A Me FOB Orinnttine Piero 14 1 M 123 67 mm 13 78 mm 55 37 mm 33 287 46 29 mm 30 39 mm tTSeo x N 77 38 mm Y 44 17 mm Note While viewing CAD data then the Ruler will snap to the end points of most line segments in the CAD drawing Tip The Ruler tool can be combined with different view tools You can for example indicate a certain point then change the view by zooming out navigating and then indicate the second measuring point To make an annotation from this pop up click on the Make Annotation option You will get an arrow annotation with the current measurements as its content D 24 60 mm A 60 68 f Make Annotation Measure Screen Ruling g oe You can use the Screen Ruling and Angle tool to measure the ruling and angle in digital film files A Click rd to activate the tool and then select a point in your file or drag it to measure within an area The measurements are shown in the Channels panel and in a pop up near the point or area you measured WebCenter y F PETERET me eerr ie Tenet eeses For each measured channel you can see the lines per millimeter lp mm
147. arts of a complex box Each part can have a different due date You can use the specification to define length width depth or any other parameter You can upload the digital files representing this component to the task representing this physical delivery 24 12 ESKO WebCenter e Create a project plan according to a project plan template This allows making a plan with multiple steps that are shifted in time You can re use timings from a previous project to create estimates from where you can start refining e Keep track of quotes or projects in an initial state e Organize your own To Do list 12 2 Basic Concepts of Task Management 248 Task A task is a piece of work you assign to a project member to be done before a certain due date A task has a name a description a status due date estimated date starting date a specification a checklist and a discussion forum Only the name and due date are needed the rest can be omitted if they are not interesting or needed Tasks have a task type A task lives in a project A project can have multiple tasks but a task cannot be in more than one project at the same time Task Type Task types are templates for tasks Task types are global for the WebCenter system Each task follows the task type from which it was created The task type contains e Estimated duration of the task e List of statuses for the task e Specifications This is a set of parameters
148. ased on the approval outcome When the approval is successful the workflow continues to Set Stage2 and in case of rejection it moves back to Conceptual Design 325 IK ESKO WebCenter When the approval is successful we set the project status to Set Stage 2 This will show in project overviews that the briefing is complete The task arrives at the complete node and will therefore show up as completed in the tasks list in the project All tasks created intermediately will show up as subtasks 13 9 Working with Workflows Note A workflow can be started by Administrators Project Managers and people with the Change Task right in the Project The workflow starts when its task in the Project created from the workflow task type is put in an active status typically In Progress 13 9 1 Workflow Actions You can Cancel or Pause a workflow in progress To do so go to Project gt Tasks gt Workflow In the toolbar of the workflow editor you will see e the status of the workflow e Controls such as Hold to pause the workflow Resume kd to resume the paused workflow Q Cancel to cancel a workflow in progress Reload Resources G to refresh a workflow 326 WebCenter Blo Move to Approved Completed amp In Progress XO start Upload Artwork Start Approval Cycle RA gt A ry O 1 PW OR a a Status In Progress Maximize Zoom In Zoom Out Zoom toft Resum
149. ask type s Then This will enable selecting an Allowed Assignee when creating a task derived from this task type in a project or template Estimated Duration Existing tasks will not be changed in any way Specification Existing tasks derived from this type will be updated as follows e lf you add a specification all tasks of this type will get an extra specification If you make an extra specification required all tasks not yet In Progress will enforce this specification Nothing will happen to tasks that are already In Progress or Completed or any other state beyond Created If you delete a specification it will be removed from tasks not yet in progress Information in there will be lost All other tasks will be kept intact Read more in Specifications in a Task Type on page 267 Add checklist items existing tasks derived from this type and not yet completed will also get the new checklist items Completed tasks are not affected Delete checklist items they will be deleted from all non completed tasks Information in these tasks will be lost Add a status it is added to all non completed tasks Note Tasks will not change status as a result of this If you delete a status it will not be applied to any created tasks 269 12 WebCenter If you change the task type s Document Creation Tasks created from this task type are presented with the customized document upload options
150. at once select their checkboxes and then choose an action in the Actions menu e To select all documents in the current folder select the checkbox before the Documents header e To switch to a list layout click Show as List e Hovering over a thumbnail shows a larger version of it in a pop up window 13 WebCenter boost pdf 5 85MB car pdf 311 Celebrity pd focustravell Hair_Yellow pdf 31 2 B For Graphic documents viewable by the WebCenter Viewer you can click the zoom icon to show an even larger thumbnail 500 x 500 pixels This is applied to all Graphic documents on which you hover until the page is reloaded The pop up window closes when you move the cursor off the thumbnail There is usually more than one way to accomplish a task by using a combination of menu entries action menus and clicking status messages Many methods will lead to the same result 3 3 The Default WebCenter Menus 3 3 1 My Work 14 What is displayed Your My Work page lists the documents waiting for your approval as well as the Tasks assigned to you or to a group you are in Documents that are overdue have red due dates documents whose due dates are within the next day have orange due dates and documents that have far off due dates have gray due dates Tip If you have a long list of items to attend to use the filter options in each panel for example you can limit the display to items assigned directly to you M
151. ation List in two ways e Ordered by creation date All annotation comments and replies will be sorted according to their creation dates e Ordered by modification date All annotation comments and replies are sorted according to their modification dates Filter Annotations In the Annotation List on page 109 you can e filter annotations by user author When you select a single author only the annotation threads and replies made by this author is displayed e filter annotations by its review state e Any Review State will select all where there is a review state on the main annotation or any of the replies made e No Review State will select all where there is no review state on the main annotation If the review state is None it will not be shown e Accepted will select all annotations and replies with Accepted review state 136 WebCenter e Rejected will select all annotation threads and replies where the review state is Rejected e Cancelled will select all annotation threads and replies where the review state is Cancelled e Completed will select all annotation threads and replies where the review state is Completed e None will select all annotation threads and replies where the review state is None e You also can filter using e All Except Accepted e All Except Rejected e All Except Cancelled e All Except Completed e All Except None e customize your own filter combining the author and review state
152. ayed clicking on All will show only the first channel Tip Deselect the selected channel to select the next one This allows stepping through the channels one by one From single channel viewing click All to view all the channels Tip Alt 1 Alt 2 Alt 9 To select a particular channel in the sequence from channel 1 to channel 9 Ctrl Alt 0 Ctrl Alt 1 Ctrl Alt 9 To select a particular channel in the sequence from channel 10 to channel 19 To view a single channel Use this to view the first channel when multiple channels are displayed Also use this to step to the next channel while viewing a single channel To view all channels Editing the Channel Color in the Viewer Click the color swatch next to the channel name to open the Channel Colors window You can redefine the channel colors in the Viewer 123 ESKO sesame Original color definition This section displays the name the RGB values the opacity and the color swatch of the original channel color You can redefine all these parameters in Display color definition Channel Colors Original Color Definition current Cyan R 10 G 165 B 732 Opaque Display Color Definition new Magenta x R 235 G 59 B 135 E Opaque Revert b Display color definition This section allows you to edit the color You can choose a new color from the drop down edit the RGB values and make the color opaque The color
153. bal saved searches dedicated to a company or group click Edit Visibility link In the next window select the groups companies to whom you want to give the exclusive visibility In this case if you assign the visibility to a group and a company location the search will be visible to either the group or the company or both 29 ESKO aa 30 Please select Groups and or Companies Locations for which the Saved Search will be visible Visible to all Visible to selected Groups and Companies Available Groups please select or start typing T Available Companies Locations pjease select or start typing Al Locations Add save Cancel Note Itis not possible to set visibility on personal saved searches If you select a company without specifying any of its locations all the company locations will be able to access the saved search If you remove the company location group the visibility settings will be modified e To delete saved searches select them and click Delete checked items Use Select All and Delete checked items to delete all of them Running Reports You can run pre configured reports from the Search menu if your Admin has given you access to these reports See the Administration Guide for more information Note This only includes system wide reports Project reports are available from within the project 1 Goto Search gt Reports 2 Click on the desired report name on the Reports page
154. be displayed in the Viewer you can set Viewer Default or choose a color from the list Annotate Approved Documents sets if and how the users are allowed to annotate documents that are already approved e Select Enabled if you want the users to be allowed to annotate approved documents e Select Warn if Approved if you want to display a warning before allowing the users to annotate approved documents e Select Read Only if Approved if you don t want the users to be allowed to annotate approved documents e Select Warn if Approved or Rejected if you want to display a warning before allowing the users to annotate approved or rejected documents e Select Read Only if Approved or Rejected if you do not want the users to be allowed to annotate approved or rejected documents 43 ESKO secon 44 Annotate Documents under Approval sets who can add annotations in the documents under approval Note A document version is considered under approval as soon as an approval cycle has been started Choose from the following settings e All Users This is the default setting All users with view access to a document can annotate that document once the approval cycle has started e All Approvers and Approval Master The Approvers and Approval master defined in the document approval setup all stages for the current version can annotate during the approval cycle e All Approvers All approvers defined in the document approval setup all st
155. ber of documents displayed on a single page in the List layout defined as a number of Rows in the list Search Results All Show in List sets the number of documents displayed on a single page in the Search results List layout defined as a number of Rows in the list Search Results Documents Default Layout sets the default view for document Search results pages to Grid or List layout Show in Grid sets the number of documents displayed on a single page in the Search results Grid layout defined as a number of Columns and Rows in the grid Search Results Projects Default Layout sets the default view for project Search results pages to Grid or List layout Show in Grid sets the number of projects displayed on a single page in the Search results Grid layout defined as a number of Columns and Rows in the grid Discussions Discussions per Page sets the number of discussion threads displayed per page on the Discussions pages Postings per Page sets the number of discussion posts displayed per page on a Discussions page ArtiosCAD Preferences Viewer Select your Viewer Type You can set your preference to the HTMLS Viewer or keep at the default Java Viewer Note You can always switch to Java Viewer from HIML5 Viewer using the button Viewer and Workflow Applet When opening a document in the Viewer or when creating a workflow WebCenter will download a Java applet to your computer From Java 1 7 0_21 for
156. cale or both 5 2 15 Attributes the tool tip displays the updated distortion and scale information the nfo widget displays the updated resolution and size If the document in the Viewer has an Attribute Category with a Viewer specific View you will see the Attributes widget in the Viewer Note If the document does not have any attribute category or an attribute category with Viewer optimized view you will not see this widget When you have multiple Views they are listed alphabetically and the first applicable view is enabled by default You can Save Attributes from this widget Note Only the users with Project Folder level Change Properties permissions can change and save attributes from the attributes widget If the user does not have permissions to edit the attributes the editing and saving is disabled 121 ESKOw WeeCanter Your unsaved changes will be notified with a Save attributes warning Click this to Save When the data is saved you will see a notification Switch View when you are a member of multiple Roles and or Groups with dedicated Viewer views Refer this table Save your attribute changes before switching to another View You will be warned if you try to switch views without saving your changes Attributes p 2 Info This is the Viewer Legal Attributes view w LEGAL Select All Deselect All TECHNICAL Best Before Check copy text for errors Check production date Check recipe Colors
157. can create a Viewer view for these attributes with specific source and rendering configurations Your user will then be able to change a reference from the Viewer and save this configuration Note Only the users with Project Folder level Change Properties permissions can change and save attributes from the attributes widget If your document has document references attributes you can view them from the Attributes widget You can also do the document operations specified while configuring the document sources for the reference Note The administrators can create a Viewer view for the document reference attributes with specific source and rendering configurations You can change a reference from the Viewer and save this configuration This is only possible when you haveChange Properties permissions Attributes Icons Add Icon s oe DY i Y a Recycle png 9Y 5 2 26 Limitations in the HTML5 Viewer Following features are not available in the HTML5 Viewer yet e Advanced View features such as Seamless View or Advanced Flexo tools for screened data e Collaboration mode See https wiki esko com display KBA KB908661 14 3A WebCenter HTML5 Viewer known limitations for a feature matrix 169 ae Esko Approving and Rejecting Documents You can see documents waiting for your approval on the My Work page under My Approvals Note If you cannot see My Approvals go to My WebCenter gt My Work Setup to ad
158. cation errors and can be triggered from an MIS system for even more automatization In this task 1 Select your WebCenter Site it must be defined in the Configure tool 2 In the Site Logon area fill in your WebCenter User Name and Password You can choose to type in your password which is then Encrypted or to Use SmartNames that resolve into your password Note The user you enter here must be a Project Manager in WebCenter to be able to create projects 3 Enter the Project Name and Project Description to give the new project Tip An interesting choice for the project name is the SmartName JobNamel By selecting the job name as SmartName for the project you can map the jobs in Automation Engine to the projects in WebCenter 4 In Project Manager Username enter the user name of the WebCenter Project Manager that will manage the newly created project Note e This user must already exist in WebCenter e This can be the same user as the one you logged on with or a different one e The user you logged on with must have at least as much visibility in WebCenter as the Project Manager you enter here 5 Click the Refresh a buttons 6 The Project Template Customer Company and Customer Location fields should now contain a list of the WebCenter Project Templates Customer Companies Customer Locations visible to that Project Manager Choose the Project Template Customer Company and Customer Location of your choice
159. caveneetes 169 6 Approving and Rejecting DOCUMENMS 0 c ccc ceecretecssscsrestecssssresetssesstesessisstesitssrecesrtereseean 170 6 1 Evaluate a Document IN the VICWET ccc ccccscescscsscssstscsssscsssstecssescsrsssrssesersssstssessssesestesesessaseseseseess 170 6 2 Evaluate a Document in the Document Details Page cccccccecetecsessteeissessrseissrsaseren 171 6 3 Evaluate Multiple Documents at ONCE ccc cccccececscecstsesecscstevsssecessesevsssesevsesecesseevsesecavsetevesieavieeesa 172 7 Working with Page Lists ImposeProof DOCUMENTS 0 c ccc ccc ceceecseetesstsecessecessesecansetesssetanieeatens 174 T TOOL AS EISTE castro cae enn ecw toro stent actin pec cea titanate EO EE eee 174 Te Me OS S C YS crests A tenes EEE naa ae 174 T Page Liste InN the VIEW een ne ee ee ee ee ee ee eee 176 7 4 Notes on Page Lists and Approval CyCleS cccccccccscecccescecsscescsressetscssesestesesessesetersrenesees 177 7 5 Approve or Reject a Page LISt cccccccsccsscssssscssscsssscscssscsrssscsseserssssssesserssescssisessesestessseearterasens 178 La WSO the Vowa ereraa elec cate on eg cteasateata anv E 178 7 5 2 Use the Page Gallery VIQW cc cccccccccscrccccsecscsrserscstsssssstsrssssestssesescsresssestssnesstaseseesetes 179 7 5 3 Use the Page List VIQW cc ccccccccccssscssscscssscsssscscssscsrsssecssessevssecssesevsssscssesserssescecessecesesiesesessaseneeg 180 7 6 Uploading ANG Updating Page LISTS essri iai ea i 181
160. ccess the navigation and orientation tools in the top panel Note The active anchor can be recognized by the crosshair icon b Select the anchor points in the current and referencedocuments Use the arrow keys to fine tune your anchor points You can also drag the selected point to a new location c Click Align e Offset X Y fields allow you to enter precise offsets for accurate alignment Note If you are aligning two graphics files the offset will be the distance between the current and the reference according to the graphics coordinate system positive horizontal is set to the right and positive vertical is pointing downwards For CAD overlay and graphics the offset is taken as the distance between the CAD overlay and the graphics page using the CAD coordinate system positive vertical pointing downwards While aligning two CAD files the offset is the distance between the reference and the current document page in that order according to the CAD coordinate system Compare Modes Show Current and Show Reference Modes If you click the View Reference Version or View Current Version button the tools update their information accordingly The annotations are also changed to the current document in view The Approval Details on page 110 will be updated as well In the View Reference mode you will still be able to perform the approval actions of the current document View Both Blinking In this mode you will see the two select
161. ce document 5 2 22 Viewing Multi Page Documents and Page Lists The Viewer has a number of features that make working with Page List and Multi page documents intuitive e Reader Spread View e Page List Widget When you open a Page List or Multi page document the Page List widget displays its pages as thumbnails You can switch the main view to a specific page by clicking on the corresponding page thumbnail Special thumbnails are used for Blank and Empty Non available and pages of a Page List An empty page cannot be selected as the active page 153 154 WebCenter Note Blank and Empty page thumbnails are only available for Page Lists You can see the page name and folio of each page below its thumbnail A yellow color bar below the page thumbnail indicates the currently active page The bar above the thumbnail contains the page number index and icons to indicate the page s approval state In addition to the icon a co or code indicates the primary approval state Use the Viewer to compare annotate inspect and approve the pages Reader Spread View The Reader Spread view ak allows you to see pairs of pages from a multi page or page list in the Viewer This enables you to visualize the document matching the appearance of the final document in print Note Reader Spread View is not available in compare mode ok se 4 b You can turn this on or off by clicking on the button You can use arrows to navigate between r
162. ck Finish 12 9 3 Define Task Documents Settings Use the documents settings to define the relationship the tasks created from this task type will have with documents 1 Select Allow attached documents if you want to be able to attach documents to the tasks of this task type Selecting this makes the other settings available You can also customize document upload options in the Document Creation tab Read more in Create a Task Type on page 263 2 If the goal of the task is to produce one or more document you can choose to Only allow task to complete if it has one or more attached documents If the document s need s to be approved you can also choose to e Complete task automatically when all documents are approved 266 WelbCenter 3 You can also select Start approval cycle on attached documents to start an approval cycle automatically when documents are uploaded to the task e Only allow task to complete when all attached documents are approved This uses the approval settings defined for the project the task is in or the folder the document is uploaded into if it has approval settings defined Note If neither the folder nor the project has approval settings defined the approval cycle will not be started automatically 4 You can also choose to automatically Assign Attribute Category to uploaded documents Select the attribute category to use in the drop down menu Note If the task has specifications that are als
163. confirm the deletion The selection is deleted If any selection is a linked document only the particular link that was selected is deleted other instances of the link are not deleted 4 3 4 Lock a Document Locked documents are documents you have flagged as being in use so that other users do not download them and work on them at the same time 1 Open the project and folder containing the document to lock 2 Select the checkbox of the document to lock and click Lock in the Actions menu To lock more than one document at a time select more than document You may not lock URLs The latest version of the document is selected for locking The document is now marked as locked If other users try to download it they will be asked to confirm downloading a locked document 4 3 5 Unlock a Document 1 Click My WebCenter gt My Locked Documents 2 Select the document s to unlock 3 Click Unlock The document s will no longer be shown on the list 4 3 6 Upload a New Version or Revision of a Document 58 1 Open the project and folder containing the document which will have a new version revision uploaded 2 In the Documents list either click the upload button e click Upload New Version in the actions menu Make sure you use the buttons on the document s row 3 Browse to select the new version of the document For document types that have more than one file specify multiple files as needed The filenames can
164. cs document as the current document If the active document has a linked overlay the Viewer will display this as the linked CAD overlay in the document selector WebCenter Document Select Current PE_linked_0_0_back pdf as Project PIPR ViewerSamples Compare to Click to select a difference Document page CAD Overlay Click to select a CAD overlay Document r basicbox ard 4 Project PIPR ViewerSamples ca PE_linked_0_0_back pdf Custom Filter is Enabled 0 of 0 threads shown Y BOTTOM BOTTOM e Select the corresponding CAD overlay from the CAD Overlay selector drop down This drop down will display all the available CAD files including the linked CAD files The Viewer will display the selected CAD file on top of the graphics file The Orientation and Alignment tools in this view allows you to position the overlay accurately on the graphics file Anchor Point alignment a for CAD overlay Note The respective buttons indicate whether the rotation mirroring inverting of the reference document is currently on or off e Offset X Y for CAD overlay A Use the Rotate CAD Overlay tool to rotate the overlay to match the graphics correctly Mirror CAD Overlay F4 will flip your overlay with respect to the graphics document This will show you the opposite side of the CAD overlay If the current view is the inside of a box flipping will display the outside view e Use the anchor point al
165. ct comment either the Current Page the Selected Pages or All Pages b Optionally approving or force approving the set a condition for your approval if the page s approval cycle allows this see Allow Conditional Approval or Not on page 229 select Set approval condition and type your condition in the box rejecting or force rejecting the page s type a reason for your rejection in the box commenting the page s type your comment in the box c Enter your password if your WebCenter server requires it d Click the Commit button For more information see Page Lists in the Viewer on page 176 7 5 2 Use the Page Gallery View 1 Navigate to the Page List in a Document list and click on its name The Document Details page appears 2 Select Page Gallery from the menu 3 Select the pages you want to approve or reject and then click Approve Selected Pages or Reject Selected Pages You can also choose to Approve All Pages or Reject All Pages 4 In the pop up that opens 179 WebCenter Approved Set Approval Condition Please re enter password Berg Brune BRBE Commit Approval Cancel a Optionally approving or force approving the set a condition for your approval if the page s approval cycle allows this see Allow Conditional Approval or Not on page 229 select Set Approval Condition and type your condition in the box rejecting or force rejecting the page s type a reason for your rejec
166. ct an empty list of tasks appears 2 Click Create New Task 3 On the Create New Task page select the Task Type Since this is the first time you are using tasks select Simple Task from the Task Type list 4 Assign the task to a project member or user group using the Assigned to list For this first task select yourself 249 T 2 S KO X WebCenter Note If you assign a task to a user group in WebCenter all members of this group will see the task show up in their My Work pages and they will all receive notification e mails if set up by your site Administrator Any member in the group can then take on the task and complete it Enter a Name and Description for the task Fill in other fields as desired Click Create You have created a simple task 12 3 2 Use the Task List Task Search and My Work Page Click Tasks to get an overview of the tasks in your Project Create some additional tasks with different due dates and assignees You ll see a list of tasks building up and you can start experimenting with the sorting options in the overview Try a task search click Search in the top menu click Tasks and enter your search criteria Now go to your My Work page You ll see all tasks assigned to you under My Tasks You ll see the status and the due date Due dates in the next 24 hours will appear in orange and due dates in the past will appear in red Completed tasks are shown under My Recently Handled Tasks Note If
167. ct some text and click a to create a hyperlink The e mail body will automatically contain a link to every document coming into the node If the node gets multiple documents the e mail body will have multiple links one after the other with a space in between Set Document Attribute Use this node to automatically add document attributes and their values to the documents processed by the node Attention Your documents should have the attribute category containing the attributes you add already assigned otherwise the workflow will fail 299 Ky ESKO WeeCanter 300 Parameters Click to add one of the attributes of the document s attribute category If this is not the attribute you wanted click it and select another attribute Then double click in the Value column to enter the corresponding attribute value You can use SmartNames To remove an attribute select it and click set Project Attribute Use this node to automatically add project attributes and their values to the current project Parameters Attention Your project should have the attribute category containing the attributes you add already assigned otherwise the workflow will fail Click to add one of the attributes of the project s attribute category If this is not the attribute you wanted click it and select another attribute Then double click in the Value column to enter the corresponding attribute value You can use SmartNames T
168. ct will get the list of all statuses as allowed statuses 6 Click the Save button to make changes Note The Project Status cannot be re ordered here the order is inherited from the system order You can remove allowed statuses for a template or project by selecting the status and select Remove from the Actions menu Set a Project Status using the User Interface An Administrator or a Project Manager can set the Project Status for the current project using WebCenter UI A Project Status is changed by selecting a new project status from the status drop down list in the header of the project pages The drop down only contains the allowed statuses WebCenter Testing Phase set a Project Status when creating a Project An Administrator or a Program Manger can set the Project Status while creating a new Project When creating a new project through the WebCenter User Interface there will be a drop down allowing to set the project s initial status The drop down will default to the first Active status Create Project Create Copy setup from an Existing Project Project ADMIN_00027_SRNA Project Status Show Details Y Details Name Suffix 0 T v v Note The name of this project will be created automatically Thumbnail Change Project Manager Me v Status Active v oaa Initiation Canceled oe Warning Description Approved with a Condition Design Briefing Creation Documents Approval
169. cted document references This option is turned off by default select Parent Document Reference Using this node you can select the parent documents where the input documents are being referenced as the attribute value Read more in Document References This node collects the master documents of the input documents document reference values and sends them as the output documents In the example below the document Christmas Bottle zae has an ARD file as a document reference value for the attribute Die Line 29f Ky ESKO WebCerter 298 To select the parent when your input document is the CAD008 ard specify the attribute Die Line in the node The node will select Christmas Bottle zae b Christmas Bottle zae 1 Name Value Die Line j Thumbnail Document Version _ f CADOOS ard 1 x Double click the node in the canvas to fill in the following options ACAD trays Fail if no Documents found Add Input Documents to Output e Attribute drop down listing all the document reference attributes defined in the system Select the attribute name where the input document is the referenced document Parameters DEKE DocRef PNG JPG only DEKE DocRef PNG only DEKE DocRef Search Actions DEKE _DocRef Selected Revision DEKE DocRef Selected Version DEKE DocRef Single DEKE DocRef View Creation DEKE DocRef View Default e Project name use SmartNames or type in the name of the project wher
170. cuments to make them easier to find Characteristics are hierarchical This means there can be different levels of characteristics for various product lines so that you can drill down through the information to find the exact characteristic desired when searching the database Note Characteristics are linked to the document itself and not to a specific version So changing the characteristics of a linked document will affect all versions of the document in all projects that have the document linked including inactive projects You can only assign characteristics to a document if e you are an Admin e you are the Project Manager e you have Change Properties rights for that document 65 ESKO secon Important If the project is inactive you will not be able to edit a document s characteristics if your Admin has not enabled Allow changing attributes and characteristics of inactive projects in the Preferences See the Administration Guide for details 1 Open the project and folder containing the document to change and click its name 2 Click the Characteristics tab of the Document Details page You can also find CAD design Characteristics associated to ARD files in the Characteristics tab When using ArtiosCAD Enterprise the CAD design Characteristics you assign in WebCenter will be reflected back in ArtiosCAD 3 Select the checkboxes of the desired Characteristics The selected Characteristics will appear in the list of Ch
171. curity Configure brkflow Connection Document Templates Project Creation Document Creation Project Statuses Project Statuses Project Statuses 6 Add Project Statuses C Name Active Teo Active Gi Active Medium Blue TG2 Active B u TG3 Active GE olive TG4 Active Le Yellow TGS Completed J Orange 11 2 9 Change the Project Status A project can have different statuses For example e Active e Non Active e Completed In additional to the standard statuses custom statuses may have been defined by the system administrator A project or template can have its own specific set of available project statuses Every project requires at least one active status The project manager can set the project status from the project details header or in the Status list on the Project Information page 213 my ESKOS WebCenter When searching you can search for all projects or projects that have a specific status like Active Not Active or Completed It is also possible to search for All Active All Not Active or All Completed projects this type of search would include different Custom statuses of the same type 11 2 10 Displaying a Project Status The Project Status can be viewed by an Administrator Project Manager and a Project Member The status of a WebCenter project is displayed in following ways e The status is displayed in the project header of each page of the project e The status is displayed in the c
172. d e fa documentis locked or unlocked If it is locked it shows who locked it and when it was locked e Approval actions including the start of the approval cycle and associated comments with pending activities for the latest revision e WebCenter Viewer annotations Previous revision numbers are links to those revisions and when clicked change the view to that revision You may print a printer friendly report of the Details page by clicking Print in the header A new page will open showing the entire Action History which you can print using the browser s Print command 4 10 Viewing ArtiosCAD meta data 68 You can see the meta data associated with the new ArtiosCAD Design ARD and Manufacturing MFG documents uploaded via the WebCenter interface or via an ArtiosCAD Enterprise client version 14 0 2 or later In the Design Information tab for design files or in the Manufacturing Information tab you can see e the Grain Flute Direction e the Default Side for the Design ARD and Manufacturing MFG documents WebCenter Design Information ument Information Approval Action History Geometry 2D View 3D Model VRML Design Information Length x Width x Depth 2540 0 x 1270 0 x 3048 Blank Sire 7635 5 x 5626 0 mm Area 2997232 mm Rule Length 54146 9 mm Grain Flute Direc tion Default Side Board Code SB5 14 Description SBS 14 Caliper 0 36 mm Flute e the Die Side for the Man
173. d by the warning e If the project attribute is blank task specifications set in the previous sessions will be saved Reversely an empty task specification will not overwrite the existing project attributes You can also assign a role using task specifications Read also https wiki esko com pages viewpage action pageld 6 732635 12 9 6 Edit a Task Type 1 Click Task Types on the main menu bar You ll get an overview of the existing task types 2 Click the name of the task type You ll see an overview with the following tabs e General Info e Specifications e Checklist e Status e Documents e Document Creation e Discussions e Workflow 3 Consult the following table to consider the impact of your changes to any existing tasks derived from the task type Existing tasks derived from the type will display the new task type name Each task type can have an icon This icon is used in the Workflow canvas gallery and is also used in the task list in Projects Click the Select Icon button to select a required icon You can also use filtering on the icon name The files with extensions jpg jpeg png gif bmp Enable setting an Allowed Assignee Group In the General Info tab you can enable the or Role to restrict who can be assigned to setting to restrict task assignees to the project a task of this Task Type template role or group To do this enable this option 268 WelbCenter If you change the t
174. d groups on a project as a whole and on folders within the project They can set and change permissions at any time Permission types The permissions for folders and documents are e View This permission allows viewing the project and the list of files and folders in the top level All users and groups invited to a project get the View permission automatically at the project level At the folder level View allows a user to see that the folder exists View permission is required for a project or document to be listed in the Search results It takes precedence over all other permissions if a user does not have View permission nothing else is possible e Add This permission allows adding a new document to a project or folder by using Add Copy Copy as Link or Move e Change Properties This permission allows changing database information about a document or project Project Managers have implicit permission to change the database information about projects they manage e Delete This permission allows the removal of adocument from a project or folder This permission is also needed to Move a document out of a project Only Project Managers or members of the Admins group may delete a project e Download This permission allows downloading a project or document from the database to a user s computer This is also required to open documents other than an Esko ArtiosCAD 2D or 3D view or those viewable in the WebCenter Viewer e Lock Update Sta
175. d it to your My Work page You can approve reject or comment a document e from the My Work page e from the Viewer e from the document details page Approval tab Note Project Managers have more options when approving or rejecting documents They can Force Approve or Force Reject a document See Forcibly Accept or Reject Documents Approvals rejections and comments are shown on the Action History page Note If you need to setup an approval cycle to have other users approve or reject a document see Defining Approval Settings on page 224 6 1 Evaluate a Document in the Viewer 170 When you need to evaluate a graphic file or a page list see Document Types on page 50 for information about the supported file types you can first open it in the Viewer to look at it in detail You can then approve reject or comment it directly from the Viewer 1 Click the document s thumbnail or the amp button You can do this from e the My Work page under My Approval if you have documents to approve or under Approvals to Follow Up if you are an Approval Master e the Documents tab in the project e the header of the Document Details page 2 Click 2 to approve the document to reject it Ed to comment it 2 to force approve it if you are a Project Manager to force reject it if you are a Project Manager 3 In the pop up that opens do the following WebCenter 6 if you are you can approving or force
176. default approval setup of the folder containing the document or failing that of the project containing the document is used e Use the approval setup of another document In this case enter the Project Name of the project containing that document and the Document Name You can use SmartNames for both Project Name and Document Name Note e lf there is no approval setup in your project or you chose to use the approval setup of a document that has no approval setup this node will fail e If the approval was already started it won t change The node will wait until the document got approved or rejected e f the document was already approved or rejected this node will fail sync Workflow Use this node to sync the current WebCenter project with the Automation Engine job configured in your Workflow Connection This syncs the WebCenter project data with the Automation Engine job parameters This node uses the synchronization settings from the project template setup by default However you can setup alternative synchronization settings in the Sync Settings tab To change the project settings e Enable Override Project Settings and configure the following settings e To associate the workflow with a different worklfow connection select Override Workflow Connection and Select the new Workflow Connection from the dropdown Note This dropdown lists all the connections listed on the Project gt Configure gt Workflow Connectio
177. der those are filled in automatically but you can still Change the Destination Click Copy Create Multiple New Documents Note From this page you can also click Upload Multiple Documents to use the Java Applet to upload multiple documents Add a document as explained below If you want to Upload a document saved on your Click Upload then click the Browse button computer or network to open a browser dialog Note You cannot upload CAPE files or upload PDF files as page lists when uploading multiple documents Please use the normal Upload document option for this Copy a document from another project Click Copy then select the project to copy the document from and the document to copy Create a document placeholder from aj Click New select the document template to document template use in the pop up and fill in any attributes that i ______ _ may be required Note This is only available if the project has been created from a project template containing document templates To collapse a document s attributes click the square minus sign in front of the document To collapse all documents attributes click Collapse All at the top of the page See Document Templates in the Administration Guide for more information about document templates and Assigning Document Attributes on page 63 for more information about attributes Repeat for each document you want to upload Note If you want to re
178. differ from the original file names but they must of the same type i e have the same extension as the original document Note By default if the file name of the new version of the document is different from the filename of the previous version WebCenter will use the filename of the original or previous version when you download the new version This behavior can be changed contact Professional Services for assistance 9 WebCenter Inthe Version comment field enter your comments regarding the new version You can make the new version a Revision by enabling Increment to Revision This is only available if the admin has enabled this for you Note The revisions will be denoted as A B C following the version number If this is a linked document select the project s to check the document into When you upload a new version of a document which has an approval cycle ongoing the approval cycle stops automatically If you want to have the approval cycle restart immediately select Start approval cycle on new document version If you have the Change Approval Setup permission you can adjust the approval cycle s due date in the Specify New Due Date option Note If the document was in a staged approval cycle where the cycle restarts from depends on the When a new version is uploaded setting See Define How to Handle a New Document Version on page 234 Click Finish Note To access a previous version of the document click
179. display RGB differences Select this to match channels with matching names This setting ignores the display color differences Also use smart name matching Select this to match the channels with related names For example e when the names differ in the letter case Magenta magenta e when the names differ in color book specification 660 Pantone 660 C and Cyan Process Cyan e when the names are known abbreviations Example C Cyan Note This setting ignores display color differences Note The selection of a particular channel matching setting applies only to the current document To make it default enable the Make this setting the default check box It is possible to edit channel definitions of the current image to match those of the reference image or vice versa Read in Manual Channel Matching in the Viewer on page 143 Manual Channel Matching in the Viewer The Channel Matching Dialog on page 142 displays four channel columns listing 4 the Channels Current and the Channels Reference columns display the unmatched channels the Current and the Reference columns represent the matched channels Matched channels are displayed next to each other Drag the channel to be matched from the Channels Current column to the Current Drag the corresponding channel from the Channels Reference column to the Reference Click on the Channel from which the definition has to be copied The clicked channel will be highlighted
180. dize the height or width of aligned objects in the Viewer For example you can use this to check the text height in your artwork You can create Presets to customize your Caliper to your standardization and compliance needs A Click on the Caliper button from the Measure tools to activate the tool You will get the Free style as the default Caliper form In the sub tool bar you can select the Style Choose from the Style options e Free Default e Fixed e Preset specify the Gap Size which is the distance between the start and end lines If your selected style S e Free changing the gap size will alter the end line e Fixed the distance between the start and end lines update according the gap size e Preset the saved gap size will be applied define the orientation as either vertical l H or horizontal W Save the gap size and orientation as a preset The saved Presets will be added to the Style drop down Use the Delete Gap option to delete the saved presets 5 WebCenter Free Default option e Hold down the left or right mouse button to draw the start line and drag to the end line Release the mouse when the desired width or height is achieved e To adjust the height width simply drag the lines You may also move the caliper form from one location to another Note The Caliper tool will switch to horizontal or vertical orientation corresponding to the direction of your mouse movement lf the hori
181. document list with thumbnails being generated on the fly 85 Fi a elod Ai Q C O Q S wl ra F E 4 e F Fa garna g qr Tei EDF ta i Tag F T i ti TTH T TEF as FH IETF ef MAPT af m i e f FE S er sey wep ten ana arya mse Pery Te ea T ay fee ad anf sag ep ee aay Fey mia seu ary ml Fe Fa aht a PA a 1 Er Ea il aia E oF Ll Fm Fa m ae ae E s Wa a a a ge er ee it SF a ee al Ep Fa e N a 7 5f ip p tEn j tng troy Fang Tiy g Seii meg AEn Sih Eau y TE San Pay Bans g dm F Sag Boy hin sf ay fay Less yg ih et Oe LETI Hi Fa m re il E 4 ae ro oat a ee ee Pee ea Sa eee a rot i in at Pa aA Pi T ia ee Fm Fa Pa ag s ren Fe eF a om a Tog r r i 1 at Pe TP at Py oe a i ul Fort a ang P Pw TLF ag Eig E Sey Foe ELET k Eai F meg bes Paan myg Don Faer Fm a of a Fii ee ee oe iai Pear Faj Fin Fey es Wane tan eee eae hat a hag eae pen te eg te ese hee ee las ta ee the ae tee date Oa gee jay Peay bin han eg Tagg bir bup ingg im bag Dmag Dang biy P iaa F Fag EE ni Dap Minj bug Paap Tagg Sig ee A AT Ha a ar a d ra r ae a a a a a T a a a a ae bie bie e hra Dan Taa i Mra Jap Aia i tia Tra DE Aek Sa E a hua a bea Fhag Laaa Sea Phet Ebl tha f E z d 4 Li ba d at a E a at E i i foe i Tfh jk a ell n ee Oe sa g ae Peng ban f aeg Easg Umg aey Fary Emy aa f aey mi ane aen Fay me na Taag Em rj hate ae TS TLT Bs Ea Le er bk eT Rd bP and ee a a
182. e Graphics files are opened in the Viewer Clicking a document s thumbnail opens the document in the Viewer if it is a graphics file or the application associated with the filename extension 4 3 10 Download a Document 1 Navigate to the document by searching for the document and clicking its name in Search Results or by clicking its name in a project 2 Click Download in the Actions menu e For PDF files uploaded from Automation Engine click Download PDF for printing e fitis an ArtiosCAD document choose the format in which to download it and click Download You may only download in formats for which you have the Download permission 3 Browse for the location in which to save the file and click Save The document is downloaded and may be manipulated as desired 4 3 11 Download Multiple Documents You can download several documents on a same page in a Project or a Search Result page in one go When you select multiple documents for download WebCenter automatically adds them to a compressed archive and then the archive is downloaded To download multiple documents do the following 1 Select the checkboxes of the documents to download 2 Click Download in the Actions menu 3 Choose where to save the archive and click Save Use a decompression utility to extract the documents from the archive The documents are now on the hard drive and may be manipulated as desired Tip To download all of a project s documents
183. e The reference document type has to be the same as the active document type For Example When a CAD document is active only other CAD documents can be selected as the reference The The Information Bar displays the selected active and reference document name and version The Viewer will start the last used compare mode except the Show Current and Show Reference modes Selecting Multi Page Documents You can select the current and compare to pages using the two document selectors in the Document Select panel WebCenter While comparing multi page documents a reset it button is enabled in the Document Select header If you have defined a special mapping for comparing pages of multi page documents you can use this to reset the mapping You have to specify whether to reset the mapping of the active page or for all pages Read also Channel Matching Orientation and Alignment in Compare Mode Viewing CAD Overlay with Graphics While viewing a graphic file with CAD reference the Document Select widget will have e a CAD Overlay selector listing all the CAD documents opened in the Viewer and the CAD references associated with the graphics file If a CAD reference is found you will see this in the document select panel with a link icon You can select this to view together with the graphics document If the graphics file does not have a XMP link you can use the document references feature to link them To remove the CAD link from th
184. e to one of the groups you are in A Group Am In or both Me or Group I Am In If you are a Project Manager you can filter the approvals you need to follow up by status for example to only show the approvals still Pending by due date etc My Work vy My Approvals 5 Documents waiting for approval by Me fad O Document Q 4 2 2 B kl boost odf be 28 z E o a Phuzaz pdf z D c_Leffe_collar xm jae focustraveller_ 8p demo pdf Q A lt 2AE 4 2AE r7 v My Recently Submitted Approvals Show Submitted within Last 1 days Status Name vV Working from the My Work page Neo pdf Q Version 1 e Sort by Due Date yi Version Author Aug 18 2010 at 6 00 PM Berg Brune Aug 18 2010 at 6 00 PM Berg Brune Aug 9 2010 Berg Brune at 10 24 AM Berg Brune Berg Brune Due Date Project AE Uploads AE Uploads Brune s Approval Project Brune Approval Brune Approval Version My Status My Comment Submission Date Project 1 vY in the actions menu You may then navigate between the documents by using the controls in the Viewer header Sep 20 2010 at 1 21 PM Brune s Approval Project vy Approvals to Follow Up mi Pending Rejected Approved Status Name bake boost pdf a e orange pdf Phuzaz pdf c_Leffe_collar xm hydraqua_orange paf focustraveller_ 8p demo pdf mae choose a sta
185. e 4 Internet Explorer Desktop Mobile 11 Safari Desktop 6 Safari Mobile iOS Generating a 3D View from a Graphics file with CAD reference Document Select Current barandbraille pdf a Project HTML5S Viewer 14 1 update Compare to Click to select a difference Document page CAD Overlay BoxesO02 ard Project HTML5S Viewer 14 1 update ca barandbraille pdf Orientation 5 F Alignment a it Offset XY 31 99 203 25 mim e Open a graphics file with a CAD reference Align the CAD overlay correctly on the graphics file Read Aligning CAD overlay and Graphics on page 162 When you open a graphics file with a CAD reference in the Viewer the document select panel will show a o button Note The link between graphics and CAD can be made in a desktop application like DeskPack or PackEdge or using document references Aligning CAD overlay and Graphics on page 162 165 ESKO secon Click the Open 3D View button The Viewer will open the 3D View widget with a message Loading the 3D model 3D View a 2 Loading the 3D model The 3D View widget always shows the HIML5 version of the 3D viewer After the 3D generation you can view the 3D mockups in this widget 3D View EA s From within this widget you can a Open the 3D Viewer in anew window e close the 3D View widget After the 3D perspective is generated the Open 3D View button is available in e the t
186. e The active anchor can be recognized by the crosshair icon 5 Select your anchor point in the reference document displayed in the middle e click to select a point e use the arrow keys to fine tune your anchor points e you can also drag the selected point to another location Note Use zoom tool to help you in finding the anchor point 6 Check the result on the right pane Click Align to confirm Tip If you click auto align after selecting the anchor points it will start auto aligning by moving the reference The Viewer will return to its original state when you click Align Cancel Aligning Graphic Files Using Corner Trim box or Offset You can use the Alignment tools to align two graphics files 1 og You can align the files to compare using the Choose corner for alignment of the reference 393 and select your reference corner from option To specify the corner point for alignment click the alignment drop down 148 WebCenter fod Top Left boa Top Center boa TOp Right goa Center Left fag Centered bog Center Right baa Bottom Left baa Bottom Center boa Bottom Right Click on the Use margins trim boxes for alignment option to align the images relative to the trim boxes of the compared documents When this option is not on the alignment will be relative to the document boundaries Note If the trim box information is not included in the document XMP the document boundary will be used for aligning f
187. e The selected Characteristics will be associated with the Project 209 my ESKOS WebCenter To remove Characteristics from a Project do the same as described above but deselect the checkboxes of the Characteristics to remove them from the list 11 2 3 Specify Project Attributes 1 Login as a user who is a Project Manager or as a user who has the Change Properties permission on the root level of the Project Open the Project whose Attributes you want to specify Click Attributes Choose the Attribute Category and click Change oF O N Set the values for the Attributes as desired and click Change The Attributes are assigned to the Project 11 2 4 About Exporting and Importing Attributes To make working with other systems easier you can export and import project Attributes by using JDF Job Definition Format files You can export the Attributes modify them in another system and then import their changed values back into WebCenter Note You cannot add more Attributes to a project this way this only lets you change the values for existing Attributes Important If you want to import Attributes that are not generated by another WebCenter system you should generate a sample JDF file for the people using the other system to use as a reference so that they format their JDF file correctly The important lines are the ones similar to lt eg SmartName Name Attribute Name Value Value gt there m
188. e click the Tasks tab then the name of the task This opens the task execution page Task Design new Chocolate Ice Cream packaging Edit Task Details Project Approval Project Project Details Description Please add the design to this task Return Start Task Complete Task Status Created gt Assigned to Me gt Due Sep 20 2012 at 10 30 AM Estimated E v Y Task Documents Upload Multiple Documents No documents available Expand All Collapse All Source Name Description Upload Link gt Discussion Return Start Task Complete Task 12 5 1 Start a Task e On the task execution page click the Start Task button This sets the task status to In Progress 12 5 2 Upload Documents to the Task On the task execution page 2505 rm ESKO WebCenter 1 In the Task Documents section click one of the options in the Task Documents section You can either e Upload a document saved on your computer or network use Upload Browse e Link a document already existing in the project to the task use Link e Create a document placeholder from a document template use New Note This is only available if the project has been created from a project template containing document templates This is similar to the general upload document page For more details see Upload via Upload Document on page 51 2 Choose the project Folder in which to upload the document 3 Click Change Y
189. e 63 for more information about attributes 4 If you browsed to a document copied it from another project or created a placeholder from a template the Document Type and document Name are automatically detected You can still change them if needed you cannot change the Document Type of a placeholder or a copied document 5 Enter a Description optional but strongly advised 6 If you want to add this document to the Project s Bill of Materials select Add to BOM then enter the Count of this document how many copies are needed for the BOM 52 WebCenter Note You can only do this if e you are an Administrator e you are the Project Manager e you have the Change BOM permission 7 If the document has attributes fill them in at least the required ones Tip The document has the attribute category associated with its document type in the Configure gt Document Creation tab of the Project see Document Types 8 If you want to use the default approval settings of the project folder for the document select Apply Default Approval Settings this is not available for document URLs Note You can also e Set the approval Due Date only if you have the Change Approval Setup permissions enter a date or pick one in the calendar then choose an hour e Start the approval cycle 9 Click the Upload button 10 If you want to define approval settings specific to this document click Setup document approval This
190. e Cancel Note When the workflow is not running all controls are disabled 13 9 2 Refreshing a Workflow You can refresh the resources used by the workflow task types attributes and any data used by SmartNames like documents projects users by either clicking the Reload Resources button at the bottom of the workflow editor canvas e right clicking the workflow editor canvas and selecting Reload Resources 13 9 3 Pausing and Resuming a Workflow The administrators project managers and users who can edit tasks can pause the workflow by clicking the Hold The tokens in a node that are in progress will be paused after they finish Note The workflow status will change to in Hold To resume the workflow click the Resume button This control becomes active only when a workflow is paused This will move the tokens to the next step in the workflow Tip You can try holding and resuming to get out of workflow hangs a Ky ESKO WebCenter After resuming the workflow status becomes the current status 13 9 4 Solving a Workflow Failure When a node goes into failure you can either e retry the failed node after correcting the cause of failure e stop the workflow e correct the cause of the failure and relaunch the workflow Note e We recommend you use the Error Handler node for troubleshooting your workflow e When a workflow has more than 5000 tokens for example documents traveling
191. e Date Note If the Administrator has enabled Editable items you get an Edit 1 button next to the selected items in the View List Column Order Use the Column Order column to define how to display the information for each Project found enter numbers to order the columns in List View or the text under the project icon in Grid View Note The first column is always the Project Name In the example above the search results display the Project Name 1st column the Description 2nd column the Project Manager 3rd column and the date the Project was Created 4th column for each Project Sort Use the Sort column to define how you want your results sorted first click the check box of the first sorting criterion then the check box of the second etc WebCenter shows numbers indicating the sorting order For example if you want your results to be sorted first by Project Manager then by date created first click the Sort check box for Project Manager this shows a 1 beside it then the Sort check box for Created this shows a 2 Table Sort Enabled Fields in Search Project Name Descrip _ Nrsion Auto Projet Status Created Moditied Modified CustomerLocation OOOO ooo SaesPeson oooO o Project Manager ManagersLocaton O ooo Read more about sorting in Sorting Search Results on page 23 WebCenter Order The order column shows the sorting order 1 2 but also allows you to sort by ascending or desc
192. e Default Note Annotation Color The default is yellow When you click this color block a window opens from which you can select a new color This new preference is saved for all future note annotations Reset Default Note Annotation Color e Click on the point on the image where you want the note The Annotation Window on page 129 will appear where you can enter your note The annotation will be marked by a small note icon in the image Note When you select a note annotation it will be displayed in inverted colors within the view Editing Annotations You can edit or move the annotations in the Viewer e You can select your annotations by grabbing the annotation shape When you hover near an annotation shape the mouse pointer changes to a select arrow selecting it in the Annotation List on page 109 T Note When selected the annotation is highlighted in the annotation list with a yellow background the annotation shape border thickness becomes double the annotation shape displays handles to enable resizing the Note Annotation on page 131 color is inverted in the view area a rectangle line arrow oval and highlight annotations display anchor points e You can drag the annotation using the mouse You can move a Note Annotation on page 131 or a Rectangle annotation by dragging it When you hover near a note annotation the mouse pointer changes to a select arrow To resize rectangle annotations click the anchor
193. e Digest Algorithm Java and all Java based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems in the U S and other countries Part of this software uses technology by Best Color Technology EFI EFI and Bestcolor are registered trademarks of Electronics For Imaging GmbH in the U S Patent and Trademark Office Contains PowerNest library Copyrighted and Licensed by Alma 2005 2007 All other product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Correspondence regarding this publication should be forwarded to Esko Software BVBA Kortrijksesteenweg 1095 B 9051 Gent info eur esko com ESKO secon 2 What s New for WebCenter Users 10 HTML 5 Viewer Enhancements and 3D Viewing Viewing 3D in the HITML5 Collada Viewer on page 164 Enhancements in the HTML5 Viewer New Viewer Preferences Persistent threshold in compare mode Task Management Workflow Enhancements Notifications from the Task Type node Iteration of standard task creation in the terate Tab of a simple Task SmartNames in Routing Router on page 317 Improved Submit Workflow on page 303 More options in Sync Workflow on page 301 Improved Create Project node Create a Main Task Assignee New Sync Workflow node Search Improvements Normal Searching on page 18 Documents E Mailing Links to Download Documents on page 67 Upload a New Version or Revision of a Document on page 58 Persisten
194. e Documents tab in the project e the header of the Document Details page 2 If you see a Security warning you need to allow the Viewer applet to run on your computer Depending on what is set in the Preferences you will see a different security warning e If you see Security Warning e x Do you want to run this application An unsigned application from the location below is requesting permission to run Location http webcenter4 esko com viewer applet jnlp Running this application may be a security risk Select the box below then click run to start the application I accept the risk and want to run this app Do not show this again For this app you need to 1 click I accept the risk and want to run this app a 2 ESKO WebCenter 2 optionally click Do not show again for this app if you don t want to see this security warning the next time you open a document in the Viewer 3 click Run Note You will also see a warning when trying to print from the Viewer You will just need to click OK to be able to print Security Warning x The applet has requested access to the printer Do you want to allow this action Name viewer Always allow this applet to access the printer Note that due to a bug in Java 1 7 0_21 you need to leave Always allow this applet to access the printer deselected or you will get a security error Printing failed java l
195. e Viewer You can also use this to align the CAD overlay on the graphics correctly 1 Select the files to compare from the documents 2 Click Actions gt Compare in Viewer 3 Select the Current and Reference documents in the Document Select on page 105 The viewer starts the last used Compare mode except the View Reference Version or View Current Version modes with those documents Project MIPE s hands on Document comparela pdf Version 1 compare1b pdf Version 1 User skva SKVA qala al g ban Crm BReeha ROD Navigation Orientation Measure rae comparela pdf Version 1 compare1ib Document Select Current CEEC Current n Project MIPE s hands on CONOR Document comparela pdf Compare to Project MIPE s hands on Document compare1b pdf Channel Matching Annotation List Annotations are hidden because Side by Side compare mode is active Show annotations for CN current ajReference Select your preferred Compare mode for example View both side by side am view Zoom in to a specific area and use Auto align Auto Align uses the currently visible view of the two compared images to attempt an automatic alignment Note The offset values are filled in automatically Tip Using this tool repeatedly with one or more zoom ins can be a very convenient and quick way to align two images 146 WebCenter on Orientation Measure
196. e changes Filtering Based on Task Status and Due Date A Group Manager manages multiple tasks at a time and this might lead to delay Using the Search Tasks Status one can see tasks in a more specific status For example you can filter the tasks which are in Completed or In Progress status By filtering the task a Group Manager need not re assign completed tasks or tasks which cannot start because a predecessor is not complete Similarly the tasks can also be filtered by Due Date This gives a Group Manager a quick view of the task for the required time line Using this information Group Manager can view what is due this week or this month to make the required planning 1 Note Ensure to log in as Group Manager 1 The task list for assigned group appears Note If a Group Manager manages multiple groups WebCenter displays the list of managed groups You can only view the tasks for one group at a time 2 Inthe Search Tasks Status drop down list select the desired task status 3 In Due Date select the required due date and then click Go 259 rm ESKO WebCenter Note To set the Due Date filtering setting a task status filter is not necessary The Due Date changes to completion date if the task status is filtered to completed The following are the default due dates settings available e All e Today e Next 3 days e Next week e Next 2 weeks e Next month e Next 3 months e Overdue e Week overdue al
197. e clicked at any time Note This panel and button will only be shown when there are actual matches between attributes and variables When an attribute name and a variable name match and that variable is edited it is possible to save these values back into the attribute category again when saving as a new version When saving the Document as a new version a popup window will come in which the user can specify a version comment and restart approval In the same window you will have two check boxes to specify if you want to update project and document attributes Note that for linked documents it is not possible to save project attributes Note For a lot of the variable types conversions are foreseen in WebCenter However there are some limitations There is no conversion between the WebCenter Rich Text Attributes and CHILI s Formatted Text variable Multivalued Text attributes in WebCenter cannot be imported into the CHILI editor s list variable 4 4 Assigning Document Attributes Attributes are a way to assign user configurable fields and their values to documents and projects They can be restricted to a group of preset values or can be prompted so that the user has to set a value each time it is used 63 ESKO secon Attributes need to have been created by an Administrator before you can use them see the Administration Guide for more information 4 4 1 Assign Document Attributes A N a Open the project and
198. e completed as otherwise tasks of this type can never be completed 5 Optionally add Specifications and determine whether they are required Note If a specification is required tasks of this type cannot be put In Progress before all required specifications are filled out e lf the Admin enabled Attribute is also a task specification when creating some attributes they will be in the specifications list If desired those can be used both as an attribute in your projects and as a specification for tasks You can then select Automatically update project attributes from task specifications so that when the task assignee updates the specifications values and completes the task the corresponding attributes values are updated in the project e You can also select Assign roles from task specifications if you want to use tasks created from this task type to allow non project managers to select users or groups for example to invite people to assign tasks or approvals to users groups See Example Assign a Role using a Task on page 276 for more information 6 Click Finish Note You can also e Add Statuses to a newly created Task Type e Change settings related to task documents e Change settings related to task discussions Now that you have created a new task type it is a good idea to try to create a task based on your new task type Go inside a project click Tasks gt Create New Task and follow the wizard 264
199. e document is a container for designing multi part displays These individual parts in the Canvas may differ in the board format The parts of a Canvas can be saved as separate design files into WebCenter and then referred in a document reference attribute with the name Canvas Parts Note This document reference attribute is available in WebCenter by default Read Canvas related Attribute Categories The Canvas document will also contain the meta data about its parts Note e You cannot use the Canvas documents to run a Standard e Acanvas document cannot be used to create 3D view with aligned graphics However you can view the 2D model with aligned graphics in the Viewer Canvas Information Tab The Document Details gt Canvas Information page has four sub tabs e Geometry tab containing e Detailed design information 192 WebCenter e Dimensional details e Board and flute information e Print item details e Design preview Parts tab displays the information regarding each part The information displayed on this tab will depend on whether these parts are managed by WebCenter or saved to WebCenter Canvas Information Document Information Approval Action History Annotations Projects Attributes Characteristics Discussions 0 Geometry Parts 2D View 3D Model VRML Parts Part Documen t Project Version Board Board Description Part 1 KSJ2 01 ARD KSJ S amp T Canya 1 I
200. e documents from different folders 3 You can change the Name or the Description by double clicking on the cell or by using the F2 shortcut PC 4 If you want to use the default approval settings of the project folder for these documents select Apply Default Approval Settings Note You can also e Set the approval Due Date only if you have the Change Approval Setup permissions enter a date or pick one in the calendar then choose an hour e Start the approval cycle You cannot setup document specific approval settings for several documents at once 5 Click Upload 59 ESKO secon The upload will start and you will see a progress window Depending on how many files and how big they are this can take a while Your browser is unavailable until the upload is done but you can open a new browser to continue your work Note You cannot upload CAPE files or upload PDF files as page lists with the upload applet Please use the normal Upload document option for this Note When you try uploading a document which already exists in the project the upload of this document will fail You won t get anew version Use Upload new version instead no multi document support Upload from a Workflow system You can upload documents to WebCenter from e a Automation Engine workflow using the Publish on Web task e an Odystar canvas using the WebCenter Output gateway e a Nexus workflow using the WebCenter Output activity
201. e graphics file click Turn off CAD Overlay in the CAD Overlay selector and Save Read more in Viewing CAD with Graphics Open 3D View m button Click this generate a 3D View Note The 3D button will be available in this widget only when it is possible to generate a 3D from the current Graphics and the selected or referred CAD overlay 5 2 8 Page List The Page list panel will be available when you open multi page or page list documents Page list ag a 10 7d a a e see the thumbnails of all the pages Each row will contain two thumbnails e configure size to Small Thumbnails Medium Thumbnails and Large Thumbnails Here you can e view a specific page by clicking the corresponding thumbnail The thumbnail of the active page will be highlighted 107 ESKO secon 108 view the page name or folio for the thumbnails This allows you to select a page corresponding to a folio or page name view which pages are annotated These pages will have a note on the thumbnail view the approval status of individual pages of a Page list A blue circle indicates the pending approvals on a page Read also Approval in Page Lists on page 156 Note You can define page by page approval in a page list For a multi page document the approval set up is for the entire document view the blank and empty pages as thumbnails The blank pages of a page list will be displayed as white thumbnails and the empty pages as crossed thumbnails
202. e project s notifications will be used e Custom Notifications if you want to select who to notify only for this document 2 If you have chosen Custom Notifications define who to notify for each approval event e the Project Manager e the Involved People the people who are involved in a particular event for example when an approval comment is posted the Involved People are the document approvers Tip Click on Involved People to see a list of involved people for each event e the Project Members Notification Manager O Approval Stage Started A Approval Rejection or Approval Comment Posted O User Rejected Document A Approval Stage Finished O Approval Cycle Finished A Notify by E mail Involved People OB n m 7 Q o Members ry LI o CO Tip You can use the top check boxes to notify the Project Manager the Involved People or the Project Members of all approval events Add an Approval Stage Your staged approval cycle already has one approval stage by default 1 2 3 Give the stage a name Add approvers to the stage see Add Approvers on page 228 Decide to allow conditional approval or not see Allow Conditional Approval or Not on page 229 Rejection on page 237 Click Add Stage to add another stage Define what to do when one user rejects the document see Define How to Handle Document Note This adds a stage after the last stage To add a stage be
203. e the correct logo can somebody else change it please af Accepted peeters mipe MIPE1 Custom Annotation Filter x Match All Y of the following Review State lis Accepted Cancel ETAGE _ IFT Y The Annotation list panel has tools to Add a Filter Row e Save annotations e Step through annotations 109 ESKO secon Reload You can Reload the annotations of the active image This reloads all annotations without restarting the viewer You will be warned about unsaved annotations while reloading Annotation Options Filter Annotations Create Custom filters for annotations If you select an annotation either in the annotation list or in the image this will be highlighted in the annotation list panel You will also see the possible options concerning the annotation and its replies Note The time will be displayed as 5h ago or yesterday To see the exact time hover over the displayed time Tip If you click and hold the left mouse button on an annotation in the annotation list the annotation becomes highlighted in the view From within the Annotation list panel you can Set the review state oe of the annotation Zoom to annotation A If you are the author you can do more actions via Actions Menu e Edit annotation e Delete the annotation You can only delete comments that you have authored All the replies to the deleted
204. e the parent or master document is located When the project name is specified only the parent documents that are in this project are selected This field is optional and by default empty WelbCenter e Fail if no Documents found check this when you want the workflow to stop if the parent documents are not found This option is turned on by default e Add Input Documents to Output check this to send the incoming document references also to the output pin This option is turned off by default Send Notification You can send automatic workflow notifications using the Send Notifications node These notifications are sent as an e mail with a configurable subject and body You can customize this according to your needs Parameters In the To field type the e mail addresses of the receivers or select them using SmartName The following SmartNames are supported e Project Manager e Sales Person e Workflow Master the project member who is assigned the whole workflow as a task in the project e Groups e Users e Roles the e mail will be sent to the current holders of this role in the project Tip Use as a separator between the receivers In the Subject field type the subject of the e mail The subject can be configured using SmartNames In the Message field type the body of the e mail You can use the buttons and options at the top of the field to format your message Tip Project name or a User name J Sele
205. e the type of E mail Notifications to use e No Notifications if you don t want to notify any user of the progress of the approval cycle e Default Notifications if you want to use the project s or the folder s notifications if the document is in a folder with notifications defined they will be used otherwise the project s notifications will be used e Custom Notifications if you want to select who to notify only for this document 2 If you have chosen Custom Notifications define who to notify for each approval event e the Project Manager e the Involved People the people who are involved in a particular event for example when an approval comment is posted the Involved People are the document approvers Tip Click on Involved People to see a list of involved people for each event e the Project Members Notification O Approval Stage Started O Approval Rejection or Approval Comment Posted O User Rejected Document B Approval Stage Finished Approval Cycle Finished A Notify by E mail Involved People go C o Members 22 17 ESKO WebCerter 220 Tip You can use the top check boxes to notify the Project Manager the Involved People or the Project Members of all approval events Add Approvers You can add any member of the project as an approver You can also add user groups or roles that have been invited to the project as approvers To add a project member as an ap
206. e your changes after setting the review state io Zoom to annotation q e do more actions via Actions Menu e Edit annotation e Delete the annotation You can only delete comments that you have authored All the replies to the deleted comments will also be deleted irrespective of the author e Duplicate the annotation Use this to make a variation e g correction of an annotation made by another user e Save the annotation Note Only the original author can edit delete or save e Reply Click on the Reply field to get a rich text editor and type in your reply You can either Save or Cancel the typed reply These replies are visible in the annotation window as well as in the Annotation List Tip Only two of the latest replies are visible in the window Click Show x more replies to view the rest of the replies To view less replies click on the Show less replies button Note In the Show only selected annotation setting the annotation pop ups of the selected ones are shown When this setting is turned off select Show only selected annotation pop up to view the selected one s pop up and all other annotation markings This setting overrules the Pinning Read more in Annotation Options on page 135 Note Annotation You can create a text annotation at any specific point on the image using the E Note Annotation tool e Select the E Note annotation tool You can also set the color using 131 ESKO P 182 Chang
207. e your project s due dates 1 Open the project and select Tasks 2 Click the Schedule Tasks link You can see all due dates and lead times of the existing tasks but also their Estimated Finish Date Schedule Tasks for project Almond Chocolate Bar small Task Name Assigned to Depends on Status Old Lead Time Get translated text Berg Brune 14 days Design artwork Agency Design 10 days Review the design Keizer Debbie 10 days Implement Corrections 5 days un F Ww N hoo p 2 Agency Design 3 1 Make versions for different markets Berg Brune 2 days Old Due Date Jul 5 2011 Jun 20 2011 Jul 4 2011 Jul 11 2011 Jul 13 2011 Estimated Start Date Jun 15 2011 Jun 6 2011 Jun 20 2011 Jul 4 2011 Jul 11 2011 Estimated Finish Date Jul 5 2011 Jun 20 2011 Jul 4 2011 Jul 11 2011 Jul 13 2011 New Lead Time days gays gays days days New Start Date Make estimated dates the new dates This can differ from the due date because certain tasks are already overdue or because due dates were chosen without taking the predecessor tasks due dates into account You can view the lead times in days only or in days and hours When choosing days and hours you will be able to refine the scheduling to the hour a task should start or finish 3 To change the due dates you can either e Manually change the Lead Time of certain tasks enter the New Lead
208. eader spreads When one of the two pages is absent the active page is displayed with an empty area next to it Note Although you can view two pages at the same time there can only be one active page You can make a page active by clicking on its thumbnail The pairs will be displayed according to its binding e Left edge binding the first page and the odd numbered pages are displayed on the right The even numbered pages will be on the left Page list i WebCenter e Right edge binding the first page and the odd numbered pages are displayed on the left The even numbered pages are displayed on the right Page list i Read also Marking Pages in a Page List on page 159 Comparing Multi Page Page Lists Document Pages 1 Load the Multi page Page List documents into the Viewer by selecting them and clicking Actions gt View and Annotate or Actions gt Compare in Viewer Special thumbnails are used for Blank and Empty Non available and pages of a Page List An empty page cannot be selected as the active page 159 156 WebCenter Note Blank and Empty page thumbnails are only available for Page Lists 2 Select specific pages in Current and Compare To document selectors The pages are grouped by document version Use Hide all pages in the Current and Compare To document selectors to have the display aggregated A dialog opens up where you can set your comparison mode 3 In this dialog defi
209. earch The Save Search page appears WebCenter Do one of the following e To create a new saved search type a Name for the saved search e To update change an existing saved search select it from the Your previously saved searches list Administrators have to select one of the following Search scope options other users can only save personal searches e Personal if only you should be able to see this saved search e Global if all users of the system should be able to see this saved search Click Save You can read more about working with Saved Searches in Creating Advanced Saved Searches on page 29 Searching Projects Using the Calendar View What is the Calendar View The calendar view is a new feature of project search An administrator can configure a saved search to contain an area columns displaying the project stages statuses in a calendar The picture below shows an example Y Search_1_demo e Project Status Show All el Found 13 items Hide Thumbnail Show as Grd Page 1 of 1 Name Actions Created Manager BOa 3 2012 Dec 10 2012 Dec 17 2012 Dec 24 2012 Dec Jj Aan t Dec snoepjes 1 8 10 Martinez Teresa TEMA 6 aie 2012 aa Dec Snoepjes 1 Dec 4 gt Martinez Teresa TEMA B 2012 Saip SEES Dec 21 2012 eg sil Dacs Dec it te 27 Martinez Teresa TEMA 5 Te 2012 oa oe a Dec oo ss _ 31 Martinez Teresa TEMA 3 mae 2012 Snoepjes 2 enor 1
210. east one Concurrent Power User License Using this node you can 13 WebCenter e create or update projects either in the current WebCenter or another WebCenter e copy the existing project documents to the new project e iterate over an attribute to create multiple projects e specify project attributes gt Few gt Gree a B amp a start select BOM Data Splitter Create Project Completed Placeholders Project Tab Project Name SHAMPOO Tterator Value gt Update Project if it already exists otherwise create a new Project Project Name Suffix Template MJN_Child Template Project Description Project Manager Project Manager Project Status Active Project Due Date Due Date Customer Legal Name Customer Legal Name Location Customer Location Parameters for creating the project all smart name enabled e Project Name is the name of the new project If not specified auto naming is checked in the template or in the admin gt general gt preferences settings Note If the field is left empty without auto naming in the Project Template you will receive an error message One or more mandatory parameters were not specified e Update Project if it already exists otherwise create a new Project Check this option to update a project with the specified name if it already exists 291 IK ESKOS 292 WebCenter If itis not checked a new
211. ect Depending on the operation the document will be copied moved or linked into the project If a target folder is set up the document will end up in that target folder if the user has upload rights to that folder lf a document that belongs to more than one project is moved the document will be deleted from all the source projects before moving into the current project The project manager can rename the document if needed Document Templates If there is document library associated with a template the link corresponding to the document template will be added in the project You can choose a document from the template by clicking on the link A new document will be created in the project from the template and can be renamed The attribute category of the document from the template will be the same as before Saved Search Use this option to allow the user to select a file from a saved search Click the given link to see a dialog with saved search results All the filter options configured in the saved search will be available Select one or more documents and click on the configured action Depending on the setup a document will be copied linked or moved WelbCenter 11 1 3 Create a Project Based on Another Project Log in as a project manager In the Create or Projects menu click Create Project Choose Copy setup from an Existing Project in the Create list A QO N Select the Project to copy from Note You
212. ectangle annotation with the measurements as its content Check Bar Codes I Use the Check Bar Code lki tool to analyze and interpret the Bar Code text in the selected language Select the area around the bar code with a click drag release using the left mouse button You can also select the area and click the lki tool to check the bar code The result appears in The Channels Panel and in a pop up near the bar code The following information will appear in a pop up e Type The bar code type e Value The encoded value e Magnification The bar code magnification in percentage visible only when the value is not 100 e Bar Width Reduction The line width compensation in mm visible when the value is not 0 103 ESKO scum 104 na e sW aa aoe Measure A Approval Details No Approval Setup Defined Channels Bl m pe All pai jan E 300 E ass nae a 2 g 288 C39 3563442 S 151 mad se 8 lt Make Annotation P zs E Die on o lt al eE 7 3 aS 3 esi braill yp 8 a OC z Note The information will be displayed in the following order lt Type gt lt Value gt lt Magnification gt lt Bar Width Reduction gt mm FAN Ta of11 745206100 101 0 0 01 mm To make an annotation from this pop up click on the Make Annotation a option You will get a rectangle annotation with the measurements as its content Caliper Use the Caliper tool to measure and standar
213. ed and the user gets the most permissive security setting available Permissions and groups an example For example user USER1 is a member of GROUP1 GROUP2 and GROUP3 PROJECT1 has GROUP1 and GROUP2 as invited members and GROUPS is not invited GROUP1 has Change Properties granted and GROUP2 has it denied and it is not set for GROUP3 because GROUPS is not an invited member USER1 is able to modify database information about PROJECT1 because it is granted through GROUP Project Managers and Admin group members Members of the Admins group have full permission to access everything Project Managers have full permission within the projects they manage 11 7 1 Set Security on a Project 1 Log in as a project manager 2 Open the project Note The project should have folders created and members invited already 3 Click the Security tab Project Approval Project Status Active plot Upload Multiple Documents Manager Keizer Debbie Customer Due On oS More actions Description Mail link to Modified Sep 20 2012 Documents 1 Tasks 0 Discussions 0 Characteristics Attributes Project Information Approval Notifications Members Security Configure Project Folders Users Groups Roles Permissions for project Approval Project Full oo Add Chang Dalsia E aate Lock Update Change Change ange Permission Properties Start Stop Approval Approval Task amp Kent Clark SUPE
214. ed document pages rapidly one after the other e All annotations will be hidden e Approval details will be unavailable e If the channels are split in different views in each view the documents will rapidly change e f measure tools are active the information pop up will be updated rapidly depending on the visible page View Both on Top You can view the documents to be compared on top of each other in this mode You will not see the difference view in this mode Difference Compare Mode View both highlight differences In difference compare mode you can view a combination of the current and the reference channels in the same window When you select this mode you will see an additional tool bar WebCenter ANS o se Ee Selecting the Compare color space You can use compare color space tools to judge the nature of the differences between the compared documents e Compare Channels This is the default mode Use this to compare Channels one by one The added and subtracted content is displayed in highlight colors e Compare HSV This mode compares the HSV color of the two documents and you can see the relative differences in a graded color overlay The common parts among the compared documents are shown in a neutral gray color The overlay color will be a grade of the selected Subtracted color with the strength depending of the magnitude of the difference Use this to compare documents where the channels are not the same F
215. eds a plug in for VRML format e g Cortona to generate the 3D view of the document If this is absent the browser will download the VRML file Note The Canvas documents should have folding angles to be able to render them in 3D You will see an error message if this information is missing 193 WebCenter Cortona 30 rat 9 2 Opening Documents in ArtiosCAD Standard Edition Enterprise Edition Set your My WebCenter gt My Preferences gt ArtiosCAD Preferences as either e ArtiosCAD Standard Edition to download an ArtiosCAD document from the WebCenter site and open it in your ArtiosCAD desktop application e ArtiosCAD Enterprise Edition to open the document in the installed ArtiosCAD Enterprise Edition 1 You may open your design manufacturing 3D file you want to edit in ArtiosCAD desktop application from e the document details page using the Open in ArtiosCAD button Mail link to View and Annotate More actions the Project Details Document Overview page using the open La button in the document actions 194 WebCenter a C 2 ARD i8KB a4 e j 7 the Task Execution Documents section page using the open t button in the document actions ne 2 ARD q e the Document Search Results page using the open t button shown next to the document name from the list view grid view Name 2 ARD Description Project Project 2 If your preference is set as Artio
216. en saving a project to a Template you also save its tasks to this Template When creating a new project from this Template you ll automatically have these tasks in your new project e You can also create a project as a partial copy of an existing project After clicking Create New Project click Copy setup from an Existing Project see Create a Project Based on Another Project on page 205 There you have the option to copy the tasks e A third way to quickly create a task from existing tasks is to create a task as a copy of another task 12 11 1 Copy a Task from Another Task Note You can only copy from other tasks in the same project h Go into the task details of the task you want to copy and click Copy Task on the right of the screen Choose if you want to NO e Copy Specifications e Copy Documents Into the new task oO Enter the new task s Name and an optional Description A Change the due date as desired ala im ESKO WeeCanter 5 Assign it to the project member of your choice 6 Click Finish 12 12 Example Assign a Role using a lask 2 Use this to allow non Project Managers to invite people assign tasks or approvals to users or groups via a task For example use this if you want Marketing Managers or customers to invite an agency without getting to project management details You will need your Administrator s help for this steps 1 to 3 1 As an Administrator crea
217. end date for the grey block of this project status the begin date is simply the end date of the previous status Notes e Subtasks are left out of the calculation e n case multiple tasks are set the same project status one merged stage is shown only This situation is best avoided e Incase no project status history is available nothing is shown e Completed Project Statuses are not shown in the calendar view When a project has been put to completed and was started again later there will be a gap in the history bar Project Status History Settings In order to be able to show the real project feedback the project status history option must be turned on When loading the page the following tests are made e If the global settings for the Project status change include in project history is turned off a message box with a clear message is shown e f project specific settings for the Project status change include in project history is turned off for some projects and the global settings is on a warning icon with a clear tooltip message is shown next to the project name ia Snoepies 12 e Snospies 2 2 BER lt lt 13 2012 Project status change include in project history is turned off for this project iii s pies 3 EE E 11 2012 i qoo00 Snoe WebCenter Downloading Search Results You can download the results of your search as an Excel file x13 1 In the Search Results pa
218. ending order Ascending order sorts from A to Z for alphabetical fields like Project Name and from old to new for chronological fields like Created Descending order chronological fields sorts from Z to A for alphabetical fields and from new to old for For example if you define the following sorting order T Use Advanced Search Characters E Search Results Options View List Column Order Sort Order Project Name choc E i 2 Description iA 2 Project Status Show All Created o E a E 1 your results will be sorted as below Search Results Save This Search Found 4 items Hide Thumbnail Show as Grid Page 1 of 1 Name Description Manager Created 1 Almond Chocolate Bar big Berg Brune f Now 30 2010 Berg Brune Nov 29 2010 Berg Brune Nov 29 2010 Choc Ice Cream packaging Berg Brune f Sep 22 2010 Found 4 items Hide Thumbnail Show as Grid Page 1 of 1 The results are first sorted by descending creation date from new to old Then if two dates are the same like Nov 29 2010 in the example they are sorted by ascending project name from A to Z sorting Search Results You can sort the search results in the List Grid view based on sort enabled search columns In the List Layout You can click on the primary sort field header 7 to switch between ascending and descending All the other sortable fields will have the sort icon next to their header text
219. enter You can still edit some properties of the Page List in the Page Information view such as the number of pages the binding edge etc 7 6 4 Update Pages in a Page List 182 You can update a specific page of range of pages in a Page List either from Automation Engine or through the Upload feature in WebCenter To Update One or More Pages from the Pilot Te In the Automation Engine Pilot s Imposition Gallery select the pages in the imposition that you want to update Right click one of the selected pages and re launch the exact same Publish imposition on WebCenter Chain ticket you used to upload the original Page List To Update Individual Pages from VWebCenter 0 Ff N Navigate to the folder in which the original Page List resides Click the name of the Page List to open the Document Details page for the Page List Click Page List to open the Page List view Click the Upload New Version link in the row corresponding to the page you want to update Browse for the PDF document containing the new version of the page you want to update and click Finish to upload the new page WebCenter The Index for First Page field is already filled in because you are only updating a single page at the listed index To Update Multiple Pages from WebCenter Navigate to the folder in which the original Page List resides Click the name of the Page List to open the Document Details page for the Page List
220. er into which to move the document Choose to either Move inside the current project or Move to another project to another project Choose the project into which to move the document If that project has folders choose the folder into which to move the document 5 Click Move 4 3 2 Copy a Document 1 Open the project and folder containing the document to copy and select it If desired select more than one document by selecting their checkboxes 2 Click Copy document s in the Actions menu 3 Choose to either Copy inside the current project or Copy to another project 4 Select Copy as Link to copy a link to the destination folder or project 5 Do one of the following If you chose to copy the document Then you must in the same project Select the folder into which to move the document or provide a new name for the copy in the Rename Document field to another project Choose the project into which to copy the document If that project has folders choose the folder into which to copy the document 6 Click Copy 4 3 3 Delete a Document Note A document with a started Approval Cycle cannot be deleted The Approval Cycle must be stopped before you can delete the document Of ESKO sesame 1 Open the project and folder containing the document to delete and select it If desired select more than one document by selecting their checkboxes 2 Click Delete Document s in the Actions menu 3 Click OK to
221. erybody with access to this saved search can use the calendar view In many cases the system will be configured to have such a saved search appear as a menu item this feature already exists since WebCenter 10 and has become very popular In the basic view Show Calendar View only 1 line is displayed and it stops at the vertical today line e The starting point is the project creation From there onwards colored blocks go forward in time The color changes on the date where the project actually changed status as remembered in the 26 WebCenter project history This way you normally get a continuous line with each time differently colored blocks Completed statuses are not painted so for completed projects you see the last block ending before today The vertical black line is always on today So the current status of the project can be seen from the color where the black line cuts through the status line Obviously you can also see the status from the icon if the administrator chose to show tt You can zoom the calendar view with the and buttons This changes the time scale from months to weeks to days or reversely You can pan the calendar view by using the arrows just before the and icons Clicking on the magnifier icon resets the view ee a The colors are as defined in the project status setup Admin Project Management Project Statuses The number displayed corresponds to t
222. esperson Po Search Results Options View List Column Order Sort Order Clear this form Y Project Manager User Group Me 7 Manager s location 0 Add Role Search Criterion DESIGNER Puser O Group Ome __ J Attributes Characteristics Bill of Materials Show All v View List bh a Save this search Select the information you want to see when viewing the results in List View For example when selecting Description Created date and Project Manager as in the example above the Project Name is always shown your results are displayed as below Search Results Found 144974 items Hide Thumbnail Name Actions v Description os Projecti 10 Docs root amp Project2 40 Docs root amp Project3 300 Docs root F Test of test amp AE TMG7 Save This Search Show as Grid Modified Due Date Jun 12 2014 Apr 7 2014 Apr 9 2014 Jun 13 2014 May 29 2014 Apr 16 2014 Apr 16 2014 Apr 16 2014 Jan 10 2013 S Manager auto pm AUTO PM auto task AUTO TASK ADMIN ADMIN Martinez Teresa TEMA ADMIN ADMIN Save Search Results Page 1 of 725 Next Last gt gt TEMA_DESIGN f 25 IEMA DESIGN D p martinez tere TEMA USER6 21 ESKO secon 22 Note In Grid View you always see the following information e Project Name e Description e Project Manager e Project Status e Du
223. ew Push Through Configuration and in the Destination UNC field specify the path to the Hot Folder of your Odystar or Nexus server that will be RIPping your data Also make sure you select the correct workflow type Odystar Nexus or Automation Engine from the corresponding list Note For detailed instructions on setting up workflow folders see Configure Push Through Configurations for Workflow Folders in the Administration Guide Create a new folder in your WebCenter project and in the Folder Properties select the Workflow Folder Advanced option Then select the push through configuration you just created Modify your Nexus or Odystar flow to include the WebCenter Input activity or gateway Make sure the settings point to the same Hot Folder you specified in the push through configuration in WebCenter Upload a PDF document to the workflow folder in WebCenter oF ESKO scone If you set up the whole workflow correctly the files you upload will be copied to the Odystar or Nexus hot folder where they are picked up by the WebCenter Input The flow will RIP the pages collect them into ZIP files and return them to the WebCenter project where you can view and approve them End Split Pages End 1 WebCenter Output Ts an sis RIP aie WebCenter Input End Split Pages xe id End 1 Scene Output S Compress RIP End 2 SS WebCenter Input 5 2 ne Fl MLSs Viewer 5 2 1 About the HTML5
224. ew folder Recognizing workflow folders Workflow folders have a yellow icon with an arrow on it fe Project Documents 0 gt Copy to Workflow 1 The files in a workflow folder have two extra icons The first shows whether the copy of the file was successful or not The second is a button to copy the file again to the location defined in the configuration 11 1 7 Synchronize the Project with a Workflow Job If the Admin has defined a workflow connection you can create projects that automatically create a workflow job see Configure Workflow Connections in the Administration Guide for more information 207 my ESKOS WebCenter The workflow jobs created will be automatically synchronized to the linked WebCenter projects when certain events occur as defined by the Admin However if the Admin has enabled this possibility you can also synchronize the workflow job to the linked project that you manage whenever you need to To do this click the synchronization icon in the project header 11 1 8 Create a Project from Automation Engine 208 With the Create WebCenter Project Automation Engine task you can create an Automation Engine Job and a corresponding project in WebCenter at the same time You can also retrieve information from WebCenter Project Template Customer Company and associate it with the project you are creating directly from Automation Engine This avoids double entries and dupli
225. f desired and click the username of the user to edit The Profile page appears 3 Make the required changes To edit the user s You should edit the fields on the Profile page select a different User Menu Note Users linked to a company will always see the menu assigned to the company even if they have a different menu assigned to them individually company or location 1 Click the Company Location link on the Profile page 2 Select anew company and click Finish 4 Click Save to confirm 11 10 2 Change the Password for a User 1 Inthe My WebCenter menu click My Users 245 my ESKO WebCerter 0 Ff N This shows all the users you have created On the My Users page filter the list of users if desired and click the username of the user to edit Click Password to show the Password page Type anew Password and confirm it Click Change to save the changes 11 10 3 Set the Preferences for a User In the My WebCenter menu click My Users This shows all the users you have created On the My Users page filter the list of users if desired and click the username of the user to edit Click Preferences to show the Preferences page Configure the Preferences as needed For more information on the settings and options see General Preferences in the Administration Guide Click Save to confirm 11 10 4 Copy Preferences to Users 246 Use this to quickly copy previously def
226. f failed documents on the Multiple Document Approval Setup Info page Tip From the same page you can also e Revert the approval settings to the last saved version when editing an existing approval cycle See also Editing Approval Settings on page 239 e Clear the approval settings So the project folder or document has no approval cycle For a document this also clears all settings inherited from the project or folder e Start the Approval Cycle see also Start or Stop the Approval Cycle on page 239 11 5 3 Allow Conditional Approval or Not e Decide to allow conditional approval or not Use conditional approval to allow your approvers to give their approval on a certain condition for example if a barcode in the document is corrected The conditions like the comments and the reasons for rejection will be shown in e the Approval tab of the Document Details page 229 ESKOw WeeCanter e the Action History tab of the Document Details page e the Document History in the Viewer Note When working with an Automation Engine workflow documents you approve conditionally in WebCenter will go through the Approved with a Condition output of the Publish on Web task in your Automation Engine workflow A Publish on Web Approved wy ay i OK TODO o Wait for Action Checkpoint Use a Wait for Action Checkpoint task for those documents so the Automation Engine operator can fix them manua
227. ffective immediately Set the user specific permissions a Choose Users b Select the user whose permissions are to be modified in the Permissions for user list c For Project and folder permissions check the checkbox in a column to grant it to the user or group in that row clear the checkbox to deny it To revert to default Project permissions click Reset Tip To grant or deny all permissions check or clear the Full Permission checkbox The changes are effective immediately Set group level permissions a Choose Groups b Select the group whose permissions are to be modified in the Permissions for group list c For Project and folder permissions check the checkbox in a column to grant it to the user or group in that row clear the checkbox to deny it To revert to default Project permissions click Reset Tip To grant or deny all permissions check or clear the Full Permission checkbox The changes are effective immediately Set role level permissions a Choose Roles b Select the role of which you want to modify the permissions in the Permission for role list c The changes you make in this section define what the default permssions to be used when you assign a user or group to this specific role Any changes made here will not affect users and or groups that have already been assigned to the role 243 my ESKOS WebCenter 11 6 Reassign a Project to Another Project Manager Projects may be reass
228. files you can upload a single zcp file If you are uploading a Page List document you must also specify the Name and Starting Index of the Page List 51 4 WebCenter Attention Graphic files must be self contained and may not contain references to external files such as fonts or placed images Make sure fonts are embedded In case you upload native files GRS or PDF Native you should use the Automation Engine Publish on Web task If you need to upload manually anyway first make a self contained file with Outright You can also convert to PAF and upload the PAF file Copy a document from another project Select Copy in the Source list then select the project to copy the document from and the document to copy Add a link to a document Select URL in the Source list and type in or paste the URL to the document Create a document placeholder from a Select New in the Source list select the document template document template to use in the pop up and fillin any attributes that may be required Note This is only available if the project has been created from a project template Note The document template s document containing document templates type will be used for the document placeholder except if that document type cannot be copied like Page List See Document Templates in the Administration Guide for more information about document templates and Assigning Document Attributes on pag
229. find tasks by using the filter and the search field 13 4 Open the Workflow Editor If you have the right to create Task Types you will be able to create a Workflow in any Task Type 1 Click Task Types in the menu bar then in the Task Types page click the required Task Type 2 On this Task Type page click the Workflow tab 3 If you see a security warning you need to allow the Java applet to run on your computer Depending on what is set in the Preferences you will see a different security warning e lf you see 8 0 0 Security Warning Do you want to run this application An unsigned application from the location below is requesting permission to run Location http rdvmwcecl1 WebCenter_Inst Running this application may be a security risk More Information Select the box below then click run to start the application _ accept the risk and want to run this app _ Do not show this again for this app you need to 1 click I accept the risk and want to run this app 2 optionally click Do not show again for this app if you don t want to see this security warning the next time you open the workflow editor 3 click Run e If you see ke WebCenter Do you want to run this application Name wfapplet Publisher Esko Software bvba E Location http rdvmwc04 WebCenter_Inst This application will run with limited access that is intended to protect your computer and personal
230. folder containing the document to change and click its name Click Attributes Select the Attribute Category to use and click Save In the Show Attributes in Category page fill in the desired the values for the Attributes and click Save 4 4 2 Change Document Attributes 1 2 3 Open the project and folder containing the document to change and click its name Click Attributes Change the Attributes values as desired and click Save The values are changed 4 4 3 Change an Attribute Category Attribute Categories are related Attributes grouped together for convenience If you change an Attributes Category the previous values are not saved O ao FB Q N a Open the project and folder containing the document to change and click its name Click Attributes Click the Change Category link Select the new Attributes Category to use and click Save Confirm the deletion of the old values and click OK Enter the values for the new Attributes and click Save 4 4 4 Export Attributes to JDF 64 To make working with other systems easier you can export and import document Attributes by using JDF Job Definition Format files You can export the Attributes modify them in another system and then import their changed values back into WebCenter Note that you cannot add more Attributes to a document this way this only lets you change the values for existing Attributes 1 2 3 Navigate to the document with
231. fore the current stage click Insert Stage above the current stage instead 235 11 ESKOG WebCerter 236 6 Repeat steps 1 to 4 for each stage 7 If necessary use the Move Up and Move Down links to reorganize your stages To remove a stage click the minus button in front of it Add Approvers You can add any member of the project as an approver You can also add user groups or roles that have been invited to the project as approvers To add a project member as an approver select him her in the Add Approvers list Repeat for every user you want to add as approver To add a group as an approver select it in the Add Approvers list choosing either One of Group if you want one any member of the group to be able to approve it for the whole group The document will get the approved status once one group member approves it A typical example would be a legal review which is completed as soon as one member of the legal department has approved the document All of Group if you want all members of the group to approve the document The document will get the approved status once all group members approve it A typical example would be a management review which is only completed after all members of the management team have approved the document Note When adding a group as All of Group the users who are group members when the approval stage is started become approvers If you later add or remove users from the g
232. g the Changes Reset channel order and color definitions button 3 Right click to specify will undo all display color edits by default e Reset channel order only e Reset color definitions only e Reset all channel information 5 2 17 CAD The CAD panel will have options depending on the file you opened in the Viewer While Viewing CAD files and Manufacturing Data CAD panel contains a list of layers and classes You can select the parts of the CAD data to be displayed in the view This panel is only available if the viewed document contains CAD data 125 5 WebCenter Layers All Layers Sheet Designs Classes All Classes Main Design Outside Bleed When you open a CAD document in the Viewer this panel displays e Layers list Here you can turn each CAD layer off so that it is hidden from the view Only layers present in the CAD data are shown in this list e Classes list Manufacturing data usually contains a number of one up designs consisting of anumber of layers These layers belong to a layer class In the Classes list you can turn off the layer classes e Click All Layers All Classes to view or hide all data at once e Use the eye button to select the layers or classes in view i Right click on the eye next to a layer or class to view just that one All other layers classes will be hidden from the view Note The order of these layers and classes is defined in the
233. ge click Save Search Results 2 Inthe pop up that opens choose to Open the resulting Excel file in your spreadsheet application or Save it to your hard disk Creating Advanced Saved Searches Normal and keyword searches may be saved for future use To access saved searches click Search gt Saved Searches Shown below is a sample Saved Searches page Saved Searches Select All Delete checked items Global Project Searches anva Save search Edit Visibility Edit Search Make Search Personal anva search Edit Visibility Edit Search Make Search Personal anva wer6568 Edit Visibility Edit Search Make Search Personal Geoff Proj 1 Edit Visibility Edit Search Make Search Personal Geoff Project With Doc Ref Edit Visibility Edit Search Make Search Personal HADW cascading 2 Edit Visibility Edit Search Make Search Personal Searches can be saved as e aPersonal search visible only to the individual user e aGlobal search visible to all WebCenter users Note Only an Administrators can save a search as a Global Search You can create global searches visible only to certain companies or groups Some searches will be used by several groups such as Designer groups Use this option to securely create dedicated searches to groups and companies without making them accessible to every WebCenter user e To execute a saved search simply click its name from the saved searches page e To edit a saved search click Edit Search e To create glo
234. gement in WeDCENTED 0 0 0 ccc ccteceretereceterssetsssessrsssetesisserssiecsssesecasetssetstasiesiseareieresiee 247 12 1 What You Can Do with Task ManageMe nt cesses 247 12 2 Basic Concepts of Task ManageMe nt ccc ecectscesstsrsesiesssesisresessssiiesiareseeees 248 12 3 Getting Started with TASKS ccccccccccecseecscseecsssecsvsesscsvsesevsesecsvsesevsssessvsssecssitsavssietesitsevasseevssiecasieisvaseanens 249 kao Cedae a Smp TaS Kancana ne E T ee ene eee 249 12 3 2 Use the Task List Task Search and My Work Page 250 124 Working win TaSKSi ieni EE a E EE RE ia 250 g 2a es otc a a K E E E E ree ee ene ee eee eee 250 1242 Edta TASK erent ect naeio Eein a a Daira He aaki Nat aa aeia Enei iia 251 12 4 3 Restricting a Task to Project Roles or GrOuPS cc cect ceece reteset 252 12 4 4 Reschedule a Set Of TASKS ccccccsescecsccssecscsrsesetsssssscssesissterssesessersresesseesssesesstariseeees 252 124 5 gt DISCUSSIONS en enn en ee er 255 12 5 Working on Tasks Assigned to YOU siisrarsoiiisiiionrei oa ei neinte eei E aE n ar 255 aT a A a E A 255 12 5 2 Upload Documents to the Task cccccccccccececcsscssstecsscscestcssssrsscssesssssssstseseeares 255 12 5 3 Download a List of Documents from the TaSK ssssssssrssssrrnsrsrsrnnnnrninunrrtnnrnrnrnrnrnrrrrnrrrnrrererrrrens 206 12 5 4 Change the Task Status ccccccccccccecccscesecsrsssscscsssssscsrsssscscsssssscssessetssssesessesesessesetess 256 pA poe 8 99 10 gt arc ial z
235. h a dotted rectangle If the zoom is not active the dotted rectangle will be around the entire document 111 s WebCenter 25 00 When you are zooming in the document the navigator shows the highlight area as the zoomed area To pan the document hold the mouse and drag this selected rectangle around The central view port will display the area correspondingly Clicking outside the rectangle will move the rectangle to the clicked point and update the current visible area You can see the current zoom percentage at the slider bar located below the document thumbnail You can adjust the slider or click the or to adjust the zoom level Note By default this widget is available on the right sidebar You can drag this widget to the center or to the other sidebar 9 2 13 Info 112 This widget displays information about the document being viewed You can see the following info e the size of the active document e the resolution of the active document If you are in compare mode it will display the resolutions of the current and reference documents e the current viewing position in the document e the current selection within the document In this widget you can change the units for resolution and measurements To change click J and select your preferred units Note The changes made will be applied to all of the Viewer measurements for the current session e Offsets in Compare panel e Information Pop ups of all
236. have multiple versions By default you ll only see the latest version but you can go back to previous versions In addition there is an action history showing when versions are uploaded and what actions took place on these versions for example approval actions The viewer also allows comparing versions graphically 4 2 2 Document Types The following document types can be uploaded in WebCenter e Graphic file WebCenter supports most common graphic formats PDF PS EPS Al AP EPF DCS PSD CT LP TIF TIFF PAF GRS PNG and JPG will all be recognized After upload WebCenter will calculate preview data for the WebCenter Viewer If you don t want this you need to upload the graphic file as an other file type Typical examples are office based PDF files manuals quotes which are better viewed in Adobe Acrobat Note You can also upload a ZIP file containing graphic files a set of TIFF or LEN files or a PDF GRS or AP file with external images as a graphic file and view it directly in the Viewer e ArtiosCAD Native files of Esko ArtiosCAD The extension must be ARD ASD or MFG e Collada Collada is an interchange file format for interactive 3D applications Regular Collada files have DAE extension Zipped Collada files use ZAE e Cape Cape is a program to calculate pallets and truckloads WebCenter allows two ways to upload files from Cape e uploading a triplet of files You need at least 2 files the C
237. he Router This Router will check one or multiple project attributes to see whether they are filled out and in case it meets all the attributes it will continue to Conceptual Design Otherwise it will create a task of type Complete Briefing Data which will have an assignee to complete the task Once the briefing is complete the node moves to Conceptual Design General Info Specifications Checklist Status Documents Discussions Workflow Workflow Oo ta e Start Approval S Cycle Type Use defatlt app ON ora ara Briefing Conceptual Create Rendering Data Collector Set Stage Completed Complete Design Status Stage 2 Route on Project Atinbu Tag 1 Complete ws x Calculate on o Complexity Level Set Stage 1 Status Stage 1 At the Conceptual Design node the workflow will split into parallel paths generating two task automatically The tasks will be create rendering and calculate complexity level During this even if one of the task is completed the workflow moves to the Data Collector node it does not wait for the other task to complete The Data Collector node will wait for the two tasks to complete and then start the approval cycle This approval cycle uses a WebCenter approval setup typically the folder or project approval setup it can also copy one from another project Here the Start Approval Cycle may have lots of operations from different groups or assignees You can decide the next step b
238. he Cart The Cart lets you e mail or download multiple items at once You can add documents and projects to the Cart in the Project or the Document Actions menu l i E Welcome l The contents of the Cart the count is displayed next to the cart icon are retained only for the current login session by default Note Since 14 1 your Cart contents can be saved Your can disable the option Clear Cart on Logout in My Preferences to save the Cart contents for future sessions My Cart The Cart will be cleared on logout Change i Click Change in My Preferences to do this from your cart Note Downloading multiple documents at once or downloading projects requires having a decompression utility or operating system support for opening compressed archives Mac OS X Microsoft Windows XP and Microsoft Windows 2003 Server have built in support for opening compressed archives When e mailing an object from the Cart only a link to that object is placed in the body of the e mail message The recipient must have a username and password for your WebCenter site so he or she can log in to the site and see the object after clicking the link Shown below is a sample Cart AT ESKOS 48 My Cart Documents Actions ArtiosCAD Design 2 Lawn Seed Carton ARD 17 4KB o 44 GAELICGHOST ARD 34 8K8 Desktop Graphic 2 o wy Blairon Front Start al 20 3MB _ K 0 e candy front pdf 205 5KB rs Projects
239. he Task type Click Create New Task in the Tasks tab in your project Select the Task Type Choose a Status among the statuses available for that task type Select an Allowed Assignee a group or a role belonging to the Project or Template to restrict the task to that specific group or role Note Read in also Edit a Task Type on page 268 In the Assigned To field you can specify e the Allowed Assignee role or group e the members of the Allowed Assignee role or group e Nobody to leave the task unassigned Warning If you specify an Allowed Assignee and a select a different role group project member in the Assigned To field you will get an error while saving Click Create Your task is now restricted to the Allowed Assignee To change the Allowed Assignee click Edit Task link Select another role or group in the Task Information tab Note You need to be an admin user to be able to change the Allowed Assignee of the task 12 4 4 Reschedule a Set of Tasks Often an entire set of tasks must change its due date Some possible reasons are Oe e The project is delayed e The project needs to speed up e A set of tasks needs to happen earlier or later in the project e The entire set of tasks was copied from a template or another project and it needs to be shifted as a whole to be realistic for the current project WebCenter Note You cannot change the due date of completed tasks To reschedul
240. he approval cycle should take as a maximum Define the Lead Time in Days and or Hours It is added to the date the cycle starts to define the cycle s due date For example if the cycle starts on May 2nd and has a 2 days lead time it is due to be completed on May 4th WebCenter Attention WebCenter only takes week days into account So if you start the cycle on a Friday with a 3 day lead time it will be due the next Wednesday and not the next Monday e Choose Lead Time with Final Due Date to give your approvers a lead time and give a final due date for the approval cycle If the document has to be re uploaded and re approved it will be given the same lead time again The final version of the document has to be approved by the final due date Note The Fixed Due Date and Lead Time with Final Due Date options are only available when setting an approval cycle for a document not for a project or a folder Set Up Approval Notifications Notifications are electronic mail messages WebCenter sends to users involved in an approval cycle when certain approval events occur for example User Rejected Document or Approval Cycle Finished You can define which users will receive notifications and when Note The system administrator must configure WebCenter to send e mail for notifications to work Regardless of the e mail configuration the My Approvals section on the My Work page shows items waiting for approval 1 Choos
241. he new annotation will share the same annotation pop up You can connect many locations in the same image to one annotation this way Duplicate Annotations You can duplicate annotations that were created by you or another user To duplicate an annotation created by another user click on the Duplicate icon h e To duplicate your own annotation use More Actions gt Duplicate Annotation in the Annotation Pop up on page 130 The annotation and any linked annotations from which you duplicated will be made into a new annotation thread with your name as the author and the current time The text will be duplicated as well The color of the duplicated annotation will be the your default color for that annotation type Delete Annotations You can delete your own annotations using the delete key You cannot delete replies to your annotations this way You can also delete annotations using Annotation List gt More actions gt Delete Annotation From the Annotation Pop up on page 130 use More actions gt Delete annotation You have to confirm the deletion when you are deleting an annotation However if you are deleting replies a confirmation is not required save Annotations Your annotations and changes to annotations are not automatically saved to the server If you e create a new annotation e add edit a reply 133 ESKO secon 134 e move the pop up e pin unpin pop up e change the annotation color e seta review sta
242. he project status index same statuses have the same number in all projects The small red vertical line indicates the project due date if set You can hover over any of the status blocks to get more information name of the status start and end date status type calculated delay Dec 31 201 Stua Approval 3 Started Dec 14 2012 Estimated jan ii 2003 Belay days 16 Using the Calendar View with Predictions In order to use this feature your projects must have tasks setting project statuses Therefore this prediction is only available if the user has the task management license When no tasks changing project statuses are found in your projects this view will be identical to the basic view When such tasks are there The first part of the project line till today works as in the basic view The second part after today shows a prediction of the project based on the project tasks rescheduled based on their current status The estimated due date is based on the task predecessors task due date and lead time See Task scheduling function spec for more details A lighter version of the project status color is used to draw this part of the bar For each project status it will look for a task completing this project status Then it will determine from predecessor logic which tasks need to be completed to complete this task and how much time this will take in total For not started statuses thi
243. hen assiging to a Group Role Group User Assignee Invite Group Actions _REQUESTOR Please select or start typing wv Jensen Kim KSJ once AGENCY Please select or start typing v skva SKVA v Ow AGENT Please select or start typing v Beckner Brieann BIBE v APM Please select or start typing wv Please select or start typing v 99 APPROVER S Please select or start typing wv Please select or start typing v Ow Change Cancel Removing a Role Assignment Each Role assignment is represented as a separate project member on the Members page It can be deleted from the project by uninviting it as in the case of removing a project member You can also remove the existing role assignments from the Manage Roles page Removing a Role from a Project You can remove a Role from a project in the same way as removing a User or Group By deleting the entry for the User or Group with the Role combination you can remove the Roles Note When you have Roles assigned to Users or Groups you have to delete the assignments assigned regular members before being able to uninvite the Roles from the project 1 Login as a Project Manger 2 Open the Project from which you want to remove Roles 219 my ESKO WebCerter 220 Click Members A list of the current members is shown If desired use the filter to refine the list Select the Roles which need to be uninvited from the Project Select the
244. i If the CAD reference is stored via a Document Reference Attribute the user can alter and save the CAD Overlay settings to the graphical document When a graphics document is opened with the CAD REFERENCE attribute you can Save the alignment changes made in the viewer Note You need the rights to change a document attribute to get the option The administrator has to enable Document gt Security Change properties option for you The Save option is enabled when e you change the alignment For example new offset values e you select a new CAD overlay 161 ESKOS 162 WebCenter If you select another CAD file as the overlay the previous file with link icon is deleted from the document selector You will see the new overlay in the selector with an active link The new orientation and offset will be saved to the CAD REFERENCE attribute of the graphical file CAD Overlay Boxes002 ard Project HTMLS Viewer 14 1 update ee barandbraille pdf Orientation 5 Fal Alignment ba k T Offset Y 34 99 203 25 mm To remove the CAD link from the graphics file click Turn off CAD Overlay in the CAD Overlay selector and Save Read also e Aligning CAD overlay and Graphics on page 162 e Viewing 3D in the HTML5 Collada Viewer on page 164 Aligning CAD overlay and Graphics e To open multiple documents both Graphical and CAD select them and click Actions gt View and Annotate You will see a graphi
245. ications e To edit a specification click Task Types gt Specifications Click the name of the specification and edit it as desired e To delete a specification click Task Types gt Specifications Select the specifications you want to delete and click Delete in the Actions menu 12 9 9 Document Reference Task Specification You can use a Document Reference Attribute as a specification to refer to a document that is located within another project or a document library You can add documents to tasks this way as references instead of copying them When you create such a task specification select the specification type as document reference Note You can use your document reference attributes as task specifications if you have checked Attribute is also a task specification Read more in e Document References e Create a Document Reference Attribute e Edit a Document Reference Attribute 12 10 Setting Up Task Notifications O74 The biggest aim of Task Management is to make tasks happen at the right time As with most production processes packaging production is a complex process with both sequential and parallel operations The critical path is the set of dependent operations defining the total duration of the Project At each moment only one task is on the critical path and any delay on that task delays the entire Project Often people performing critical tasks are not even aware of the critical nature of their work Theref
246. igate view and compare your artwork and design files In the Viewer Window you can quickly scan for information regarding the active document For example you can view the document size resolution and the axes in the nfo widget inspect the document using the top tools and the Navigator widget The channels of the document will be visible in the Channels widget compare the document to a reference selected via the Document select widget browse and inspect individual pages of your Page List using the Page List widget view the approval details of your document approve or reject your document view CAD design and CAD layout files You can see the available layers in the CAD widget WebCenter e view the annotations and comment on them You can also annotate on your documents e view compare annotate and approve Page Lists and multi page documents e view CAD Overlay referred in Graphics e view document attributes and document reference attributes edit and save them e open the HIML5 Collada Viewer to view documents in 3D Viewing 3D in the HTML5 Collada Viewer on page 164 Project ED Document Sample014 pdf Version 1 4y User ADMIN ADMIN S o ft dled lt QaqQqqay er CF ih BA ag eo se oO Navigation Orientation Measure 3D Annotation im Document Select g CAD Overlay toothpaste ard Project Team Neptune S amp T 52 p eo Sample014 pdf Orientation i Fa i Alinnment x a Attributes
247. igned to other Project Managers as long as the current Project Manager is not an Approver in ongoing Approval Cycles in that Project Log in as a project manager Open the project Click General Information A O N Click Manager WebCenter performs a dependencies check for the current Project Manager being an Approver on ongoing Approval Cycles If it finds any click OK stop the Approval Cycle s and retry changing the Project Manager 5 Assuming there are no dependencies filter or click Go to generate a list of Project Managers This list can also include user groups 6 Click the name of the new Project Manager or group and click Finish The new Project Manager s name will appear on the General Project Information page To reassign more than one Project to another Project Manager generate a list of projects either by searching or by using an item on the main Projects menu and then click Change Manager in the Actions menu Filter or click Go to show the list of Project Managers select the desired Project Manager and click Finish Admins can change Project Managers for more than one project at a time using the Projects menu in Project Management on the Admin menu While they can select projects with different Project Managers they may only assign all the projects to one Project Manager 11 9 Create a User 244 Attention As a Project Manager you can only create other users if the Admin granted you the
248. ignment tool to align the CAD overlay on graphics correctly a ae a Click on the Anchor Point Alignment tool The Viewer will transform to the anchor point alignment mode You can access the navigation and orientation tools in the top panel 163 ESKOS Project ViewerSamples Document FireWorx_COMPARE pdf Version 1 lt User ADMIN ADMIN oO TA ajajajaja o er Navigation Orientation Anchor Point Alignment Select your anchor points in the Graphics left and the CAD middle Documents AC Cancel ur oar rows to fine tune Click Align Use your keyboard Note The active anchor can be recognized by the crosshair icon b Select the anchor points in the Graphics and CAD documents Use the arrow keys to fine tune your anchor points You can also drag the selected point to a new location c Click Align You can change the values in the Offset X Y fields to be precise Note If you are aligning two graphics files the offset will be the distance between the current and the reference according to the graphics coordinate system positive horizontal is set to the right and positive vertical is pointing downwards For CAD overlay and graphics the offset is taken as the distance between the CAD overlay and the graphics page using the CAD coordinate system positive vertical pointing downwards While aligning two CAD files the offset is the distance between the reference and the current document page in that orde
249. iles When you do a specific corner alignment after clicking this option the trim box alignment will be remembered You can specify numbers in the Offset X and Y fields This offset is added to the corner alignment Note If you are aligning two graphics files the offset will be the distance between the current and the reference according to the graphics coordinate system positive horizontal is set to the right and positive vertical is pointing downwards For CAD overlay and graphics the offset is taken as the distance between the CAD overlay and the graphics page using the CAD coordinate system positive vertical pointing downwards While aligning two CAD files the offset is the distance between the reference and the current document page in that order according to the CAD coordinate system Aligning CAD files To open multiple CAD documents select them and click Actions gt Compare in Viewer The documents will open in the compare mode Read details in Compare Documents in the Viewer on page 141 A Use the Rotate Reference tool to rotate it with respect to the current document Mirror Reference Image will flip your reference from the centre of the view with respect to the current document Use the anchor point alignment tool to align twoCAD files correctly a Click on the Anchor Point Alignment a tool 149 ESKO sesame 150 The Viewer will transform to the anchor point alignment mode You can a
250. in the dialog This indicates that the corresponding channel copies the definition of the highlighted one Matched Channels Channels Current Current Reference Channels Referene MB anva 250 c Mic Bic Wi ss3 BB anva Ny My W 546 H s77 x _ weiss I artios Crease Om om BB artios cut WB Eoi Highlighted channels indicate which channel definition will be used for Cancel REEVE ME EE compere Click Save Channel Matching After saving the modified channel is marked with an asterisk next to the name 143 s WebCenter Matched Channels Current Reference Mic Mic Wy E y i i ft Em WB cut WB curt Highlighted channels indicate which channel definition will be used for compare Note Channels displayed in bold in the matched columns cannot be unmatched If you manually move the channels from the matched lists to the unmatched lists the channel definitions are reset Using Orientation Tools while Comparing Use the Orientation tools to rotate mirror or invert the reference document version relatively to the current document version View Both Side by Side Current PE_linked_O_180_front pdf Project HTMLS Viewer 14 1 update Compare to a PE_linked_0 90_back pdf ns Project HTMLS Viewer 14 1 update Channel Matching ray Orientation and Alignment Orientation 5 F Th Alignment Ti pi HEE Tr Offset X Y 0 00 0 00 mm CAD Overlay Click to select a CAD overlay
251. ined preferences to one or several users 1 In the My WebCenter menu click My Users This shows all the users you have created Select the user s whose preferences you want to change and select Apply Preferences in the Actions menu Inthe Apply Preferences popup select the preferences to change and deselect the preferences to keep Other Preferences are the user preferences not mentioned above for example show thumbnails or not search results layout etc Select who you want to copy the preferences from in Take Preferences From select another of your users or select Default to use the default settings for the preferences you selected Click OK WebCenter 12 Task Management in WebCenter Task management adds a complete time perspective to your Projects WebCenter facilitates timeliness by adding extensive notifications on the tasks The task searching and overview pages facilitate follow up finding critical and overdue tasks and creating reports Task Management allows adding tasks to WebCenter Projects and assigning these tasks to Project members Tasks have due dates start dates and estimated dates Tasks also have a specification and a checklist In addition you can link documents with tasks and organize a discussion forum around a task Finally tasks have statuses Note Task Management is an optional feature of WebCenter If you did not purchase the Task Management license you won
252. ing a new version does not make any changes to the document In order to change it you must lock it download it change it as desired and upload it as a new version My Users In case you are a project manager with Create User Right you can see the users that you have created on this page My Group s Tasks In case you are the Group Task Manager for one or more groups you can find the tasks assigned to your group s on this page My Group s Members If you are a Group Manager of a specific Group or multiple Groups you can use My Group s Members to manage your Group members Note The administrator has to give you the Group Manager permission to access the Group members e If you are the Group Manager for more than one group specify the group by the Group Name This will allow you to see the members of the selected group e From this page you can e remove users from the members of the group 45 ESKO secon Note The group manager cannot remove himself herself from the list Remember If there are dependencies such as a pending approval associated with the member being removed the removal will not be effective You will be warned about those dependencies during your attempt to remove a member e add users to the group Your permissions and visibility determine the potential users whom you can add as the group members If you area e Project Manager your Visibility settings affect whom you can add as membe
253. inistrator To create a task type do the following 1 Click Task Types in the main menu bar You will get an overview of the existing task types Note If you cannot see Task Types in the main menu bar you either do not have the User Can Create Task Type permission set on your user profile or you do not have the task management license 2 Click Add Task Type This brings you to a wizard 3 Enter a Name and an optional Description and Estimated Duration Then click Continue The Estimated Duration is used to calculate defaults for dates We advise to only use the Estimated Durations for tasks that really have a typical duration overnight shipping die creation 4 Optionally add Checklist items and click Continue Checklist items can be things you want the operator to check off before marking the task as completed Another typical usage is to list subtasks 203 rm ESKO WebCenter Checklist items have no due dates but the system does track the day and user that checked off the checklist item in this way enforcing responsibility e f you select Finish task if all steps from checklist are completed it will be impossible to complete a task of this type without having checked off all the checklist items e You can also decide that Only a task assignee can check off checklist items Note You can create an empty checklist with no checklist item but in this case do not select Finish task if all steps from checklist ar
254. its name it will be handled by your browser s default method for files of that type 4 2 Add Documents One of the main functions of WebCenter is sharing documents between project members in a safe and traceable way 4 2 1 How Documents are Organized Any document in WebCenter sits in at least one project The same document can however be in different projects at once so called linked documents Linked documents are only interesting if the same design needs to be re used and synchronized between projects If synchronization is not needed it s better to copy the document and each of the documents gets a separate life in WebCenter The vast majority of documents sit in just one project Projects are organized in folders Documents are put into a folder or on the root folder of the project Note Currently WebCenter only allows going one level deep In most circumstances this is not a real limitation unless you try putting too many documents into the same project WebCenter is well equipped to work with extreme amounts of projects so it s better taking advantage of this than creating projects with entire sub projects put into a folder structure AQ ESKO sesame Note Document names within a project are unique When trying to upload a second document with the same name in a different folder of the same project you will get an error message WebCenter is fully version enabled This means that each document can
255. its number in the Version column on the Action History page for that document 4 3 Delete the Last Version of a Document You can delete the last version of a multi version document if you are the Project Manager for the project containing that document an Admin or a project member with the Delete permission the project containing the document is active the document is not checked out by another user On the Document Details page click More Actions then Delete Version Confirm your choice by clicking OK Note lf that document version is in a running approval cycle WebCenter will show this message There ica LUnMINGg approval eye le on this cdocumen version Are you sure you want to delete this document version Clicking OK stops the approval cycle for that document version If the document came from Automation Engine the Pilot will indicate the deletion 59 ESKO aa Note If the deleted document version was linked in other projects the link is updated to link to the previous document version 4 3 8 Update a Document across Projects If you have a document that is linked in many Projects and upload a new version into only one Project the links in other Projects continue to reference the prior version Note Project Managers may update entire Projects at once not just the contents of a single folder To update a document in a Project to ensure it references the latest version do the following
256. ject Manager or the Workflow Master is role group it follows the Assign To settings lf your Assign To field settings create multiple tasks the workflow will wait until all of these tasks are finished to progress to the next step 13 WebCenter Specifications lab Use this tab to set the values for the task specifications These values can be either fixed values or selected using the SmartNames Languages English Number Number Numbers 3 Numbers Copy ProjectPrefix Document name Rich Text Text Project Name Volume cu ft cu m Volume cu ft cu m Project Volume quin qu oam Volume cu in cu om Document Volume cu in cu dm Weight lbs qr Weight lbs kg Note lf you want to see the specifications in the specifications tab you should add them in the task type before you drag the node on the canvas Output Tab Specify the output documents in this tab The fields on the Output tab are e All task documents Output all the documents that are attached Only new task documents This excludes all the task documents and the documents that were previously available This results in the new task documents Note If there are new versions these are also considered as new documents No documents Set no documents as output of the task Filter the output document by name or document extension For example _1 pdf files 309 13 WebCenter Add as output all
257. jects click the column header of the field on which you want to sort For example click the Created column header to sort on project creation date This preference is saved in your profile so it will become your new default sort option e To view a project click its name e Add to Favorites adds the selected projects to your list of Favorite Projects e The Cart lets you download multiple projects or documents at once and also lets you e mail links to projects and documents The recipients must have user names and passwords for your WebCenter site in order to view the information when they click a link The Cart retains its contents only until you close the browser window or until you log off e Update Project s checks the version of each visible document in the selected projects and updates each document to its latest version if needed 3 3 3 Task Types You will only see this menu if you have the Task Management license See Task Management in WebCenter on page 247 for more information 3 3 4 Search Searching Content in WebCenter When searching for projects or documents you can use normal searching or keyword searching 17 ESKO aa 18 The normal method searches more fields than keyword searching but keyword searching may be more useful when you know less about the desired results Both are accessed by clicking Search in the main menu Tip Keyword searching is also available in the header of every WebCenter page a
258. k Start and wait for the action to complete The dialog will indicate which projects were successfully modified It will also list all of the problems 7 Click Close to update your search results Keyword Searching 1 In the Search menu click Projects Documents or Tasks depending on what you want to search 2 When using keyword searching you see the Keyword Search field When using normal searching you see multiple fields to fill in 3 ESKOS To switch from normal to keyword searching click the Keyword Search link 3 Enter the terms to search for in the Keyword Search field 4 You can also e clear the field click Clear this form e save the search query for future use See Jo Save a Search on page 24 5 Click Search to search using the keyword s you entered Note WebCenter e For keyword search of projects WebCenter searches the project name project description project characteristics the modification date and text attributes e For keyword search of documents WebCenter searches the document name document description document characteristics project names Approval status and text attributes The Search Results page shows your results You can view your results in a list or a grid and choose to view the thumbnails or not Note Search results display only projects or documents for which you have View permission Search Strings Examples Shown below are different search phrases and thei
259. kflow Folder Advanced and select a workflow folder from the Configuration list This will turn the folder into to a Push Through Folder A workflow folder automatically copies the files uploaded into it to another folder on the same or another server 206 WelbCenter Typically this other folder is a hot folder for a workflow application such as BackStage Automation Engine Nexus or Odystar e Click Specify New Thumbnail to use a custom thumbnail for the folder Enter the complete path and filename in the associated field or Browse for it To use the default thumbnail leave that choice selected 7 Click Create The folder is created 11 1 6 About Workflow Folders What is a workflow folder When creating a folder the Project Manager can define it as a workflow folder using a push through configuration defined by the Admin Any file that is uploaded into this folder will be automatically copied to a location defined in the configuration For this reason workflow folders are sometimes also referred to as push through folders Workflow folders are particularly useful when that other location is a hot folder of a workflow system such as Nexus Automation Engine or Odystar so that the file will automatically be processed by the workflow system Note The Configuration for workflow folders needs to be defined by an Administrator Project Managers can then select one of the defined configurations when they create a n
260. kflow task so not all sia in wi niet on oo i specifications in the system taken earlier in the workflow and saved in the workflow s task specifications Note For example you can use Set Workflow If you want to see the specifications you Specification node first to set the specification should add them in the task type values and use them in the Router later on in the workflow 13 7 4 Statuses Use statuses node to give the workflow task in the project the desired status The workflow task can have any of the statuses defined in the Task Type it was created from This means that you need to 1 think about which statuses you need before creating the workflow 2 ask your Administrator to create them if they don t exist in the system yet 3 add them to the Task Type you want to create the workflow from see Add Task Statuses on page 266 4 then create your workflow If you didn t add any particular status to the Task Type the workflow will only have the Completed status node 13 8 Workflow Example In the example below the workflow will start at the Start node and follow the green arrow to Briefing Complete Router 324 13 WebCenter General Info Specifications Checklist Status Documents Discussions Workflow Workflow O Complete Creative Brief gt briefing complete Completed The workflow assumes that the briefing is completed via project attributes which are set using t
261. l normally send a notification to the Project Manager or task owner Started date The date and time when the task changed status from Created to In Progress Assigned To Tasks are assigned to project members You can assign a task to one project member only one user or one role or group You can also assign any task to yourself which provides a way of notifying the other project members that you will take responsibility for this task Tasks can change assignees during their life cycle in this way handing over the task or responsibility from one person to another Allowed Assignee You can enable a setting to restrict the task assignment to a Role Group that is specified in a Project or Project Template You can then create a task from this task type with an Allowed Assignee setting This will restrict the task assignee to the Role or Group Note This feature is restricted to administrator users 12 3 Getting started with Tasks 12 3 1 Create a Simple Task The system comes with only one task type built in Simple Task This is a task with no document no specification no checklist and no estimated duration Use the Simple Task type to experiment with creating tasks before figuring out how to make task types Listed below is a procedure for getting started 1 Open a project or create one and click Tasks Note If you don t have a Tasks tab you probably do not have the Task Management license If this is a fresh proje
262. l the tasks which are overdue for less than five days Filtering Based on Sort by Using Sort by the Group Manager can view tasks for a selected group in ascending or descending order For example in Sort by if Due Date is selected then the tasks for the selected group appears with the earliest due date Similarly if Due Date Reversed option is selected then the tasks for the selected group appears with the latest due date 1 l Note Ensure to log in as Group Manager The task list for assigned group appears Note If a Group Manager manages multiple groups WebCenter displays the list of managed groups You can only view the tasks for one group at a time Inthe Sort by drop down list select the desired option The tasks list appears as per the option selected in Sort by The Sort by option is indicated by an arrow For example if Due Date is selected then it would appear as pue Date Sep 7 2011 The size arrow can also be used for sorting 12 7 Sequential Tasks What is a sequential task Tasks can be made dependent on each other You can define predecessors for a task which automatically chains tasks to each other 260 WebCenter For example if you create a Review the final design proposal task for a member and then add a second task called Implement design corrections that has the Review task as a predecessor you can make sure that the Implement design corrections
263. lected pages in one go by specifying them e asa page range e or separated by commas e Selected Pages All Remaining Pages Approved Pages Marked Pages No Marked Pages Selected Pages All Remaining Pages Set Approval Condition eee Cancel If you are clicking on the Approval tools from an Approved Rejected page you will get an option to approve reject all the remaining pages a Optionally approving or force approving the set a condition for your approval if the page s approval cycle allows this See Allow Conditional Approval or Not on page 229 select Set approval condition and type your condition in the box rejecting or force rejecting the page s type a reason for your rejection in the box commenting the page s type your comment in the box 158 WebCenter b Enter your password if your WebCenter server requires it c Click the Commit button Marking Pages in a Page List When you need to approve pages of a page list you can first open it in the Viewer to inspect You can then mark the pages ready to be approved rejected or commented This allows you to do bulk approval actions on marked pages Note You cannot mark pages in a multi page document Select the page you want to mark and click on the 1 Mark button from the Page list tools to mark the active page For more options right click e Mark e Mark all pages e Clear marks on all pages e You can also right click
264. led for your User account You may modify configuration details of the Single Sign On Instance depending on your permissions to do so If you have permission to modify all your values will be saved Note User specific settings are possible when the Single Sign On Instance supports user specific configuration My Preferences In My Preferences you set the unit system used to display data the language used the display of thumbnails your start page and the grid size for search results for Esko ArtiosCAD and Graphics documents and discussions General e Language sets the language used by the user interface e Start Page sets the page that appears when you log on e Units sets units for all measurements to either Metric mm cm dm m or Imperial in ft yd e Thumbnails selecting Show thumbnails shows thumbnails in document lists by default 39 ESKO secon AO Cart Clear cart on Logout is always enabled by default Disable this option if you want to access cart contents in future sessions Your Browser Timezone shows the timezone used by your browser and WebCenter Project Lists Show rows sets the number of projects displayed in the List layout Document Lists Default Layout sets the default view for document lists Grid or List layout Show in Grid sets the number of documents displayed on a single page in the Grid layout defined as a number of Columns and Rows in the grid Show in List sets the num
265. lete the no match rule WebCenter Routing on Project Field Route based on Project Field Route based on Project Field m Field Project Name r Case sensitive Project Field Route to no match Error Decide which part of the workflow to follow based on naming conventions of the project name Project Name Project Description Project Manager Sales Person Note Use SmartNames to make the rules Customer Name dynamic Customer Location ns Routing on Project Status Route based on Project Status Project Status Route to Add is 1 1 PCOLLECT approve release complete 1 1 PCOLLECT approve release complet no match amp Error wal When a workflow comes in a router checking on project status the status of the project in which the workflow runs is checked at that moment and matched against the values in the rule list Project Status assign a different path depending on the status For example Design versus Correction Choose from e All project statuses Select from the drop down containing all the statuses including the custom ones 319 Ky ESKO WebCerter 320 Routing on Project Attribute Route based on Project Attribute r Attribute 00 Brief Revisions Case sensitive Project Attribute contains no match Routing on attribute values When you configure the routing based on the attribute values the behavior depends on the att
266. life business process as closely as possible Note You need the Change Approval permission to create or edit an approval setup To get to the staged approval setup page for a project a folder or a document 1 Go to the Approval tab a project the project page s Approval tab Tip lf your project has sub folders go to the project page s Documents tab first and click the top level folder at left called Project Documents This ensures you have selected the project and not one of its Sub folders a folder the folder you want to define approval settings for on the project page s Documents tab Then click the Approval tab a document the Document Details page s Approval tab 231 1 1 WebCenter You can also get to the Approval tab by e clicking Setup document approval right after uploading the document to the project clicking the Setup Approval Cycle link corresponding to the document on the project s Documents tab several documents Actions gt Setup Approval Cycle after selecting the documents in the project or folder 2 Click Setup Staged Approval Note e You can only set up an approval cycle for a project folder document that does not already have a Started approval cycle e You can also convert a simple approval to a staged approval click Convert to Staged Approval on the simple approval setup page set the Approval Due Date For astaged approval you can set
267. lish Imposition on WebCenter Chain ticket Note In addition the following requirements apply e You need to have the appropriate licenses e WebCenter and Automation Engine must be in the same LAN 7 6 2 Upload an Imposition as a Page List from Automation Engine Only Fastimpose impositions are recognized as Page Lists in WebCenter Multi page files uploaded from within WebCenter except multi page PDFs uploaded specifically as a page list or from Odystar Nexus or even other Automation Engine documents will never be treated as Page Lists Instead they are considered regular multi page PDF documents Proceed as follows to upload an imposition file as a Page List from Automation Engine 10 or 12 to WebCenter 1 Start the Automation Engine Pilot and log on to the production server 2 Browse to the FastIlmpose imposition file imp you want to upload or create a new imposition in the Pilot 3 Right click the imposition and select New Task gt Publish Imposition on WebCenter Chain lf the Publish Imposition on WebCenter Chain task does not appear in the context menu choose More Tickets and select the task in the Select Ticket dialog 4 Modify the settings for the Publish Imposition on WebCenter ticket the first ticket in the chain if needed 5 Modify the settings for the Send Book to WebCenter ticket the second ticket in the chain a On the Destination tab select the WebCenter Site from the list b Enter the Project
268. list In the example below the role is called Agency and the list shows all groups starting with Agency followed by a space Members Project Group Approver Task Assignee Invite Group AGENCY f AGENCY Group has no users AGENCY ABC Invite Men AGENCY DEF AGENCY GHI on Coal If no group matches the filter you will see the whole list of groups e To assign a role to an individual user 1 Leave Select Group in the Group list 2 Select the individual user in the User Assignee list 3 Make sure Invite Group is deselected e To assign a role to a group with a specific user as assignee 1 Select a Group in the Group list 2 Select the individual user that you want to be the assignee in the User Assignee list 3 Make sure the Invite Group checkbox is enabled e To assign several users and groups to the same role this option may be enabled disabled in the parent project or template 1 Select a user or group assignee you want to assign to the role 2 In the Actions column click the icon to add another row for this role 3 You can now assign the same role to multiple users and or groups using the every time you need to add a row and using icon to remove a row Note You can also assign roles later if you don t have the user information ready Define Project Attributes e If the template has attributes defined you copied attributes from the existing project you can still edit them if
269. ll have to evaluate it again e Approval Continues to keep all the approval actions already done Only people who have rejected the document will see it again to check whether the reason for their rejection was corrected Set the Approval Master e Choose the Approval Master This can be e Me the person currently editing the approval setup e the Project Manager e the document Uploader e any project member with View access to the document users groups and roles The approval master is the person who gets the approval follow up under Approvals to Follow Up on his My Work page Set Up Approval Notifications Notifications are electronic mail messages WebCenter sends to users involved in an approval cycle when certain approval events occur for example User Rejected Document or Approval Cycle Finished You can define which users will receive notifications and when 234 Note WebCenter The system administrator must configure WebCenter to send e mail for notifications to work Regardless of the e mail configuration the My Approvals section on the My Work page shows items waiting for approval 1 Choose the type of E mail Notifications to use e No Notifications if you don t want to notify any user of the progress of the approval cycle e Default Notifications if you want to use the project s or the folder s notifications if the document is in a folder with notifications defined they will be used otherwise th
270. lly 11 5 4 Require Review State on all Annotations 230 In the approval Setup you can set up a mandatory review on all annotations using the Require review state on all annotations before approving or rejecting option This forces all approvers to review annotations before submitting an approval status Note This only applies to viewable documents e Select No if you want all approvers to submit their Approval Status without the condition of reviewing the annotations This is the default setting e Select Any Viewer when you want to enforce that all annotations should be reviewed by at least one person before submitting the Approval status A warning message will appear when the Approver tries to submit the Approval status for the document containing unreviewed annotations e Select Current Reviewer when the Approver needs to review all annotations before submitting an Approval status A warning message will appear when the Approver tries to submit the Approval status for the document containing annotations he did not review WelbCenter Note e The review status None will not be accepted as a valid review state e This setting is relevant while submitting an Approval Status from the Viewer and the other WebCenter pages 11 5 5 Setting Up a Staged Approval Cycle WebCenter enables you to define a number of approval settings who approves the document when what happens when the document is rejected etc to match your real
271. lt approval settings for that document Start Default Approval Cycle Those are the enclosing folder s approval settings if the document is in a folder with approval settings or otherwise the project s approval settings if they are defined Exceptions URL documents may not have approval cycles An approval cycle may not be started on documents in Templates An approval cycle may not be started on linked documents Permissions Needed You need the Change Approval permission to create or edit an approval setup You need the Start Stop Approval permission to start or stop approval cycles This is the same as the Lock Update permission The project manager and the administrator can always define edit the approval settings at the project folder and document level For more information about permissions see Project and Document Security on page 241 11 5 1 Simple Approval and Staged Approval What is Simple Approval When a person or a number of people need to approve your document s in no particular order you can use simple approval All approvers are notified at the same time and get the same due date if a due date is defined 224 WelbCenter When your document s need s to be approved by several people or groups of people in a sequential order you can use staged approval What is Staged Approval The staged approval cycle works with approval stages and each stage only starts when the previous stage is
272. lumn header of the field on which you want to sort For example click the Created column header to sort on project creation date This preference is saved in your profile so it will become your new default sort option e To view a project click its name e Add to Favorites adds the selected projects to your list of Favorite Projects e The Cart lets you download multiple projects or documents at once and also lets you e mail links to projects and documents The recipients must have user names and passwords for your WebCenter site in order to view the information when they click a link The Cart retains its contents only until you close the browser window or until you log off e Update Project s checks the version of each visible document in the selected projects and updates each document to its latest version if needed To remove a project from the Favorite Projects list select it and click Remove from Favorites in the Actions menu Projects Manage Projects Manage shows those projects for which you are the Project Manager or which are managed by a group of which you are a member It only appears in the menu if you are a Project Manager either individually or through your group memberships In the Actions menu are Delete Update Project s Add to Favorites Add to Cart and Change Manager 3 WebCenter e Filter the list of projects by entering a filter in the Show Projects field or by changing the value in the Modified li
273. mber of the Admins group can delete a message in a discussion The first message in a discussion thread may not be deleted because it defines the discussion a fh O N Go to the project or document containing the desired discussion Click Discussions Click the title of the discussion to view The discussion opens Click Delete in the header of the message to delete Click OK to confirm the deletion The message is deleted 6 Delete a Discussion 198 Note Project and document discussions may only be deleted by the Project Manager or a member of the Admins group aha N Go to the project or document containing the desired discussion Click Discussions to see a list of available discussions Click the checkbox for each discussion to delete Click Delete in the Actions menu Click OK to confirm the deletion WelbCenter 11 Project Management in VWebCenter Users designated as Project Managers in their profile have a Projects Manage link on their Projects menu In these projects they have access to a number of additional features that allow them to manage the projects Project Managers can Create projects either blank or from a Template Invite members to the project and uninvite them Create project folders and add documents Set Characteristics and Attributes on the project and its documents Forcibly Accept or Reject documents requiring Approval Set the security on the project Ma
274. measurement tools and Caliper tools WebCenter The changes made from the info widget are applied only to your current session The next time you start the Viewer the units will be reset to the WebCenter User settings Note 5 2 14 View This widget contains advanced tools for view manipulation such as e changing the background color of the image or window e viewing from the back side e highlighting overprint with colours e viewing or hiding the trimbox margins and clipping to trim box e viewing in inverse colors e compensate distortion and scaling while viewing Change Background Color of the Image or Window You can use this tool to manipulate the view with a different background color other than white This is especially useful when you are evaluating an image that will be printed in a colored background When you click on the Change Background mj tool you will get an additional row of tools in the View widget e Change Image Background Color When you activate this option you will get a color picker Select the image background color and click the O to return Tip You can also click outside of this color picker to close the color picker and inspect the image with the new background e Change Window Background Color E Select your color as described above and inspect the image with the new window color J Change Both Image and Window Background Color When you activate this option you will get a color
275. ml file with a specified format e optionally other assets such as backgrounds Note WebCenter supports having a preview embedded in the archive file and extracting this automatically as a default thumbnail 8 2 Creating and Exporting SD Files You can create Collada files from Studio Visualizer and or ArtiosCAD 8 2 1 In Visualizer 184 Studio Visualizer can build 3D models based on the following structural design file formats e ArtiosCAD ard files e Studio Toolkit for Flexibles bag files for flexible packaging such as bags and wrappers e Score vim files e Collada zae archives with arbitrary 3D shapes with printable areas defined if supplied by Esko products Collada archives created by non Esko products can be used in Studio Visualizer but will not have a printable area 1 Open the artwork in Illustrator ArtPro or PackEdge 2 Place and align the structural design file WebCenter Ee 3 Then choose Open in Visualizer from the File menu 4 Set the Substrate material 5 Edit your design as necessary e add process and or spot colors e add special finishes e add an environment background 6 Export your 3D design to a Zipped Collada zae file using the Export 3D file for Viewing option You can choose to Create a preview image file alongside the Collada file This will be a jpeg thumbnail image Note If your model includes graphics saving to zae and not dae ensures you have everythi
276. move a document click the minus sign after it If you want to use the default approval settings of the project folder for these documents select Apply Default Approval Settings they will not be applied to document URLs WebCenter Note You can also e Set the approval Due Date only if you have the Change Approval Setup permissions enter a date or pick one in the calendar then choose an hour e Start the approval cycle You cannot setup document specific approval settings for several documents at once 7 Click the Upload button Note When you try uploading a document which already exists in the project the upload of this document will fail You won t get anew version Use Upload new version instead no multi document support Upload Multiole Documents via the Upload Applet 1 Go to the project folder you want to upload the document into and click the Upload Multiple Documents button You can also 1 Click the Upload menu from anywhere 2 On the Upload page select the Project and Folder you will upload the document into 3 Click the Upload Multiple Documents link A Java applet loads The first time this can take a while and you might be asked to trust the creator of this applet The applet shows an empty list of files that will be uploaded 2 Click Add and browse for documents Tip You can also drag and drop from any file browser into the applet window You can do this several times and add multipl
277. n page e For overriding the copy document settings enable Copy Documents when Synchronizing and select the specific setting e Only Documents in Folders Select this to specify one or more folders in this editable field Use as the separator Only the documents in the specified folders will be synchronized 301 13 ESKO WebCerter 302 Note e fone of the specified folders does not exist in the project the node will skip the workflow synchronization e To specify the root leave the field empty or as root e You may also specify the folders using wildcards For example A will match the folders A ABC and Amadeus e Only Approved Documents Use this setting to synchronise only the approved documents e Only Documents matching Type in the names of the specific documents that you want to synchronise This field accepts wild cards Specify the WebCenter project attributes that should be synchronized as Job Parameters in Automation Engine Configure the settings in the Job Parameters tab Push All default All the project attributes from the project attribute category are pushed as job parameters Push None for not pushing any project attributes to Automation Engine Push Custom List When you select this you have options to Add All attributes to the list in one go With this you can add all the attributes and then remove the attributes you do not want to push Add project attributes one by one f
278. n the installed ArtiosCAD Enterprise Edition directly from WebCenter The documents will open in the managed mode allowing you to make modifications to the file and update it without having to browse to the corresponding project and folder Note This option is only supported from ArtiosCAD Enterprise 14 onwards WebCenter e Allow raising Document Revision when uploading a new Document Version Enable this to allow the users to raise the revision while uploading a new document version Document Upload Preferences My Work Setup This is where you can customize your My Work page To do this select from the Available Sections and add them to the Left Column or Right Column of your My Work page You can also Show a simplified My Work page with no links to projects or documents Click Save when you are done My Locked Documents My Locked Documents shows documents you have locked to indicate that you are currently working on them If other users try to download a locked document they will have to confirm that they really want to download a locked document Note In order to lock a document you need specific permissions Only the person who locked it or the Project Manager or a member of the Admins group can unlock a locked document To unlock a locked document select the checkbox to the left of its name and click Unlock checked items Uploading a new version of the document also unlocks it Unlocking a document without upload
279. n this named tag and then route it through the outgoing Select tube Zor 13 ESKO 288 Router Lis Router Select Document Document Select Children Document Reference Select Children Document Reference Select Parent Document Reference Select Parert Document Reference Send Notification a o Send notification Set Document Attribute Bo Set Document Attribute WebCenter Use the Router to build a rule list to meet a result these rules are evaluated from top to down The rules can be based on Project Properties Project Status Project Attribute Document Name Document Attribute Workflow Specification See Workflow Example on page 324 for more information Selects a document based on the folder project name and name of the document See Select Document for more information Selects the document references associated with an incoming document Read in Select Children Document Reference on page 296 Selects the master documents of the incoming document references Read in Select Parent Document Reference on page 297 You can send automatic notifications to Project Manager Sales Person Workflow Master Groups Users Roles Here Workflow Master is the assignee of the workflow task See Send Notification for more information Sets the value of one or more document attribute s automatically Set Project Attribute Bo set Project
280. nage Roles in their project Note Only Project Managers who are members of the Admins group can save a project as a Template See the Administration Guide for more information 11 1 Creating Projects and Folders Project Managers can create new projects either from zero from a project template or from an existing project and they can create new folders inside projects they manage 11 1 1 Create a Project from Zero A N Log in as a project manager In the Create or Projects menu click Create Project Choose Start from a Blank Project in the Create list Fill in the new project s Details a Enter the Name of the new project b By default you are the Project Manager To make another user or user group the Project Manager for this project select his her name or the group name from the Project Manager list c To make the project active leave the Status on Active 199 my ESKO0OG WeeCanter Note If you are not sure that the project will be going forward you need somebody else to decide first you can either e make the project Non Active or On Hold e if you have the Task Management module make the project active make the decider a project member and assign him her a task to confirm authorize the project as first project task See Jask Management in WebCenter on page 247 for more information about tasks d If desired specify a Customer for the project and that customer s Location
281. ne how the pages of the active document are mapped to the reference pages Click OK e Current page only to map the current active page to the selected reference page The other pages will follow page number mapping e Current and following pages to map the current active page to the selected reference page This mapping will be used for the next reference pages Note If there are no following reference pages the last one will be set as the Compare To page e All pages to map all pages of the two documents The previous current pages will be mapped to the respective reference pages Note If there are no previous reference pages the first one will be set as the current page Any changes in the active page will lead to a corresponding change in the reference page as defined in the dialog If you have not defined any comparison mode the page numbers will be mapped 4 You can use the Compare mode tools to compare the details of the pages Approval in Page Lists You can set up approval cycle on individual pages of a Page List However for multi page documents the approval cycle is only possible for the entire document You will see the approval tools when the loaded document is in an approval cycle WebCenter Tip A color coded bar on the page thumbnails display the approval state of the document e Grey bar no approval cycle e Blue bar pending approval e Green bar approved or force approved e Red bar rejected o
282. ng in one file WebCenter doesn t support using multiple files for one 3D design See the Visualizer manual or online help for more information 8 2 2 In ArtiosCAD Since ArtiosCAD 7 6 any 3D file can be output to Collada The output includes the graphics floor shading etc Note This might require additional licensing 1 Create your model using the ArtiosCAD 3D functionality 2 When it is ready go to File gt Outputs 3D gt Collada to export it e Set the Graphics resolution e To export a thumbnail with the Collada file choose either PNG or JPEG in the Include bitmaps as option you can select the Quality for JPEG e Save the file as a ZAE file Note If your model includes graphics saving to zae and not a dae ensures you have everything in one file WebCenter doesn t support using multiple files for one 3D design See the ArtiosCAD manual for more information 8 3 Uploading 3D Files to WebCenter Collada dae and Zipped Collada zae files can be uploaded to WebCenter using the normal upload functionality available within WebCenter via Automation Engine or through the WebCenter SDK 185 Be Esko WebCenter automatically recognizes Collada files as the Collada document type 8 3 1 Working with 2D and 3D Files We advise using the same name for related 2D and 3D documents and putting them in the same folder Those will be linked automatically in a future version of WebCenter 8 3 2 Creating a
283. ng them For example e differences in display color of the same channel in the current and reference document e differences in ink names For example a design ink name could be different from its production ink name When a Compare To reference document is selected a message may prompt you to open the Channel Matching Dialog on page 142 This happens only when there are unmatched channels in one of the documents Alternatively click on the Channel Matching H button to open the Channel Matching Dialog on page 142 Channel Matching L Orientation and Alignment Orientation t Hh Fo Th Alignment eS 33 Li Offset X Y 0 0 mm Channel Matching Dialog channel matching allows linking channels that have been changed in one of the documents Vversions while comparing Channel matching can be done automatically or manually Channel Matching Channel matching settings Match only if identical Ignore display RGB differences Also use smart name matching Make this setting the default Matched Channels Channels Current Current Reference Channels Referenc ic Bic Wm Wm Wy Wy H cut Wi cut E 583 Wi 583 W 7546 E 7546 _ weiss _ weiss Highlighted channels indicate which channel definition will be used for Cancel EEA LLa ae compare There are three settings 142 WebCenter Match only if identical Select this to match only the channels with identical names and display colors Ignore
284. nly visible in the Channels panel Note While viewing Digital Film files you can change the units of the information pop up Click the settings a button and select your preferred units Your units will revert to the User Preference settings when you close the active session To make an annotation from this pop up click on the Make Annotation a option You will get a rectangle annotation with the measurements as its content Check Braille a Check Braille tool allows you to analyze and interpret the Braille text in the selected language Select the area around the Braille text with a click drag release action You can also select the Braille a text area and click the tool to interpret the selection The result appears in The Channels Panel and in a pop up near the location you measured 1OZ WebCenter BD Sr A it ntation fa y a 3 5 o Oo SERS 08 88 You can choose the language from the language list by clicking on the current language visible under the braille tool Note By default English is selected lf there is no Braille text for a particular Channel is displayed When multiple lines are present in the Braille text a line number in square brackets will be shown before the text of each line For example 1 for the first line MB 1 boots cold and flu 2 relief echinacea To make an annotation from this pop up click on the Make Annotation a option You will get a r
285. nt The status of the approval action is displayed listing any documents that could not be updated Note You can also do this from within a project in the Documents tab select the project s documents to approve or reject then click Approve Reject in the Actions menu 173 ESKO scum L Working with Page Lists ImposeProot Documents 1 About Page Lists What is a Page List document Page Lists are a special type of multi page PDF documents in WebCenter that represent imposed books or magazines As such they are an important tool for commercial printers Page Lists PDFs are generated in Automation Engine from FastImpose imposition files imp and uploaded to WebCenter from the Automation Engine production server If you are not using a Automation Engine production server you can also upload Page Lists using the Upload feature in WebCenter You cannot upload imposition files imp Page List documents have two major advantages over other multi page PDF files e You can upload either the complete document or specific pages only for example pages 6 12 e individual pages can be approved or rejected in WebCenter for example you can approve pages 3 5 and 7 16 of a 16 page Page List Note A multi page PDF file can only be approved or rejected as a whole Working with Page Lists Page List documents are displayed as a single document in document lists Click the Page List name to view its pages and detail
286. nt version gets the rejected status at the end of the stage The approvers of the next stage s don t get an approval request for that version of the document e Choose Continue approval cycle anyway if you want to use the current stage as a review stage the approvers are just expected to give their opinion on the document but do not have a veto power and to only start the real approval in a later stage Note The approvers from later stages can use the opinions and comments given in this review stage to evaluate the document and make a decision The result of this stage a rejected status for the document can be overruled by later stages save the Approval Cycle e When you are finished with the setup click Save Note If you were setting up an approval cycle for several documents and some of them already had a started approval cycle the approval setup will fail for these documents You will see a list of failed documents on the Multiple Document Approval Setup Info page 238 WelbCenter Tip From the same page you can also e Revert the approval settings to the last saved version when editing an existing approval cycle See also Editing Approval Settings on page 239 e Clear the approval settings So the project folder or document has no approval cycle For a document this also clears all settings inherited from the project or folder e Start the Approval Cycle see also Start or Stop the Approval Cycle on page 2
287. ntents as desired and click Close Window to return to the Create Project page Note Depending on the template you chose the fields you need to fill in may be different WebCenter Fill in the new project s Details If desired add Documents to the project Add Members to the project If the template has attributes defined fill them in the Attributes section Click Create O ON OD O This brings you to the new project s details page Note The project is created with the same folder structure documents characteristics attributes members and security as in the template Any documents in the template are copied into the new project as new standalone documents even if they were linked documents in the template The list of Approval Users is copied if it is applicable if there are conflicts a warning appears and you will have to configure new approval settings Fill in the Project Details In the Details section of the Create Project page 1 Enter the Name of the new project 2 By default you are the Project Manager Io make another user or user group the Project Manager for this project select his her name or the group name from the Project Manager list 3 To make the project active leave the Status on Active Note lf you are not sure that the project will be going forward you need somebody else to decide first you can either e make the project Non Active or On Hold e if you ha
288. o attributes you can use this to assign those specifications attributes to the task documents as well Attention When linking documents that already have an attribute category to the task the existing attribute category will not be replaced by the one you select here 5 If you want the documents to be uploaded to a predefined folder you can enter the name of that folder in the text field Note This default folder will only be used if there is a folder in the project with that name 6 If e the specifications used in the task are also attributes e those attributes are assigned to the document s attached to the task Select Automatically update attached documents attributes from task specifications to update the values of the document s attributes with the values that the task assignee fills in for the task specifications Note The update happens once the task is completed 7 Click Save 12 9 4 Define Task Discussions Settings 1 Select Allow discussions to allow project members to start discussions on all tasks created from that task type 2 Click Save 12 9 5 Specifications in a Task Type You can automatically update project attributes with task specifications when the tasks are completed Read more in https wiki esko com pages viewpage action pageld 76 731084 20r ma ESKO WebCerter Note e While the task is running project attributes and task specifications can be different This is indicate
289. o remove an attribute select it and click set Project status Use this node to automatically set the status of the current project Parameters Choose the project status in the Status list it contains all project statuses configured in your WebCenter system set Workflow Specification Use this node to automatically set the value of one or more specifications of the workflow you are running A Parameters Attention The specifications you want to use should already be added to the workflow task before starting the workflow Click to add one of the workflow specifications to the list If this is not the specification you wanted click it and select another of the workflow s specifications Then double click in the Value column to enter the corresponding specification value You can use SmartNames To remove a specification select it and click Set Workflow Status Use this node to automatically set the status of your workflow this must be an active status WebCenter Parameters Choose the workflow status in the Status list it contains all active workflow statuses configured in your WebCenter system start Approval Cycle Use this node to start an approval cycle on any incoming document and wait until the approval cycle is finished Parameters Choose to either e Use the default approval setup this is the default approval setup of the incoming document If no approval setup exists for it the
290. o the remote WebCenter for the specified user name 295 IK ESKOS WebCenter Note If a user exports a task type containing a node with this option this field will be blank in the generated XML Note You may copy the documents remotely but you cannot add them as links For every project created you will find a log in the Project History Select Document Use the Select Document node to choose a document to be processed by the rest of the workflow When a workflow is started with a human task requiring documents the Select Document node can be used to provide documents Parameters Project Name The name of the Project containing the document to select by default this is the project in which the workflow is launched You can select either e Documents in the project then define the following e Name The name of the document to select e Folder The project folder containing the document to select By default this is the root folder Tip You can use SmartNames for the Project Name Folder and Name parameters e Documents in the Bill of Materials Fail if no document found select this if you want to stop the workflow with a failed state if there is no document in the defined Project location Bill of Materials select Children Document Reference Using this node you can select the documents that are referenced in the input document as a document reference attribute value Read more in Document References
291. ojects select them and click Update Project s in the Actions menu 11 2 8 Project Statuses The Project Status feature allows you to review the current project standing This feature can be accessed by an ADMIN or a member of the ADMIN group Project Managers and an User An administrator can add statuses in WebCenter This works similar to task statuses whereas the statuses are not shared A status has a name an icon and a type The types are Not active Active and Completed The WebCenter has the functionality to limit the actions possible in not active and completed projects It is most typical to add active statuses for example Briefing Design Prepress Printing An administrator can limit the statuses for a project and this can be done for every project separately The Project Manager can perform following e Set the Project Status e View Project Status aT my ESKO WebCerter e Search Project Status and Filter projects based on Project Status The Project Status will appear as follows when a specific project is selected WebCenter logged in as ADMIN ADMIN S Preferences w CAD Project Management Companies Users w Groups Roles Characteristics Attributes Configuration Project WCR1i2_ProjectStatus Status Active upload natant Customer Upload Multiple Documents Due On Mail link to Modified Feb 29 2012 More actions Description Documents 1 Tasks 0 Discussions 0
292. olumns of the project overview pages Project am Invited to Favorite Projects and Projects Manage e The status is displayed in project search results if this column is requested to appear in the search result If an icon is available the Project Status is displayed as an icon with its status name If no icon is available the project status is displayed as a name only If the option hide thumbnails is active only the status name is shown The icon is displayed in true size 11 2 11 Customizing a Project Status 214 An Administrator can set allowed statuses for Templates or for Projects By doing this an Administrator can limit the number of Project Statuses to be used for a specific project When adding a new project status to the system this status will be also added to all projects and templates When a project is created from a template or from another project it inherits the allowed statuses from its source This happens only once and does not happen when the template changes later Log in to WebCenter as an Admin user Click the Admin gt Project Management and select Projects or Templates Click the required Project or Template link from the list Click the Configure gt Project Statuses This displays a table with the current allowed statuses for this Template or Project 5 Select the required Project Status from the list and then click the Add Project Statuses link A ND Note By default a blank Proje
293. om the Viewer You will just need to click OK to be able to print Security Warning x The applet has requested access to the printer Do you want to allow this action Name viewer Always allow this applet to access the printer e Signed not sandboxed if you want to run the applet without restricting it to a sandbox the applet can request additional access to your computer s resources This means that you will not get an additional warning when printing from the Viewer As the applet is signed by Esko the security warning looks less threatening Do you want to run this application 7 Name WebCenter Viewer KS gt Publisher Esko Software byba ol From http ff signed unrestricted viewer applet jnip This application will run with unrestricted access which may put your computer and personal information at risk Run this application only iF you trust the publisher Do not show this again For apps from the publisher and location above EJ More Information Cancel e Unsigned if you want to run the applet as a default unsigned applet You will get the default security warning that does not mention Esko but the applet will be sandboxed This means that you will have an additional security warning when printing from the Viewer as for the Signed sandboxed applet 42 3 WebCenter Tip By default the applet is set to run as Signed sandboxed This will work fine for most users More freq
294. on any of the page thumbnails in the Page list widget to get the following options e Mark Clear Mark e Mark all pages e Clear marks on all pages To clear the mark or marks click on the Ww Clear Mark button For more options right click e Clear Mark e Mark all pages e Clear marks on all pages 5 2 23 Viewing CAD with Graphics You can view a graphics document with its CAD overlay for reviewing purposes When you open a normalized graphics document PDF in the viewer WebCenter will check the meta data XMP for a linked ArtiosCAD ARD resource Note This link between graphics and CAD can be made in a desktop application like DeskPack or PackEdge Here the relative orientation and offset is determined and saved together with the graphics file meta data XMP lf a CAD reference is found you will see this in the document select panel with a link icon You can select this to view together with the graphics document If the graphics file does not have a XMP link you can use the document references feature to link them 159 J ESKOS WebCerter r Document Select Current barandbraille pdf h E Project HTMLS Viewer 14 1 update Compare to Click to select a difference Document page CAD Overlay ca barandbraille pdf Boxes002 ard Project HTMLS Viewer 14 1 update Orientation 5 F Alignment M T Offset X Y 31 99 203 25 mim Linking a CAD with Graphics using Document References Yo
295. op tool panel e the CAD widget e the Documents list and from all pages where the document operations area available 166 WebCenter weit barandbraille pdf 944 7KB E alalle s basicbox ard 2KB Hearer es BoxesOO2 ard 28KB walr alear EE ier FireWorx_window_clip pdf 1003 9KB aal e To generate a 3D Perspective from the Document Details page go to Document Information gt More Actions Choose 3D View Collada e To delete a 3D Perspective go to Document Details gt Document Information gt More Actions Choose Remove 3D View Opening Documents in the SD Viewer Once you have a generated a 3D perspective by opening it in the HTML5 3D Collada Viewer you can open this again from different pages in WebCenter You can also generate a 3D Perspective from the Document Details page To do this go to Document Information gt More Actions and choose the 3D View Collada option You will have the Open 3D View a button next to the normal document operations You will have this option for e Graphics Files with aligned CAD reference e ArtiosCAD Design and Canvas files e ArtiosCAD 3D files To open a 3D view click CI from e The Task execution page 167 ESKOw WebCerter Status In Progress Assigned to Me v Due May 9 2014 at 12 00 PM Estimated Ea or Ww Y Task Documents Upload Multiple Documents Source Document Template Name Description Upload New Link L Uploaded Documents Actions
296. opened a document in the HTML5 Collada Viewer once the top tool panel will show an Open 3D View m button Click on this to generate the 3D View 5 2 7 Document Select The Document Select panel allows you to select the Current view from the multiple files documents or document versions loaded into the Viewer Document Select appears when a multi page file or multiple files are loaded into the Viewer 105 ESKO scone 106 When multiple documents are loaded the panel will contain two document lists e Current e Compare to Document Select Current Project MIPE test project Document 110573 HeE Ph ABC Compare to TA Project MIPE test project i Document barandbraille pdf mf From the Current list select the file you want to view You can switch to different documents view from this list Note If you do not want to compare documents or versions leave the Compare To field empty Compare To The Compare To list contains the possible reference documents Select the reference document from this list to compare to the current When a reference document is selected from the Compare to list the lower part of the panel will display controls for adjusting channel matching orientation and alignment Read Compare Documents in the Viewer for more details Selecting Documents You can select the current and the reference versions using the two document selectors in the Document Select panel Not
297. or example a CMYK document and a Pantone spot color document e Compare Automatic In this setting Channels will be used as compare color space if the definition of all the visible channels is the same in the two compared documents If this is not the case HSV compare will be used Change the difference threshold You can change the precision of difference detection using the slider tool You can also enter a percentage 0 100 value If the threshold is higher than 0 is set you will see a message warning about the hidden differences Note Your difference threshold will be saved for your next compare session Change Difference highlight colors Depending on your documents to compare you may want to change the highlight colors You can do this by clicking on the color block tool and selecting your preferred colors By default e the added channels and objects on common channels are displayed in blue to highlight the differences The left part of the color block button indicates this highlight color e the subtracted channels and deleted objects on common channels are displayed in red The right part of the color block button indicates this You can e Change added highlight color e Change subtracted highlight color e Change both highlight colors There is a button to reset the changed highlight colors back to red blue Difference Compare Modes You can select different compare modes for effective comparison of documents
298. ore it is very important that people get correctly notified of what they are supposed to do and that they get notified again if they cause delay to the Project WebCenter Currently WebCenter does not calculate critical paths it leaves it to the Project manager to set good due dates and it notifies people assigned to a task WebCenter also automatically sends overdue notifications to Project managers and assigned Project members whenever a task is overdue Overdue means that the task passes its due date without being completed This information assumes that the e mail environment is already set up Please refer to the WebCenter Installation Guide for detailed instructions 12 10 1 Set Up Notifications for Tasks Task management notifications are set up on the same pages as all other notifications The Admin sets system wide default notifications for all projects at once see Notifications Preferences in the Administrator Guide but you can change those defaults for the projects you manage e To set project specific task notifications click the Notifications tab in your project For example you can send notifications to the Involved People For task management notifications the involved people are typically the task creator and the task assignee Tip On the notification setting page click Involved People for more information about the involved people for each kind of notification 12 11 Tasks Templates and Copying Tasks e Wh
299. ou can also Upload Multiple Documents see Upload Multiple Documents on page 54 for more information 12 5 3 Download a List of Documents from the Task To download documents from the task execution page e Select the documents to download and click Download in the Actions menu e If you selected a single document that you have download rights for it will be downloaded directly e If you selected several documents you will get a ZIP archive containing all the documents you selected and for which you have download rights Note e lf you don t have download rights for any selected document you will see an error message e f you selected CAD files as part of a multi document download they will be downloaded in the native perspective 12 5 4 Change the Task Status 256 When you are working on a task you may want to change its status to reflect the task progression especially if the task was created from a task type with many precise statuses On the task execution page 1 Choose the Status to give the task 2 If the task contains a Checklist mark some checklist items as done if necessary WebCenter 3 Click Change 12 5 5 Complete a Task Once you have completed a task do the following to mark it as Completed in WebCenter On the task execution page 1 If the task contains a Checklist mark the checklist items as done 2 If the task contains Specifications fill them in as needed 3 If the task type allow
300. over Type _ptt_11 _PTT_TESTUSER_11 User APPROVER All of Role a F allow conditional approval When one user rejects Stop approval cycle after every approver decided i Approval setup has changed since last Save EE kevert clear Note You cannot start an Approval cycle with unassigned Roles in the project When the approval cycle starts all the Role approvers are replaced as their assignees and the Roles will no longer be visible in the Approval Setup If a Role is set as the Approval master all the Role assignees Users and members of the Group become the real Approval masters WebCenter Changing Role Assignments From WebCenter 14 onwards you can easily change Role assignments within a Project 1 Goto Project gt Members Click on Manage Roles to get to the Role Management page You can see the list of Roles associated with the Project You may also access this page from Project Creation page In the Manage Roles page you can see the existing Role assignments You can change or remove the existing Role assignments from here 2 Youcan e adda Group to the Role e create anew assignment for the existing Roles Use the User Assignee dropdown to choose another User as the new Role assignee e add delete members from the same Role Use the and controls respectively When an existing Role Assignment is changed all the Role dependent Task and Approval assignments will get transferred to the new
301. own first 3 Click the title of the discussion to view The discussion opens with the messages shown in the order in which they were posted 10 3 Add a Message to a Discussion Go to the project or document containing the desired discussion Click Discussions Click the title of the discussion to view The discussion opens A N Compose the message e f you want to quote a previous message click Quote in that message The text of that message appears within lt QUOTE gt lt QUOTE gt tags in the Reply field You may edit the text as desired but make sure to leave the two tags intact at the beginning and end of the quote Quoted text appears in italics with an angle bracket at the beginning of each line There is only one level of quoting e To add a message without quoting a previous message enter the message in the Reply field 5 When you are done entering text in the Reply field click Post I7 ie ESKOS WebCenter Your reply is added to the discussion 10 4 Print a Discussion 10 5 Go to the project or document containing the desired discussion Click Discussions Click the title of the discussion to view The discussion opens Click Print A separate browser window opens containing the entire discussion Use the browser s Print command to print the discussion Delete a Message from a Discussion 10 6 Note Only the author of the message a Project Manager or a me
302. panel contains some of the Viewer s most used tools Navigation Tools A Zoom tool oak Zoom in tool A Zoom out tool eh Fit Document in View tool Md Pan tool See nteractive Zooming on page 97 for more information Orientation Tools oy t Rotate view tool F1 Mirror view tool See Rotate and Mirror on page 99 Measure Tools S Ruler tool to Measure distances and Angle on page 99 Pi Measure Color Percentages on page 102 densitometer tool lki Check Bar Codes on page 103 tool 95 ESKO sesame 96 Check Braille on page 102 Powered by Global Vision tool 3D Tool e If you have opened a document in the HTML5 Collada Viewer once the top tool panel will show an Open 3D View mi button Annotation Tools Hide Annotations on page 138 tool LJ Add Annotation on page 128 tool E Note Annotation on page 131 tool See Annotating in the Viewer on page 128 for more information Page List Tools only when viewing a page list multi page document ak Read more in Reader Spread View on page 154 Reader Spread view 4 Arrows to navigate between pages or spreads J A mi i 1 Mark the active page A yellow star indicates that the active page is marked w Clear Mark from the active page Compare Tools only when comparing You can only see the Compare tools when you have two documents open to compare see View current version m View reference version i Es View both blinking i
303. project will be created If a project with the specified name already exists it will result in an error For copying documents there is an option to be copied as new versions e Project Name Suffix is required when you are using auto naming with a Suffix field as Edit e Template The project template on which the new project should be based on If left empty a blank project will be created e Project Description The description of the new project e Project Status The initial status of the new project This list follows the order of the project statuses as defined in WebCenter and selects the first one e Customer Company The legal name of the company customer By default it will be the customer company of the current project e Location The customer company location By default it will be the location of the current project e Project Due Date The due date of the new project By default it will be the due date of the Current project e Project Manager The project manager of the new project By default the node takes the current project manager e Use SmartNames to choose a Group Role User as the Project Manager of the new Project and an attribute document project task to automate the setup of the node You may also manually specify these parameters e When a SmartName for Project Manager is not resolved for example you choose an attribute with Group or User as value and it cannot be resolved because you forgo
304. prover select him her in the Add Approvers list Repeat for every user you want to add as approver To add a group as an approver select it in the Add Approvers list choosing either One of Group if you want one any member of the group to be able to approve it for the whole group The document will get the approved status once one group member approves it A typical example would be a legal review which is completed as soon as one member of the legal department has approved the document All of Group if you want all members of the group to approve the document The document will get the approved status once all group members approve it A typical example would be a management review which is only completed after all members of the management team have approved the document Note When adding a group as All of Group the users who are group members when the approval cycle is started become approvers If you later add or remove users from the group the list of approvers is not updated To add a role as an approver select it in the Add Approvers list One of Role if you want only one of the role assignees to approve on behalf of the role This is the default setting Tip It is possible to change Role assignments after starting the Approval cycle if you select One of Role option Use One of Role if there is only one role assignee Note Make sure that the Role is assigned to at least one user group before starting the app
305. provers you can add or remove approvers even if they have already approved or rejected the document You cannot change anything else due date conditional approval Editing a Staged Approval Cycle After stopping a staged approval cycle that was already started what you can edit depends on the stages status If a stage is e completed you cannot edit anything and you cannot remove the stage e pending you can only add or remove approvers even if they have already approved or rejected the document You cannot change anything else due date conditional approval or remove the stage e notstarted yet you can change anything you like You can remove the stage or add extra stages Note You cannot change the Approval Master Editing the Approval Cycle for Next Version You can also choose to leave the current approval cycle as it is and only edit the approval setup for the next version of the document To do this click Edit Approval Setup for Next Version in the document details page s Approval tab Note If an approval cycle is finished you cannot edit it In this case you can only edit the approval setup for the next version of the document 11 5 8 Following Up on Approvals lf you are an Approval Master you will see the approval cycles you are responsible for under Approvals to Follow Up on your My Work page This section shows a summary of each document s approval cycle with all the necessary details Appro
306. r Oval annotation tool O Use this to select an oval area within the image Freehand annotation tool C Use this to make a freehand marking within the image Line annotation tool a Use this to make a line marking on the image Arrow annotation tool Use this to create an arrow marking on the image The arrow head will be at the place where the mouse is released i Highlight annotation tool Z Use this to select an area and highlight it in transparent yellow overprint New Global Rectangle EH Click on this to create a rectangle annotation surrounding the entire image without the dragging action You may create multiple global rectangles You can also resize this global rectangle Change Default Annotation Line Colori When you click this color block a window opens from which you can select a new color This new preference is saved for all future annotations e f os Reset Default Line Color When you reset the color a message asks if you want to update all the annotations with this color e From the sub menu select the type of annotation The Viewer remembers the selected tool until another tool is selected e Optionally change the color of the annotation line Otherwise the default color red will be used You can change the annotation line color from the annotation window as well e Click drag and release within the image You can type and format your annotation in the Annotation Window on page 129 You
307. r according to the CAD coordinate system Save the alignment changes After aligning the tools you can generate a 3D You can also use the tools in the CAD on page 125 widget to further refine the display If you did not save the alignment changes before generating 3D you will see a message Do you wish to change your CAD overlay alignment Click Save to generate 3D 5 2 24 Viewing 3D in the HTML5 Collada Viewer 164 You can view 3D digital mockups in the HITML5 Collada Viewer This is very useful when your browser device does not support Java Applet You can set the 3D Viewer as the HITML5 Collada Viewer in the My preferences This will help you to Enhance artwork and shape approval with its 3D representation WebCenter e Communicate the final packaging in the most realistic form e Use WebCenter as an online medium to share 3D mockups Note The HTML5 based Collada Viewer does not offer the same rendering quality as the Java applet Viewer for Collada files The advanced material and lightning visualization is not yet available In the HTML5 Collada 3D Viewer you can view the following e Collada When you open Collada files it will open the HTML5 3D Viewer if your Preferenceis set as HITML5 Collada Viewer e Aligned CAD and Graphics Viewing CAD with Graphics on page 159 e CAD Viewing CAD Design files as 3D Browser Version Requirements Browser Minimum version Chrome Desktop Mobile 30 Firefox Desktop Mobil
308. r force rejected In addition a blue circle at the bottom of the thumbnails informs you that you need to approve the document Approval Details on page 110 widget will display the approval information regarding the active page The widget updates the information when you view a different page of a Page List When an approval status is submitted the approval status will be updated for all visible pages Read also Evaluate a Page List in the Viewer on page 157 Evaluate a Page List in the Viewer 1 Navigate to the Page List in a Document list and click on its thumbnail image The Viewer opens displaying the Page List in the Page List widget 2 In the Viewer tool bar click J 2 to approve the document O to reject it f to comment on it 2 to force approve it if you are a Project Manager 2 to force reject it if you are a Project Manager 3 In the pop up that opens choose to approve reject comment the Approved Current Page Pages Current Page Marked Pages No Marked Pages Selected Pages All Pages Set Approval Condition ei Cancel Select this option when you intend to approve only the active page Marked Pages Ior 5 WebCenter a ea Approved Pages Current Page Marked Pages 4 7 Selected Pages All Pages Set Approval Condition eel Cancel You can mark pages while evaluating to do approval actions in bulk Selected Pages You can approve reject the se
309. r results For more extensive help on searching click Help at the top right of the Search page box NOT box company box AND company box company OR box co 38 box products box company box co inc box products box company box Co inc bottle holders box products box co inc box company box company box co inc bottle holders box company bottle holders box co inc box products bottle holders box products bottle holders WebCenter box AND products OR box company box Co inc company box products bottle holders NOT company box products box company box co inc 3 3 5 My WebCenter The My WebCenter menu contains items specifically related to your user My Profile Your profile is where you set your name your e mail address your phone numbers your function and your company and location My Password The Password field is where you change your password Enter the new password in the Password and Confirm Password fields and click Change To set a blank password enter nothing in the fields click Change and click OK when asked to save a blank password Note This presents a security risk and is therefore not recommended Configure Single Sign On User settings You can view the Single Sign On settings specific to your User account in the My WebCenter gt My Password page This page will display the Single Sign On Instances that are enab
310. r the Help window to be a pop up Either turn off the browser s pop up blocker or add the WebCenter Web server to the browser s list of allowed sites Document types For a Graphics document to show CAD data it must reference the ArtiosCAD file The Viewer does not show graphics contained in an ArtiosCAD document For the Viewer to show multiple pages of a PDF file it must have been uploaded as a Page List document either through the user interface with the Upload document feature or uploaded to WebCenter by Automation Engine For Page List documents the Viewer offers a list of all the pages as a navigation aid and a reader spread mode to evaluate impositions Multiple documents To view multiple documents at once select their checkboxes and click View and Annotate in the Actions menu inside a project or the Cart or the amp symbol at the top on your My Work page Navigate between documents using the drop down list box in the Document field or the navigation arrows in the information bar across the top of the Viewer WebCenter To zoom in click inside the document or draw a rectangle around the area to enlarge with the Zoom tool 4 To zoom out hold down shift or ctrl while the Zoom tool is active The symbol inside the magnifying glass cursor will change from a plus sign to a minus sign Zoom To make the view scale to fit the space in the browser window right click the Zoom tool and select Fit document in view
311. r the first revision of the document e Specific Revision and specify the revision letter in the field Tip Searching based on Project Status You can specify Project Status as a criteria in Project Search To do so select the Project Status from the drop down To type in a custom value or to use wild cards AND OR etc click the edit T button 19 ESKO secon Tip When you are searching for Tasks based on task specifications e click on the link Task Specifications and start typing the name of the specification e or select from the drop down listing all specifications 4 Use the Search Results Options to determine what you want to see in your search results and in what order 5 You can also e clear all fields click Clear this form e save the search query for future use See Jo Save a Search on page 24 6 Click Search to search using the criteria you entered Note For normal searches WebCenter searches all the fields available on the Search page Each document type in the Search for list has different searchable fields The Search Results page shows your results You can view your results in a list or a grid and choose to view the thumbnails or not Note Search results display only projects or documents for which you have View permission Use Advanced Search Characters If you want to perform a more precise search select Use Advanced Search Characters This allows you to use the amp amp
312. r view Mirrors the current view Use this to flip the document vertically from the center of the screen If you are zoomed into an area the center of this area will be used as the reference Tip The shortcut Ctrl M can be used to flip the view Measure distances and Angle The Ruler tool calculates the distance between any two points in the work area with a click drag release action When you measure from one point to another a line is drawn and you can see measurement information such as e The starting location X and Y e The angle measured relative to the axis A e The total distance D the Horizontal Distance W and the Vertical Distance H in a pop up in the View Measuring the distance 1 Select the D Ruler tool 2 Specify the measurements in the pop up tool bar that appears below R K Displays the Angle A and the Distance D Displays the starting location X and Y e Fr Hi Displays the horizontal W and vertical H distances traveled from the x and y axes Note You can choose to display all of the measurements by selecting all of the above If you select just one corresponding measurements will be displayed e K Displays the Angle A positive upwards Counter Clock Wise 99 ESKO an 100 i N Displays the Angle A positive downwards Clock Wise J E Changes the color of the Ruler line in the View a Reset the color of the Ruler 3 Drag from the st
313. rc tani ate ea tec cecal i tc Ll dae an han galerie aed 109 5 2 10 Approval B gt Cae eee ene nae Eee ee ene ee en rE t 110 A TES D NVE N eee eS eae ome AVE oS De IME PRE TORE NO PCV met ATRL SOT ee ROR MT COPE S 111 NS NIJIONE 111 DAOI eae cee nea ere ee So en none et DE nT ea nn ee een omer et 112 IAEE N eee eee ee Ce ee ere ee eee ere ee eer ee eee eee eee 113 2 WO PUM DCS uae be cee seca a tons eam nea E ioc enna wae wads cea deme ue cone ee 121 SZT AIMS aae eaaa a aae a naan 122 SAI CAD rua E E nea iene i Maleate athe ies te 125 Se OARGI a ne ee ce eta ee rot re Cee ane ane ee eee CAT ee eT 128 5 2 19 Annotating in the VIS WCU sac sescsescasi Sciested esi ascveus save ktore ladles to ase Sinai na tatiun ta Nava daaleeaie Seta ado 128 ap 27 0 8 072 Penn enrne tere ee sr RRR Te TreT On Tt Eo r OnE A ree ge 139 5 2 21 Compare Documents IN the Viewer aros iasiusieiyasiii nina a N 141 5 2 22 Viewing Multi Page Documents and Page Lists s s sssssesssssrnersrsinrnrrrnrnenrnrnrnrrrrrrrnrrnrerererns 153 D229 VICW ING SAD VIEL i PMCS iscsi he ssc sacar ab a bea cv a a sence a 159 5 2 24 Viewing 3D in the HTMLS5 Collada VIEWED ccccccceceetssesscseteserscaretsseetaretssearieees 164 Me skos 92 29 VIEwWNI A 0 td lt lt emer erent nee ene ee eer ene meme ee re ee eee 168 5 2 26 Limitations in the HTML5 VIGWON sccccsecstessncasencntaesnennaenscaveyentsarastunaadicdnetaasiaatcanvetneniataecaldtdstiesade beeta
314. re are no warranties granted or extended by this document Furthermore Esko Software BVBA does not warrant guarantee or make any representations regarding the use or the results of the use of the software or the information contained herein Esko Software BVBA shall not be liable for any direct indirect consequential or incidental damages arising out of the use or inability to use the software or the information contained herein The information contained herein is subject to change without notice Revisions may be issued from time to time to advise of such changes and or additions No part of this document may be reproduced stored in a data base or retrieval system or published in any form or in any way electronically mechanically by print photoprint microfilm or any other means without prior written permission from Esko Software BVBA This document supersedes all previous dated versions PANTONE PantoneLIVE and other Pantone trademarks are the property of Pantone LLC All other trademarks or registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners Pantone is a wholly owned subsidiary of X Rite Incorporated Pantone LLC 2015 All rights reserved This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group Portions of this software are copyright 1996 2002 The FreeType Project www freetype org Alll rights reserved Portions of this software are copyright 2006 Feeling Software copyright 2005 2006
315. re defined based on the attribute values The Route to names correspond to these values Note The rules are executed from top to bottom Their order can be changed with Move Up Move Down The last rule no match will be applied when the other options are not applicable This will result in Error or a custom label Routing can be based on many different criteria see the list below You can make all of them except the Project Status case sensitive Enable this option to match the exact case Note The leading and trailing spaces are always ignored Adding and deleting rules You can Add or Remove rules Use the options on the right hand side To Add a rule 1 Click the Add button For each additional rule another output dot is added to the node 2 Anew line appears under the current selected row no match always stays at the bottom of the list Select the operator and value for your rule Note The name of the output will be the same as the matching value by default However you can edit the name 3 You can choose Move Up or Move Down to change the order of your rules except for the no match rule The no match rule stays at the bottom Tip You can also set the same output token for multiple rules To do this select the same from the drop down The node will then have less output dots than there are rules To Remove a rule 1 2 Select the rule you wish to remove Click the Remove button It is not possible to de
316. ribute type For Text attributes Is empty applies when the attribute is not filled out Is Equal To valid if the attribute value equals the value in the input field of the rule Is Not Equal To applies if the attribute value equals the value in the input field of the rule Contains applies if the attribute value contains the specified rule value Does not contain applies if the attribute value does not contain the specified rule value Matches applies if the attribute value matches the specified rule value This value can contain wildcards and regular expressions Begins With valid if the attribute value begins with the rule input Note Leading spaces are ignored e Example Attribute value Sales Belgium and the rule says Begins with Sales Ends with Similar to the Begins with option The rule applies if the attribute value begins with the rule input Note Trailing spaces are ignored For Restricted Sets and Cascading Attributes If the selected attribute is a restricted set the rule options will be limited to is and is not The input field will have a drop down list with the restricted set values If your restricted set is a check box the unchecked value resolves to no match instead of no The cascading drop downs defined by a list will be treated as text attributes not as restricted set attributes For Numeric Attributes integer float weight dimensions The rule drop down now has the following op
317. roject Note If you are creating projects in a remote WebCenter you cannot copy the documents as links e Copy incoming documents as new version if they already exist check this to copy the documents as new versions e Raise revision if Document already exists enable this to raise the revision while copying or updating This will raise the revision letter and create a new version if the document already exists Note The option is visible only if your Admin gt Preferences gt General gt Allow increment Document Revision when uploading a new Document Version is on e Copy Viewer Annotations use this option to copy viewer annotations of documents while copying Note This will not work if you are copying to a remote WebCenter e Do Not Copy Documents choose this option if you do not want to copy the documents to the new project When you copy a document version via the Copy Move Document node or via the Create Project node yo Iterate Tab You can create multiple projects at once using the options in this tab The default option is Do not Iterate 293 Ky ESKO WebCerter To create multiple projects over an attribute choose Iterate over Attribute Iterate Notification Output Parameters Specifications Due Date Tteration No Iteration Iterate over Attribute Attribute BAMT Languages Document Do Not Iterate
318. roject status icon which will then appear at the left of the calendar Remark that the calendar is displayed in the column defined for the project status By changing the column order for this column you will move the calendar in the search result In most cases the best result is obtained if the calendar is the last column and if there are not too many preceding columns WebCenter My Work Projects v Task Types v Search v My WebCenter v Create v Upload Y J 2carch View List Column Order Editable Sort Order Clear this form Project Name fFsno 1 1 g 1 amp Save this search Description Project Status Show All y B Created aa Modified Due lw y B i Sear v rch Resul Customer Location vi mbnail Salesperson vi s 3rid 4 bel Grid L Project Manager User Group Me v K Manager s location Attributes Allow Changing Attribute Category Characteristics Show Search Button Deliverables The 3 calendar options are e Show Calendar View will show past statuses history e Show Calendar View with Predictions will show past statuses and predictions based on the tasks in the project e Show Calendar View with Planning will show past statuses predictions based on the tasks and the originally planned timeline in gray Note The last two options are available with the task management license only Using the Basic Calendar View Ev
319. rom the attributes list You can change the added attributes by clicking on it and selecting another value from the drop down of attributes Remove Selected attributes from the custom list Remove All attributes from the list in one go WebCenter Project Attributes as Job Parameters Push All Push None Push Custom List Project Attribute 1 Flexo film colour 1 Litho correction colour 1 New Design setup colour 1 Out of spec artwork 1 Printproof production colour 1 Remote Elodot proof 1 Text correction colour 1 Text correction complex design 1 Text correction simple design Note The Sync Workflow node will push only the attributes that are assigned to the WebCenter project in which the workflow is executed If the attributes specified in this node are not assigned to the project these will not be pushed Warning When you push a custom list of attributes to Automation Engine as job parameters you may lose some of the existing job parameters This happens if you are using the old JDF policy on Automation Engine Read about the JDF policy in http help esko com docs en us suite general 14 otherdocs AE_Job_Parameter_Policy pdf Submit Workflow Use this node to launch a workflow in Automation Engine from WebCenter During execution this node will e connect to Automation Engine using the specified Workflow Connection e launch the workflow in the specified Automation Engine Job Container
320. roup the list of approvers is not updated To add a role as an approver select it in the Add Approvers list One of Role if you want only one of the role assignees to approve on behalf of the role This is the default setting Tip It is possible to change Role assignments after starting the Approval cycle if you select One of Role option Use One of Role if there is only one role assignee Note Make sure that the Role is assigned to at least one user group before starting the approval cycle All of Role One per Group if you want all users and one any member per group assigned to the role to approve the document All of Role if you want all users and all members of groups assigned to the role to approve the document All current assignees of a Role can see the approvals for their Role in their My Work gt My Approvals section WebCenter Note When adding a role as All of Role the users and group members assigned to the role when the approval stage is started all become approvers If you later assign or remove users from the role the list of approvers is not updated If you add the role as All of Role One per Group this will make all users approvers and the groups will be used as One of Group when the approval stage is started To remove an approver or a group use the minus sign in front of it Allow Conditional Approval or Not e Decide to allow conditional approval or not Use conditional approval to allo
321. roval cycle All of Role One per Group if you want all users and one any member per group assigned to the role to approve the document All of Role if you want all users and all members of groups assigned to the role to approve the document All current assignees of a Role can see the approvals for their Role in their My Work gt My Approvals section To remove an approver or a group use the minus sign in front of it WelbCenter Define How to Handle Document Rejection e Define what to do when one user rejects the document e Choose Stop approval cycle immediately if you don t want to bother the rest of the approvers with a document that will have to be corrected and re approved anyway Note That document version gets rejected as final approval status The approval request is removed from the to do list of the approvers who haven t evaluated the document yet e Choose Stop approval cycle after every approver decided if you want to collect as many opinions as possible before creating a new version to increase the chances that the next version will be approved Note That document version only gets the rejected status after all approvers have decided save the Approval Cycle e When you are finished with the setup click Save Note If you were setting up an approval cycle for several documents and some of them already had a started approval cycle the approval setup will fail for these documents You will see a list o
322. rs e Normal User you can add the Users associated with the same Company 3 3 6 Create You can use this menu to create projects or users You can only see it if you are a Project Manager See Project Management in WebCenter on page 199 for more information 3 3 Upload Use this menu to upload documents into any WebCenter project for which you have upload permissions See Different Ways to Upload Documents on page 50 for more information 3 4 Filtering Content As more information is managed over time by WebCenter some pages can potentially show large amounts of information To reduce the time needed to show the page when it first loads some pages have a filter and a Go button at the top To use the filter enter a search string with an asterisk either before it surrounding it or after it in the Search field and click Go For example on the Companies page to only see those companies with the word Containers in their name enter Containers and click Go When filtering users use the last name of the user To show all the items up to the truncation limit click Go with nothing in the field Note The truncation limit prevents lists of thousands of items from impacting response time if you Know in advance that your search will return that many items refine it with the filter The truncation limit can be changed contact Professional Services at your local Esko office for more information A6 WebCenter 3 5 Using t
323. rsion description and approval state In the tasks overview there is a Task Documents column showing the names of the documents linked to this task Clicking a document name brings you to the document WebCenter e Inthe documents overview there is a Tasks column Clicking a task name brings you to the task 12 9 Working with Task lyoes By now it is clear that even with the limitations of the simple task type you can already do a lot of interesting things However the true value of task management becomes clear when adding new task types By adding new task types you can e Set up a template for a large number of tasks e Enforce structured specifications for tasks e Enforce a checklist for tasks e Add extra task statuses Note Task types can only be created by Project Managers with the User Can Create Task Type permission or by Admins The task types are also used in creating workflows in WebCenter Read more in Workflows on page 279 A Task Type can be either Manual or a Task Type with a Workflow Both types can be added to a workflow from the canvas The manual tasks require human intervention and they can be used as either individual tasks or as workflow nodes Read also Task Types on page 306 12 9 1 Create a Task Type Creating a task type demands some initial planning certainly if you want to use specifications Attention All specifications you want to put in a task type must first be defined by an Adm
324. rt Stop Approval This permission allows the locking of documents and the subsequent uploading of new versions It also allows starting and stopping approval cycles e Change Approval This permission allows the user to change the approval setup e Change Task This permission is only available for WebCenter setups including task management It allows users to create and change tasks You can only set this permission at the project level not at folder level e Change BOM This permission allows the user to change the Bill of Materials Administrators and the Project Manager can always change the Bill of Materials You can only set this permission at the project level not at folder level See Who Can Edit the Bill of Materials in the Administration Guide for more information 241 my ESKO WebCerter How permissions are inherited Documents that are not in a sub folder inherit project permissions By default folder permissions are inherited from the project but they may be overridden by the Project Manager as desired If a user is invited to a project and is also a member of an invited group then group permissions for that user are ignored and only the individual permissions for that user are considered If a user is not invited to a project but is a member of a group that is invited to the project the group permissions are used If the user belongs to more than one group that is invited to the project the permissions are combin
325. s Custom Filters for Annotations on page 137 CAD Info Icons The Information Bar on page 93 Easy guide for keyboard shortcuts Click or type in to see the guide Improved CAD widget CAD on page 125 HTML5 Collada Viewer e 3D View on page 111 89 ESKO P Viewing 3D in the HTML5 Collada Viewer on page 164 View Graphics with CAD Reference Viewing CAD with Graphics on page 159 View Document Attributes in the HTML5 Viewer Viewing Attributes on page 168 5 2 3 Opening a Document in the HTML5 Viewer To View and Annotate in the HTML5 Viewer you have to set your Viewer Type in the Viewer on page 40 Preferences To open a document in the Viewer click the document s thumbnail or the button You can do this from e the My Work page under My Approval if you have documents to approve or under Approvals to Follow Up if you are an Approval Master e the Documents tab in the project e the header of the Document Details page e Click on the View and Annotate link in the Documents Bill Of Material page To load multiple documents into the Viewer select them and choose Actions gt View and Annotate To open a document in 3D click m from the CAD on page 125 widget or the Document Select widget Read more in Opening Documents in the 3D Viewer on page 16 and Viewing 3D in the HTML5 Collada Viewer on page 164 5 2 4 The Viewer Window go The HTML5 Viewer comes with a number of powerful tools that make it easy to nav
326. s Discussions you can add a comment if you wish Click Start a New Discussion if there is no discussion yet or Reply if there is one enter your Message 4 Click the Complete Task button This sets the task status to Completed 12 6 Overview of My Group s Tasks My Group s Tasks lets the Group Manager quickly view the tasks assigned to their group or group members It also allows to assign re assign or distribute the tasks among the group members If a group member is ill or not available the Group Manager can re assign the task to an other group member A Group Manager can also monitor the progress on a selected Group or Group Member Using the filter options the Group Manager can have a quick overview of the workload 12 6 1 Group Task Manager Every department has a Department Manager In WebCenter Department Manager are referrred to as Group Manager A group can have any number of Group Managers including 0 Group Manager is always part of a group A Group Manager likes to view the tasks assigned to a selected group or group members which will assist him in distributing the tasks and also get a quick view on the current status of a task The My Group s Tasks feature allows Group Managers to e View task assignments for a selected group and the workload overview e View tasks assigned to a group member and the workload overview e Re assign any task assigned to a group member e Review the task overview filtering on status
327. s are still there However when downloading the document from WebCenter the changes will not be visible They are only visible in the editor In the document details page header a warning should be shown that there is a draft version of the document When a user saves his document as New Version it will be saved on both the CHILI server and WebCenter The previous version will be restored to its original state in case there was a draft version When saving as a new version a version comment is required It is also possible to start approval and set a due date When saving a linked document the user will also get the option to select in which projects the document needs to be updated Using and Updating WebCenter Attributes from the CHIL editor In a CHILI document variables can be defined Filling out those variables will change certain fields in the document When loading the document in the CHILI editor attributes can be pushed to the editor If an attribute in WebCenter either project or document attribute where document attribute gets priority has the same name as a variable in the CHILI document the value in CHILI can automatically be filled out The user will be asked if he wants the variables to be updated when opening the editor on a clean document without a draft version After this the user will always be able to synchronize the values on demand by clicking the load attribute values button This update button can b
328. s brings the design and the environment forward 190 WebCenter Ee Use z to zoom out this sends the design and the environment back 8 9 Approving 3D Files Collada files can be approved like any other document in WebCenter You can approve reject or comment a Collada file from e your My Work page e the project s Documents tab e the document s Approval tab e the 3D Viewer at the bottom left of the window 191 EI Esko PONa 9 Working with ArtiosCAD Documents You can open your document in the ArtiosCAD application directly from the WebCenter server Note This is possible if 1 the document is recognized as any of the following types e Design ARD and other structural design formats supported by ArtiosCAD e Manufacturing MFG and other structural manufacturing formats supported by ArtiosCAD e 3D A3D 2 you have been granted rights to download the native ArtiosCAD files by the system administrator 3 you have been given the download permission to the project folder where the document resides e From the Document Search Results page you may see the Open in ArtiosCAD link even when you do not have the download permission When you attempt download you will receive an error message 4 WebCenter Preferences gt General Preferences gt ArtiosCAD gt Open ArtiosCAD documents is set to either the ArtiosCAD Standard Edition or the ArtiosCAD Enterprise edition 9 1 Canvas The ArtiosCAD Canvas typ
329. s in the dedicated Page List views Tip Only Fastimpose impositions are recognized as Page Lists in WebCenter Multi page files uploaded from within WebCenter except multi page PDFs uploaded specifically as a page list or from Odystar Nexus or even other Automation Engine documents will never be treated as Page Lists Instead they are considered regular multi page PDF documents 2 Page List Views 174 When you want to examine approve or reject a Page List you have the choice of a number of views in which to do so Page List Displays the pages in the imposition in a table For every page the Folio Sheet Name Sheet Side for page lists uploaded from Automation Engine Thumbnail Page Version List Version and Uploaded Date are displayed WebCenter Finally the approval status per page is listed and pages that have annotations are marked with a post it icon Page List Information Document Information Approval Action History Projects Attributes Discussions 0 Page List Page Gallery Page Information General Ink Information References Page List Approve Selected Pages Reject Selected Pages Hide Thumbnails Approve All Pages Reject All Pages C Status Index View Page Version List Version Uploaded Date Approve Reject Annotation Upload New Version nD CG 1 1 1 Nov 26 2010 at 11 18 AM Ed Upload New Version o 2 ia 1 1 Nov 26 2010 at 11 18 AM E 2 Upload New Version o 3 E 1 1 Nov 26 2010 a
330. s list will overwrite the previously added values For example add all project attributes as project attributename e You can type in a text value or use SmartNames to specify the workflow parameter in the right column Note The default behavior is to send no parameters unless specified However if you had enabled the Map attributes to Workflow Parameters in a previous version all the above options except the Define Custom List are sent by default Walt Use this node to pause the workflow for a certain amount of time for example to wait for a user action The next node will start processing after the wait time is over Parameters In Release date enter the date at which you want the workflow to stop waiting and start processing again You can use one of the following formats dd mm yyyy dd mm yyyy dd mm yyyy mm dd yyyy mm dd yyyy mm dd yyyy By default this is set to the current date using the SmartName Current Date You can set it using any SmartName that resolves to a date not only the SmartNames from the Date category but also for example an Attributes or Specifications category SmartName resolving to a date Note When using an attribute or specification SmartName the attribute category must be set on the project in which you run the workflow or the specification must be set on the workflow task In Days offset Hours offset Minutes offset and Seconds offset you can add a number of days hours minutes
331. s will be the length of the block For started statuses it will first subtract what is already consumed and only add the remainder potentially nothing to the block This way the time line is extended 2 ESKO sesame 28 Example Project is in status 3 we have status 1 2 3 and 4 For status 1 and 2 the system knows the actual dates so this is simple to display For status 3 it displays the status 3 color until today Then it looks how long status 3 is supposed to take from the task logic Say this is 10 days If 7 days are passed since status 3 started it will estimate that status 3 will take another 3 days totally disregarding the due dates Then for status 4 it will look how long that is supposed to take Say this is 5 days It will simply add this to estimated end of status 3 All this happens on business days so skipping weekends The display is optimized for the use case of purely subsequent stages It will do its best to show something logical for all other situations Using the Calendar View with Planning When using this view you will see 2 lines for each project a colored line and a grey line e The colored line behaves identical to the calendar view with predictions e This grey line shows the planned project time line based on the project tasks For each project status it will look for a task which completes this project status and for this task it will take the due date This will determine the
332. sCAD Enterprise Edition the system will launch ArtiosCAD Enterprise 14 desktop application To open documents in ArtiosCAD Enterprise edition use the same buttons as described Also enter your login credentials for the WebCenter server 195 EI cskos The document will be loaded to the ArtiosCAD Enterprise workspace in manage document mode In this mode you can publish the updated version to the same WebCenter project to which the document belonged 196 WebCenter 10 Discussions in VWeboCenter In WebCenter you can have simple message boards called discussions for projects and individual documents Anyone with View permission for a project or document may start or participate in an ongoing discussion about any subject Project discussions and document discussions work the same way When entering information in a discussion the Subject field is limited to 256 characters and the Message field is limited to 800 characters 10 1 Start a New Discussion Go to the Project or document in which you wish to start a discussion Click Discussions gt Start a new discussion Enter a topic for the discussion in the Subject field and a message in the Message field A GO N Click Finish The discussion is created and you are presented with a list of common subsequent actions 10 2 View a Discussion 1 Go to the Project or document containing the discussion to view 2 Click Discussions The most recent discussions are sh
333. secscsecessesssersecsssstesteseeevsetasseresiesensaseratiena 67 4 9 Viewing the Action FAIS UON Yeon cas fa ese Baas aa a a baal 68 4 10 Viewing ArtiOSCAD Meta data c cc ccccccccccscsssssersssssssscssssssscersssssessecesssscerssesessecesesssessvssesessesesesserasesess 68 AA RUMANO a Froe REDO aina Na A AENA 70 5 Phe WED GCHLCI NCW CIS in gtcrcsanotucuedeocian dinate E A 71 9 1 NS Ve WOW Ch asaan het Boater caw tdaas ect lhe Relat E oooh cashes etacecevsa eh aed cg SA 71 5 1 1 Opening a Document in the Java VIEWED cccccccccccsececetecsceecsssecessesersssecssstsetassetesssiecarseerasiean 71 pte Viewer Sample Sonra testa vaste Pe tec lee O bh ad 74 5 1 3 More Help with the VIEWED cccccccccseccsecsccecsscsssesscsecsesesssavsecscsesssessssavsessssesssesesavsesssiesisesetanenna 80 5 1 4 Viewing RIPped Data in the WebCenter VIEWED cece ices 81 92 The HATMES WOW ON ecco a see essctce saat aaa a aae aE a E EEEN 88 9 2 LADOUt the HIMES VIC WON sia sential steers T E atari na E 88 5 2 2 What is New in th HTMLS Viewer e encicennnnan a ental dune a a 89 5 2 3 Opening a Document in the HTMLS VIEWER cc cccccccetececeecsesecscsesecsssetssseecarsetesseerareeetes 90 SZ A The Viewer WIMNdOW eein ena aE A A E NE oanannee 90 39 29 THe Mormaii Bai iasi r EV EEEO EE S 93 ILLOD TOORN orrea E 95 S2 MOC CIES Fe Cease rss dees et eee N AN A eae ann 105 D 2o Pae HS Ta a eR ee a ee ee eer re ene eee etree 107 o9 PATIO UAT IO MA MN SU a chases ele nein
334. sisseseririrsrrresirirsrredinirnitrenritsnnrisrkitriren itinin trenera ri eranen 231 115 0 Start or Stop the Approval Cy Cl Sica wis cussessedvecairnsncashaasten n a 239 11927 Eding AD ProVall SENINGS resa ana aa a a a aA 239 S S FOIOwWwNO tO ONAN DE OV GUIS areni tics a a E R e aA 240 11 5 9 When is an Approval Cycle FIniShed 0 0 0 ccc ccccccccscsecscssecssseecsssecssseecsssecessesscavseesssecanieeeea 240 Me skos vi 11 6 Forcibly Accept or Reject DOCUMENTS ccc tscscsetecetsrsetssersstecsstersetsseristesitaretssenisisiiarieds 241 Vict Froect and DOCUMENT ECUN y aeran R R EE N EAE 241 Ferter eccy On AFren E a acct tienes thi T 242 11 8 Reassign a Project to Another Project Managet cccccccccccecceccsscstesecsrecssscssteseceretsserisisetarees 244 E Greate a USEE ne E A A E N eo aeteeeanrene nanan 244 11 10 Editing Users and their PreferenceS sesssssrnensrneninrinnnrnuntnrkanittntannnt ut tnrkruNENAAENANEEEENEEENEEEEEENEE EEPE EE EEEE Errea 245 11 10 1 Edit a 2 cane nO ne ne en rArANENEAANENANEANENENENEENENANEENENENENEEEENENENEEPEPEEEEEEEEEEEEE oe 245 11 10 2 Change the Password for a USEF cccccccccccecsccscsssececsssecsvssesssseevssessssesevssieesiesevssietessneranieen 245 11 10 3 Set the Preferences for a USED cc ccccccssecscresietscsesscsrsrssesssesetsressiissessetetenn 246 11 10 4 Copy Preferences to USES ccc ccccetscssssstecscssessscsrssesssecssesessscsresssseesssetsessreseseessesenes 246 12 Task Mana
335. sk specific and has SmartNames enabled tabs e Parameters e Specifications e Due Date e terate e Notifications e Output Note Click the icon to use SmartNames in this node Parameters lab WebCenter Task Type 2 1 Document Brief Name 2 1 Document Brief Description status In Progress Assignee Select Role Role Project Manager Assign To One of Role 6 Select Group 6 Select User The name of the task By default the name will be derived from the Task Type When a task is executed multiple times the task name will automatically get the suffix _1 _2 and so forth Name Description Type in a fixed description for the task assignee Status The initial status of the node By default the drop down will have the following statuses e Created e In Progress e Completed Note It will list all the statuses configured in the task type Read in Add Task Statuses on page 266 Update the task if existing By default this is off The task will create a new a task Enable this to update the task if it already exists If this happens the task will get back 307 13 13 308 WebCenter from a completed status to an in progress status Specify the task assignee e Select Role Default e Select Group e Select User Read more below Task Type Assignments Select Role default You can select the assignee from a SmartName enabled drop down with all
336. st and clicking Go e To sort the list of projects click the column header of the field on which you want to sort For example click the Created column header to sort on project creation date This preference is saved in your profile so it will become your new default sort option e To view a project click its name e Add to Favorites adds the selected projects to your list of Favorite Projects e The Cart lets you download multiple projects or documents at once and also lets you e mail links to projects and documents The recipients must have user names and passwords for your WebCenter site in order to view the information when they click a link The Cart retains its contents only until you close the browser window or until you log off e Update Project s checks the version of each visible document in the selected projects and updates each document to its latest version if needed Delete deletes the selected projects To have somebody else manage one of your projects select the project click Change Manager in the Actions menu then select the new Project Manager and click Finish Projects Am Invited to Projects am invited to shows all the projects of which you are an invited member In the Actions menu are Add to Favorites Add to Cart and Update Project s e Filter the list of projects by entering a filter in the Show Projects field or by changing the value in the Modified list and clicking Go e To sort the list of pro
337. stalling the defaults which will create anew ACadDefaults_ project automatically in WebCenter e ACadDefaults lt version gt lt language code gt lt login name gt where lt login name gt Is the login name of an ArtiosCAD Enterprise and WebCenter user 229 my ESKOS WebCenter These projects are created when a WebCenter user logs into ArtiosCAD and defines defaults to work with ArtiosCAD will update them automatically if that user changes his her preferences in ArtiosCAD 11 5 Defining Approval Settings Document Folder and Project Approval Settings You can define approval settings at the document folder or project level You can also define approval settings on a number of documents in a folder or project Note Defining approval settings for a project or folder does not mean the project or folder itself is being approved Rather it means that users adding documents to the project can use these pre defined settings to save time and reduce the chance for error When you want to setup an approval cycle for a document you can define document level approval settings that will only be used for that document Setup Approval or Setup Staged Approval load the enclosing folder s approval settings if the document is in a folder that has approval settings defined Load Folder Approval Setup load the project s approval settings if it has approval settings defined Load Project Approval Setup use the defau
338. stem Automation Engine Odystar and Nexus can also upload documents to WebCenter In many cases it is beneficial to upload graphic files using a workflow system because e It is quicker and automated e The workflow system can do calculation in advance e You have better control over the generation of the view data when using Automation Engine e Upload from ArtiosCAD Use this to upload CAD files You can only upload one document at a time but you can make the project selection and document name automatic This makes uploading a one click operation Upload via Upload Document 1 Either go to the project folder you want to upload the document into and click the teles button or just click the Upload menu from anywhere 2 On the Upload page select the Project and Folder you will upload the document into if you are already in the project folder those are filled in automatically but you can still Change the Destination Note You can also click e Upload Multiple Documents to use the Java Applet to upload multiple documents e Copy Create Multiple New Documents to add multiple documents at once either from your computer from another project or from a template 3 Select the document to upload as explained below If you want to Upload a document saved on your Select Browse in the Source list and click the computer or network Browse button to open a browser dialog Note If you are uploading Cape
339. swatch will display the new channel color The Revert button resets the color definition back to the original The left and right arrows let you to step through all the channels from within the dialog Note Editing color definitions in the viewer does not change the actual image file Viewing a Channel Opaque Click on the Show Single Channel as Black Lad button to make the selected separation channel opaque Note This setting is remembered the next time you open the Viewer Right click r to get the options e show single channel in channel color In this setting you see the separation in its original color Black e show single channel as black You can view single channels in black instead of its defined display color 124 WebCenter e show single channel as black with show all effect This eases the detection of areas with small dots by using black rather than a grey value for a display pixel that represents a partially covered area in the channel Changing the Channel Order Select the channel you want to move and click either Shift the active channel up or Shift the active channel down arrow You may also drag a channel to a different position to change the order Moving the channels down will put them later in the printing sequence This would cover the other colors printed before Note This only changes the order in the Viewer and does not influence the actual printing sequence Revertin
340. t e Groups e Users e Roles the e mail will be sent to the current holders of this role in the project e Current Task Owner E mail Filled in by default Note This is not available in the Send Notification node In the Subject field type the subject of the e mail The subject can be configured using SmartNames In the Message field type the body of the e mail You can use the buttons and options at the top of the field to format your message 313 Ky ESKO WebCerter Tip Project name or a User name p Select some text and click to create a hyperlink e Use SmartNames Link to Current Task from the category Links and Current Task Due Date from the category Date Note This is not available in the Send Notification node Due Date Tab Due Date Tab Specifications Due Date Notification Due date Fixed lead time Based on date Current Date Lead Days 2 Lead Hours 0 Planning Forward Percentage lead time compressing Minimum lead days 0 Minimum lead hours 0 In this tab you can setup the due date by configuring the following fields according to your needs Fixed Lead Time Specify the Based on date as the reference This field is SmartName enabled and you can use values such as Current Date Workflow Duedate Workflow start date and any date attribute as the reference Also specify the Planning as either Forward or Backward The lead time is added or subtracted
341. t 11 18 AM Ed 2 Upload New Version G o 4 SEa 1 1 Nov 26 2010 at 11 18 AM Ed 2 Upload New Version Page Gallery Displays the pages in the imposition in a gallery view This gives you a quick overview of the approval status of the different pages Page List Information Document Information Approval Action History Projects Page List Page Gallery Page Information General Ink Information References Page Gallery Approve Selected Pages Reject Selected Pages Pages topped with a blue bar and icon have not been approved or rejected yet Pages topped with a green bar and icon have been approved Pages topped with a red bar and icon have been rejected Page List Information Displays basic information about the Page List number of pages binding This information is editable for documents that were uploaded using the WebCenter Upload feature 175 ESKOS a 7 3 Page Lists in the Viewer Page List specific features The Viewer has a number of features that make working with Page List documents even more intuitive e Reader spread mode e Page List panel e Show margins Trim boxes option fel E w Project Brune s Approval Project Document Celebrity pdfPage2 Zof4 siti Version 2 1 lq 4 2 of 4 gt bl User Berg Brune Ak E Gi x Page list Inspect Measure Compare Annotate i i Navigator OOOO O Daa de Taa all 2h eh eel lax i EOR 0o09 793 98 AU
342. t Cart General Preferences ArtiosCAD Canvas Support Canvas on page 192 WebCenter 3 Getting Started with WebCenter Use WebCenter to search for information and manage projects Anyone can search for information but only Project Managers can manage projects This document includes documentation for the most common and often used features but you will find other features and abilities as you explore the site 3 1 Opening WebCenter 1 Open your web browser and navigate to http yourservername WebCenter Inst or the URL that your system administrator has provided Note e Ona PC using Microsoft Windows only version 6 0 and later of Internet Explorer and version 1 5 or later of Mozilla Firefox are supported for use with WebCenter For optimal use on Internet Explorer a more recent version is recommended however Google Chrome is also supported e On Mac OS X Safari Mozilla Firefox and Google Chrome are supported for use with WebCenter 2 Once the page loads enter your user name and password in the appropriate fields and click Log In Note lf your administrator has enabled this you can click the Forgot Password link in the Log In page if you can t remember your password Enter your Username or E Mail address in the pop up that opens and click Request New Password You will then receive an e mail with a temporary password and a link to the Log In page After logging in you will be asked to change your password
343. t be able to create tasks or task types and these features won t appear in your user interface 12 1 What You Can Do with Task Management A task is work or part of the work that you assign to a project member with a specific due date A task has aname a description a status due date estimated date starting date a specification a checklist and a discussion forum Use tasks to e assign human tasks to project members groups or roles The assignees or group of assignees will get a notification by e mail and via their To Do list You can describe the task via the task description free text the task specification structured data or via the checklist You can restrict the task type to a dedicated Main Assignee e create task sequences You can connect the tasks in a way to launch the next task automatically on completion of the preceding task Alternatively you may set a delay to start the task automatically This feature allows you to build automated workflows that flow from one project member to another You can also set the Project Status to be completed when the tasks are completed e monitor critical tasks Use the Gantt chart to view the tasks in their time line You can monitor the status of the critical tasks according the project delivery time line e project definition Define what parts constitute a project These parts can be human tasks but can often also be physical components to deliver for example all the p
344. t for workflows which are already started from another workflow Note When a workflow is re launched WebCenter automatically makes sure that any dependent tasks will depend on the new workflow task rather than on the cancelled one 329
345. t from the My Work or the Document Details page To approve reject or comment a document from the Document Details page 1 Go to the Approval tab 2 Click J Approve 4 approve the document Reject o reject it 7 Comment tg comment it Force Approve to force approve it if you are a Project Manager Force Reject force reject it if you are a Project Manager 171 ae Esko 3 In the pop up that opens do the following if you are you can approving or force approving the document set a condition for your approval if the approval cycle allows this see Allow Conditional Approval or Noton page 22 select Set Approval Condition and type your condition in the box rejecting or force rejecting the document type a reason for your rejection in the box commenting the document type your comment in the box 4 Enter your password if your WebCenter server requires it 5 Depending on your choice click Commit Approval Commit Rejection or Commit Comment Once you have approved or rejected the document you may not change its approval status later only a Pending status allows future changes lf you have entered an approval condition a rejection reason or a comment it will be shown in e the Approval tab of the Document Details page e the Action History tab of the Document Details page e o the Java Viewer s Document History panel e the HITML5 Viewer s Approval Details panel To
346. t of managed groups You can only view the tasks for one group at a time 2 The workload overview appears for the selected group Members Task Count Before Of0 overdue ADMINS After Of0 overdue admin admin Before lz 2 overdue IL ADMIN After let2 overdue aT Before ME 2 23 overdue ADMIN After ME overdue If the task is past the due date it appears in red 258 WebCenter Reassigning a lask A Group Manager can re assign a task to a group or a group member A task can be re assigned only to a group member within the same Group In addition to this when the task is reassigned the WebCenter UI displays the previous assignee in Previous column 1 Note Ensure to log in as Group Manager 1 The task list for assigned group appears Note If a Group Manager manages or is assigned to multiple groups WebCenter displays the list of managed groups You can only view the tasks for one group at a time 2 Select the new assignee in the Assigned to drop down list box This list contains group and group members name 3 WebCenter shows changed tasks with a yellow background indicating the change Task Name Project Name Assigned to Previous Replace empty group 1 DEKE test copy without approvals Shifu SHIFL wt GROUP_IMPORT TEST ooo1 Note Even if a task is not initially assigned to a group the Group Manager has all the rights to re assign the task to a group member 4 Click Save to commit th
347. t the top right under Welcome Contact Logout You re logged in as Brune Welcome Contact Logout Projects Hey Keyword searches in the header automatically have an appended to them Normal Searching 1 In the Search menu click Projects Documents or Tasks depending on what you want to search 2 When using normal searching you see multiple fields to fill in Click Keyword Search to search on keywords alone To switch from keyword to normal searching click the More options link 3 Enter search terms in the fields as desired Note e To search for Documents or Projects based on attributes e click the Attributes link e select the Attribute Category e specify the values of the Attributes you are searching for e and click Add to return to the Search page e To search for Documents or Projects based on characteristics e click Characteristics e select the desired items in the characteristics tree or Find more characteristics You can choose to search on any of or all of the items selected Click Add to return to the Search page Searching on attributes and characteristics is available only using normal searching WebCenter Tip You can search for documents based on their Approval Status select either a single approval status or e All Approved to select documents with any approved status Approved Approved with comments Force Approved or Force Approved with comments e All Rejected
348. t to add the attribute to the project s attribute category an error Proje oe mana e iMNere iS Uline is shown e f you choose a role to assign the Project Manager the current project is checked for the assignment of that role A unique User or Group should be assigned to that role If more than one group user is assigned to the you will receive a warning e f you assign a Group at least one of the group members should be a Project Manager e If you assign a User the user should be a Project Manager e lf you choose an attribute to assign the Project Manager the attribute should resolve to the user name of a user or the name of a group Documents Tab In this tab you can set options to copy the incoming documents to the project or projects being created WebCenter Copy No Copy Copy incoming Documents Target Folder Name Copy incoming Documents as link Copy incoming Documents as new version if they already exist Raise revision if Document already exists also raises Document version Copy Viewer Annotations not possible for remote WebCenter Do not copy incoming Documents e Copy Documents default lets you copy the documents to the new project e Folder Name specify the target folder in this field If you leave it empty it will take the root folder as the target folder e Copy incoming documents as Link enable this to copy the documents as links in the new p
349. tasks in a Gantt Chart You can display them by Day Week or Month and you can choose to view the Original Estimated or New dates M Show Hide Gantt Chart experimental 5 6 11 6 2011 12 6 18 6 2011 19 6 25 6 2011 26 6 2 7 2011 3 7 9 7 2011 10 7 16 7 2011 Task Name Lead Time Start Date Due Date 6 7 8 9 1011 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 2930 1 2345 6 7 8 10111213 1415 16 1 Get translated text 14 days Jun 15 2011 Jul 5 2011 Berg Brune 2 Design artwork 10 days Jun 6 2011 Jun 20 2011 Agency Design 3 Review the design 10 days Jun 20 2011 Jul 4 2011 E EE EE ee er Debbie 4 Implement Corrections 5 days Jul 4 2011 Jul 11 2011 Agency Design 5 Make versions for different markets 2 days Jul 11 2011 Jul 13 2011 Berg Brune Powered by jsGantt Format Day O Week O Month View dates O Original O Estimated New 254 WebCenter Note You can also shift due dates from the project s Tasks page select the desired tasks and click Change Due Date in the actions menu 12 4 5 Task Discussions You can start a discussion on a task by clicking Edit Task Details then Discussions Task discussions work in the same way as document discussions 12 5 Working on Tasks Assigned to You To work on a task assigned to you you can either e click the link to the task in the notification email you received e click the task name in the My Tasks section of your My Work page e inthe project details pag
350. tations visible ruler endpoints or ruler read outs When multiple windows are active either the composite of all the channels or the selected channels will be printed When you select this option you have to specify the following Parameters e Resolution Specify the resolution and resolution units opmm pixels per millimeter ppcm pixels per centimeter or ppi pixels per inch here The default value is 150 ppi converted to ppmm e Print Current View Area Enable this to print only the current view area Do not check this when you want the entire image to be printed By default this remains unchecked WebCenter e Print only selected channels If only some of the channels are selected select the option You will get all the channels in the print if this is unchecked Print an overview of all the annotations If you use this option you get the same result as from the WebCenter annotations printing If the viewer is in Compare mode choose to e Print annotations of the current document e Print annotations of the reference document You will be prompted to save the annotations before printing The unsaved annotations will not be printed When you click Print in the dialog a print preview will open in a new tab or window Use the Print link from this preview Note The paper size is not considered in this setting This has to be specified in the print setting of the browser 5 2 6 Top Tool Panel The top tools
351. te e edit text e delete an annotation or a reply the Save in the Annotation List on page 109 warns that there are unsaved annotations or unsaved deletions Save these annotations or changes by either clicking this icon or by using the Save option in the Annotation Pop up on page 130 Annotation List All users All Review States ADMIN ADMIN Sep 3 2013 Hello from admin A message will indicate that the messages were saved successfully Viewing Annotations When you open an annotated document the annotations will be visible on the document and in the Annotation List on page 109 panel If you select an annotation either in the annotation list or in the image this will be highlighted in the annotation list panel You will also see the possible options concerning the annotation and its replies Note The time will be displayed as 5h ago or yesterday To see the exact time hover over the displayed time Tip If you click and hold the left mouse button on an annotation in the annotation list the annotation becomes highlighted in the view Step Through Annotations t You can step through all the listed annotations using the f button By default it will step through each annotation After the last one it will return to the first annotation again Tip Hold the Shift and click to to step backwards When you select an annotation its comment window will appear You can set your preferred step through se
352. te a Restricted Set containing the people or groups that will be used to assign the role in the task e Use the Text Type e For groups use the exact group names e For users use this format Lastname Firstname username Make sure this is spelled correctly especially the username See the Administration Guide for details 2 Create a Specification from the Task Types gt Specifications menu with the same name as the role and add the Restricted Set you just created 3 Create a Task Type that allows assigning roles with your restricted set values Note You can do this part yourself if you have the User Can Create Task Type permission It is possible to assign multiple users groups to the same role in case you use the option Allow Multiple Values for your specification In the Select available specifications screen of the Create New Task Type wizard a Select Assign roles from task specifications b Add the Specification you just created 4 Asa Project Manager create a task from the task type your Administrator created Assign it to the person who needs to take the decision who to assign the role to For example assign it to the Marketing Manager to have him her choose a design agency for this project 5 When you run the project the assignee will get the task on his her My Work page and will assign the role with the appropriate user or group Task Assign a design agency to this project Edit Task Details
353. ter A E Mailling Links to Documents and Projects You can send links to documents and Projects with any MAPI compliant messaging program Note The recipient s must be able to log in to your WebCenter system and have the appropriate permissions to view the documents or Projects referenced by the links 6 Click the Cart Select the documents or Projects you want to send Navigate to the document or Project Click Add to Cart in the Document Actions or Project Actions menu You can also add multiple documents or Projects to the cart Simply repeat this step button Click Mail To in the Actions menu A message opens containing links to the documents or Projects in the body of the e mail Address the message as desired and send it as usual Tip To send only one message containing links to both documents and Projects leave both messages open and cut and paste links between messages as desired 4 8 E Malling Links to Download Documents You can send a link to download a certain document or multiple documents to non WebCenter users This link will only enable the recipient to download one specific file and has a fixed validity number of days that the link is available To use this functionality an Admin user first needs to enable it and set the validity for the download link See the Administration Guide for details This functionality is available to Project Members that have Download permission for
354. the container in the Folder field in the format file aeserver containername You can use SmartNames in all of these fields Workflow Parameters Tab To map your WebCenter project attributes to the Workflow parameters in Automation Engine specify them in this tab Note This is only supported if you use Automation Engine 12 1 or newer Read also Add Documents from Automation Engine Add Document properties Add all Project Attributes Add all Document Attributes Add all Task Specifications Define custom list Parameter Name Parameter Value document description Document Description WelbCenter e Add Project Properties to add the WebCenter project properties as Automation Engine workflow parameters e Add Document Properties to add the project properties as parameters e Add All Project Attributes to add all the project attributes They will be available as project attributename in Automation Engine e Add All Document Attributesto add all the document attributes They will be available as document attributename in Automation Engine e Add All Task Specifications to add specifications e Define Custom List to type in the specific parameter names and specify their values manually in the resulting columns below You have the following options that you can enable e In the left column specify the workflow parameter name It will show up as that workflow parameter name in Automation Engine Note Thi
355. they are editable in the Attributes section Attention Certain attributes can be required Those have a red asterisk If the template project you copied from contains required attributes you cannot create the new project without filling them in For more information about attributes see Assigning Document Attributes on page 63 203 my ESKO WebCenter Uploading documents In project creation When a project manager creates a project based on a template or an existing project the document creation options as defined in the template are used to build the links in the Documents section and Bill Of Materials section The default values are Browse and Copy You can also have a template with a custom document creation set up In this setup For each row in the configuration a link is added to the document section in the same order as in the configuration Depending on the checked options in the Section column the link may be added to e the Project Creation Documents e the Project Creation Bill of Materials e Bill of Materials e Upload Copy or Create Multiple Documents Note The label of the link is taken from the configuration If the label is a tag that is found in the language file the translated label is shown You can have links as 204 Browse A new line is added to the document section where the user can upload the file Project Folder The user can select a project and a document in that proj
356. through it it will be canceled and reported in the Project History This typically happens when the workflow is stuck in an endless loop Retry a Workflow Node If you workflow failed due to an issue for example a missing approval setup and you have corrected the problem you can retry the workflow Right click on the failure icon the red ellipse and right click again to Retry Do this after you have fixed the issue that caused the workflow failure in this example by adding an approval setup to the project folder or document me Waiting for approval a Upload design Start Approval e Cycle Data Collector Edit design Example the user fixed the issue and clicks Retry 328 WelbCenter Data Collector Produce 5 E Start Approval Cycle Error Retry board selector png Errors One of the docume an approval started finish Edit design View Result of the operation the workflow has now started the approval The remains to indicate the workflow s history Relaunch a Workflow at a Certain Point A user with task edit rights Admin Project Manager and members with task edit rights can right click on any output pin with a number and request a relaunch This will re create a new workflow task that is similar to the task that gets relaunched 1 The workflow needs to be stopped first see Cancel a Workflow 2 This only works for first level workflows no
357. tion in the box commenting the page s type your comment in the box b Enter your password if your WebCenter server requires it c Click the Commit button 7 5 3 Use the Page List View 1 Navigate to the Page List in a Document list and click on its name The Document Details page appears 2 Select Page List from the menu 3 Select the pages you want to approve or reject and then click Approve Selected Pages or Reject Selected Pages You can also choose to Approve All Pages or Reject All Pages 4 In the pop up that opens a Optionally approving or force approving the set a condition for your approval if the page s approval cycle allows this See Allow Conditional Approval or Not on page 229 select Set Approval Condition and type your condition in the box rejecting or force rejecting the page s type a reason for your rejection in the box commenting the page s type your comment in the box b Enter your password if your WebCenter server requires it c Click the Commit button 180 WebCenter 6 Uploading and Updating Page Lists 7 6 1 Requirements for Page Lists Page Lists are supported in WebCenter from version 7 1 onwards Interaction with a Automation Engine production server is supported as follows Automation Engine 10 with Application Server For uploading use the Publish Imposition on WebCenter Chain ticket Automation Engine 12 with Application Server For uploading use the Pub
358. tions WebCenter is less than or equal to is less than is greater than or equal to is greater than lies between is not equal to You can specify one or two floating point values in the input field Note When you specify lies between the lower and upper limits will be taken in For example 4 lies between 4 and 6 To exclude 4 type in 4 00001 or 5 for an integer attribute When a project does not have the selected attribute not part of the attribute category the router will always take the no match route For Multi value Attributes lf you are routing based on a multi value attribute the values are compared individually to the specified rules For example if your Packaging Type attribute has values e Label Folding Carton and the rules e is equal to Label e is equal to Folding Carton the router will have two outgoing pins with tokens Using SmartNames If your rule value is a SmartName that resolves to a multi value attribute the rule is evaluated as OR If your packaging project has a language attribute with multiple values you may want to use this to filter the documents language variants with a Language attribute to direct them through different paths To do this e Configure your Router to route based on Project Attribute Languages e Configure your rule to specify Languages Document 321 13 Ky ESKO WebCerter G22 Route based on Project Attribute
359. tive Green Initiation Active Yellow Cancelled Non Active Red Warning Non Active Green The administrator can decide the sequence of the statuses This sequence is purely used for sorting When the projects are sorted based on Project Status this is the sequence used The sequence is system wide Pa WebCenter Apart from showing the Project Status in many project overview pages and also in the search results the project statuses can be used in the Workflows For example To decide different operations or assignees depending on the current project status Note By using the Set Project Status node in Workflow you can set the status for the current project In the following example let us consider six toll gate statuses to be allowed for the HADW556 project The Project Statuses are set as TGO TG1 TG2 TG3 TG4 and TG5 The WebCenter has many more statuses but only these statuses are allowed for this project The TGO to TG5 statuses are in this sequence in the entire system Note You can only decide per project whether you can have these statuses but you cannot change the sequence of the statuses per project Project HADW556 Status TG1 e Upload Manager Dewitte Hans Customer Upload Multiple Documents Dae thee Mail link to Modified Jun 12 2012 More actions Description bcuments 2 Tasks 1 Discussions 0 Characteristics Attributes Project Information Approval Notifications Members Se
360. to start it manually select Assignee can start task manually 10 If this task is crucial to the project you can decide to have its completion change the project s status for example mark it as Completed Select Completion of this task changes project status to and choose your desired project status 11 Click Create 12 4 2 Edit a Task Note You need the Change Task permission to be able to edit a project s tasks 1 In the project s Tasks tab click the Edit link next to a task to go to the Task Information page 2 Edit the task as desired and click Change 201 T 2 S KO X WebCenter Note You can also edit the tasks assigned to you from the task execution page see Working on Tasks Assigned to Youon page 259 by clicking the Edit Task Details link if you have the Change Task permission 12 4 3 Restricting a Task to Project Roles or Groups Allowed Assignee You can enable a setting to restrict the task assignment to a Role Group that is specified in a Project or Project Template You can then create a task from this task type with an Allowed Assignee setting This will restrict the task assignee to the Role or Group Note This feature is restricted to administrator users N OF P Create a Task Type In the Edit Task Type page enable the option Enable setting an Allowed Assignee Group or Role to restrict who can be assigned to a task of this Task Type in the General Information tab Save t
361. tting in Annotation Options on page 135 You can set your preference as any of the four options available WebCenter Step by decreasing date This mode will step through all annotation comments and replies sorted according to their modification dates Step by thread This is the default mode Will step through each annotation but not through the replies to the annotations Step by thread fit view Same as by thread but will zoom the view to fit the selected annotation Step by area position fit view Will step through all positions areas of linked annotation and zoom the view to fit the selected annotation part Annotation Options Step through Options You may choose to step through the annotation in any of the following ways Step by decreasing date This mode will step through all annotation comments and replies sorted according to their modification dates Step by thread This is the default mode Will step through each annotation but not through the replies to the annotations Step by thread fit view Same as by thread but will zoom the view to fit the selected annotation Step by area position fit view Will step through all positions areas of linked annotation and zoom the view to fit the selected annotation part Show only selected annotation or pop up Use these two options to set the visibility of annotation and annotation pop ups in the view This helps in simplifying the view by displaying only targeted
362. ttribute DC _ Artwork Draft Approval Case sensitive Document Attribute is Yes no match All attributes in the system WebCenter Decide where to go based on naming conventions of the incoming document Your incoming documents will be routed and put on the right pin based on the name Example If you have three documents A jpg B jpg and C png with two rules contains jpg and contains png e the two jog documents will be in the output pin jog These two will follow the workflow together and the png document will be in the png pin If you are including the file extension you can check for types of files using ends with rule Route to Yes No Error Decide where to go based on a document attribute such as Packaging Type which can have values like Label Folding Carton Corrugated Box etc The incoming documents will be checked for the specified attribute and will be moved to the right pin based on the first matched rule If you route on a multi value attribute of the document that document can occur on multiple output pins each value is evaluated separately which is in line with routing on a multi value project attribute or task specification 328 IK ESKO WebCenter Read about using different types of attributes and SmartNames in Routing on attribute values on page 320 Routing on Workflow Specifications All specifications of the wor
363. tus that applies to all the documents you selected p Q Approved under Condition Version 1 Stage Stage2 Stagel Stagel WebCenter Due Date Finished Date Project Aug 18 2010 at 4 00 PM Aug 18 2010 at 4 00 PM Aug 13 2010 at 4 00 PM Aug 9 2010 at 8 24 AM AE Uploads AE Uploads Brune Approval Brune s Approval Project Brune Approval Brune s Approval Project Brune Approval Click a document name to go to the document or click the project name to go to the project Note that the behavior may be different in case you are using a simplified My Work page To load multiple documents into the Viewer select their checkboxes and click View and Annotate To approve reject or comment multiple documents select their checkboxes and click or In the pop up that opens enter your comment if applicable and your password if required by your server and click Commit Note For Page List documents the My Work page also displays the number of pages that have already been approved as well as the total number of pages Indirectly Assigned Group Tasks If you are a Group Representative you will be the preferred assignee when a Role is assigned to this Group So the related approvals and tasks appear in your My Approvals or My Tasks sections on My Work page When the Group Representative is absent any of the Group Members can do the tasks on his or her behalf To do this
364. u can assign a Document Reference Attribute in your graphics file to refer to a CAD Overlay To use this feature you need a few Attributes with specific names These are created automatically during installation or update of your WebCenter e CAD OFFSET X distance e CAD OFFSET Y distance e CAD ORIENTATION integer e CAD REFERENCE document reference e Add the CAD REFERENCE attribute to a new category or an existing category You can name this category according to your needs a Configure a document source for your CAD overlay files Read in Adding Document Sources for a Document Reference Attribute Edit Category MIPE Linked CAD Name MIPE Linked CAD Current View Default Y Add Creation View Add Header View Add View Edit Terminology Alternating background Show also Attribute types and Restricted Set types Keep session alive avoid that people get logged off due to time out Remove Grid Layout A af ributes 5 S E 08 B insert ame 2 i remap CAD_REFERENCE dl DocumentLink1 ibu CAD_REFERENCE Label Text an design list 00 Change Category 00 Change Order Number y 00 Item Category 00 Item Number s re eference Category CAD_ALIGNMENT_ATTRIBUTES Worktlow Version Mode Selected Revision Source s CAD_REFERENCE_Default i JEdit Confi uration ana a
365. u select this the document reference link will be updated to the latest version of the document Note When you update the referred document the document link will point to the latest version regardless of the Change Properties permissions in the Project gt Security tab Selected Version Use this setting if your document reference link should point to a certain version always In this case the document reference will not be updated to point to the latest version when a new version of the reference document is uploaded Selected Revision When you choose this the document reference will always point to the latest version of the selected revision Note When you update the referred document the link will source the latest version of the selected revision regardless of the Change Properties permissions in the Security tab Reference Category To apply a reference category to the document reference select from the drop down listing all the attribute categories 2a 12 WebCenter eS Note Rich text attributes and document reference attributes cannot be used as reference attributes You can use a reference category which is an attribute category to assign certain attributes to the document reference link This is very useful when the property is not linked to the product or the component specifically You can use reference categories to specify properties of the reference links Edit or Delete Specif
366. ually Automatically at Thu Sep 20 2012 10 30 due date minus lead time Automatically after predecessors complete Automatically after predecessors complete and after Thu Sep 20 2012 10 30 due date minus lead time Automatically after project creation T Assignee can start task manually Completion of this task changes project status to Completed gt create cancel 12 8 Linking Documents to Tasks One of the strengths of Task management is the ability to link documents to tasks 261 12 ESKO WebCenter Documents always sit in a folder in a project The link to Tasks is optional and comes on top of the positioning inside a folder Note If a default folder was defined in the Task Type setup new files will automatically be uploaded to that default folder The user can still change the folder manually in the upload dialog 12 8 1 Why Link Documents to Tasks Linking a document to a task gives purpose to the document Without task management the purpose of the documents in a project is implicit You typically figure out what they represent through their name through their Attributes or through the name of the folder they are in Most documents linked to a task are one of the following The result of the task Creation type tasks end normally with a digital asset resulting from the creative work Good examples are ArtiosCAD ARD files or PDF files etc The current state of the task When the task is not
367. uent users may want to switch to the Signed not sandboxed option to avoid always having to click an extra warning away when printing from the Viewer Mac OSX 10 6 users running Java 1 6 0 may also want to switch to the Signed not sandboxed option to avoid getting a warning when closing the Viewer by clicking With the latest versions of Java 1 7 installed most browsers block unsigned applets by default In this situation it is recommended to use one of the signed settings instead Viewer Style sets the Viewer mode as e Normal Default All HTML5 Viewer features are available in this mode e Restricted In this mode the user cannot access features such as Channels widget CAD widget and View widget The side panels displaying the widgets will be in a collapsed format by default e Advanced Java Viewer only All HTML5 Viewer features are available in this mode In Java Viewer features will be activated Specify the Viewer Quality as e Best Performance Default In this mode the Viewer uses lossy compression to transfer images These images are transferred faster but may contain small compression artifacts e Best Quality In this mode the Viewer uses lossless compression to transfer images It takes longer to transfer these images However you can view them without compression artifacts Note This setting is applicable to both the HTML5 and Java Viewers Annotation Color sets the color in which annotations will
368. ufacturing MFG documents Manufacturing Information Document Information Approval A Manufacturing Print Items View Manufacturing Width x Length 1169 71 x 878 29 mm Run Length 0 Die Press Example die press Metric Printing Press No Printing Grain Flute Direc tion Board Code Note Older document versions or document versions uploaded from ArtiosCAD Enterprise client 14 0 1 or earlier will not show these data 69 ESKO sesame 4 1 Running a Project Report 10 You can run pre configured project reports from the projects you have access to if your Admin has given you access to these reports see the Administration Guide for more information Note This only includes project reports System wide reports are available from the Search menu 1 In the project go to More actions gt Run Project Report 2 If you can run several reports for this project select the desired report on the Run Report for project page 3 If the report requires parameters specify them mandatory parameters are marked by an and click the Run Now button WebCenter D The WebCenter Viewers 5 1 The Java Viewer 5 1 1 Opening a Document in the Java Viewer To open a document in the Viewer 1 Click the document s thumbnail or the amp button You can do this from e the My Work page under My Approval if you have documents to approve or under Approvals to Follow Up if you are an Approval Master e th
369. ust be a Value tag for each Name tag 11 2 5 Export Project Attributes 210 WebCenter automatically names the exported file lt Project name gt attrs jdf Note Any periods in the project name will be converted to underscores Log in as a project manager Open the project with the attributes to export Click Attributes Click Export A N WelbCenter 5 Click Save browse to the desired location and click Save 11 2 6 Import Project Attributes Log in as a project manager Navigate to the project with the attributes to import Click Attributes In the Import from JDF file field enter the path and name of the file or click Browse and select the JDF file 5 Click Import A GO N The values for existing attributes are updated if necessary Note If there are either too few or too many attributes defined in the file as compared to the project WebCenter will mention it in a status message 11 2 7 Update a Project If you have a document that is linked in many Projects and upload a new version into only one Project the links in other Projects continue to reference the prior version 1 Open the Project to update 2 Click Update on the Project Actions menu 3 All documents in the Project are updated A list is shown of the updated document s the containing Project the old version number and the new version number Tip To update more than one Project at once get a list of the Pr
370. utomatically set according to your modified criteria You can see your selection on the top left hand side In this example it brings out the results under sub brands Color Innovation and Speed from all types of Packaging for all Product lines Note You can change the result layout from list layout to grid layout by clicking on Show as Grid Graphical Browsing in the Asset Browser Graphical Browsing is possible when the administrator has configured the Attributes with associated images Image browsing is straightforward like tree browsing and an example is given below 32 WebCenter AssetDemo Show Top Image Panel v Brand Esko Value Document Name DoS E Sub Brand Color OR Innovation Packaging Display OR Primary Packaging Sub Type Product Type Lubricants OR Specia Variant Search Select criterion v Current Selection Brand Esko Value Color S Brand Esko Value Innovation ESKO Brand Esko Value Speed MO S Packaging Display gt ff Y Profit Packaging Primary Packaging Secondary Esko Value Packaging Tertiary Product Lubricants Color Error Expert Green Innovation Profit Speed Product Speciality Your cart is empty Found 10 items Show as Li Actions J Name Color Tray zae Name Color Tray zae Name Shrink Wrap 6 Pack Bottles Orange ai Name Description Description Description Description Project
371. v p Version Approval i x L AN_BioOrigGriechFeta45 pdf a e The My Work gt My Approvals page Pages Waiting for Approval 42 Total Number of Pages 42 Juice 6 Pack Bottle Box pdf Gl vr A a Ea e The Document search results Note For this option to be available enable Search gt Documents gt Show Result Layout Options gt Document Operations gt View Read more in Document Operations in Search if View is an enabled Document Operation in the search Result Layout Options grid and list view Name Juice 6 Pack Bottle Box pdf Description Juice 6 Pack Bottle Box pdf mie a 7 Project HTMLS Viewer 14 1 update Actions Gl OL 5 2 25 Viewing Attributes If the document in the Viewer has an Attribute Category with a Viewer specific View you will see the Attributes widget in the Viewer The administrators can create such Viewer specific views Read in Add Viewer Views For example you can create attribute category based checklists for different roles groups When a user from that role or group views the documents with that category this attribute 168 WebCenter checklist will be visible in the viewer Read more about this use case in https wiki esko com pages viewpage action pageld 1 70047115 As another example you can use this to view your document references in the Viewer If you have more than one CAD document references associated with your graphics file you
372. val Status Document Version Due Date Note If you cannot see the Approvals to Follow Up section go to My WebCenter gt My Work Setup to add it to your My Work page In this section you can e Filter the documents e by status Pending Rejected Approved or Approved with Comments e by date Finished within last 14 days last 7 days or last day e Sort the documents list oy Approval Status Document Name Due Date e View the documents e Get to a document s details page 11 5 9 When is an Approval Cycle Finished 240 The approval cycle s status is changed to Finished when either e all approvers have approved or rejected it WelbCenter e the Project Manager or an admin has Forced Approved or Forced Rejected it See Forcibly Accept or Reject Documents on page 241 Note that in this case the final status is Forced Approved or Forced Rejected instead of Finished A finished approval cycle may not be stopped or started without uploading a new version of the document 11 6 Forcibly Accept or Reject Documents Project Managers have two special approval status settings available Forced Approved and Forced Rejected unless this is disallowed by the Administrator Using either force approval or force reject finishes the approval cycle so that other approval users may not approve or reject the document 11 7 Project and Document Security Project Managers secure projects by setting permissions for users an
373. ve the Task Management module make the project active make the decider a project member and assign him her a task to confirm authorize the project as first project task See Jask Management in WebCenter on page 247 for more information about tasks 4 If desired specify a Customer for the project and that customer s Location 5 To use a custom thumbnail click Change beside the default Thumbnail Select Specify New Thumbnail and enter the complete path and filename in the associated field or Browse for it To use the default thumbnail leave that choice selected 6 If desired enter a project description in the Description field 7 To specify an optional due date click the calendar at the end of the Due Date field and select the desired due date To set the due time click the drop down list to the right of the calendar control 201 my ESKOS AJZ WebCenter Add Documents to the Project Le To add Documents to the project click Add Item in the Documents section of the Create Project page and either e Browse to the document to add e Copy a document from another project select the project then the document to copy Tip Use the icons to search for a project or document name e Create a document placeholder from a document template select New in the Source list select the Document Template to use and fill in any attributes that may be required Note This is only available if your Admin has defined document
374. view all the details related to the annotations in this page In addition you can also filter based on review status and user Use the Print link to print the annotation report Note The print layout will follow your annotation filters Note This feature only works correctly in browsers supporting the HTML5 Canvas feature 4 3 14 Online Document Editing with CHILI 62 Open CHILI Document in Editor When a user opens a document it will be opened in the CHILI Editor In the editor the user will be able to edit the parts of the document based on Workspace and Constraints Read also Dynamically assign workspaces and constraints to CHILI Documents In the header bar some document information will be shown Below the buttons Return Save as Draft and Save as New Version are shown If the user who opened the editor is an approver he can see the approval options and from there he can do all available approval actions When the user approved rejected the document the action button list will be updated NOTE Save as Draft button is only available if the current User has CHECKOUT permission for the CHILI document Save as New Version button is only available if the current User has ADD permission for the CHILI document WebCenter Save a CHILI Document When a user saves his document as a draft it will be saved on the CHILI server When he then reopens the document in the editor the change
375. viewing CAD in 3D While viewing a CAD design file or a graphic file with CAD reference the CAD widget will have an Open 3D View m button Click m to open the file in the HTML5 Collada Viewer The 3D Viewer will open up in the 3D View widget 12 7 ESKOS Project HTMLS Viewer 14 1 update Document Fire_Engine_FC ard Version 1 lt Ra User ADMIN ADMIN Seo 2 X QieaiaiaiQaid jn i4 20a Navigation Orientation Measure Annotation C4 Note Once you have opened the file in 3D the Open 3D View T button is added to the top tool panel 5 2 18 Help You can search for information in the Search Knowledge Base panel from within the Viewer window Tip To access online help use the keyboard shortcut F1 or click 5 2 19 Annotating in the Viewer You can use the Viewer annotation tools to add annotations or comments to the Viewed image To add an annotation Click on either the LJ Add Annotation on page 128 button or the E Note Annotation on page 131 button Click on the Rectangle L to get a list of additional annotation options If you select a different annotation type this button will change to the selected annotation type Add Annotation Click on the E Add Annotation button This opens a sub menu of different annotation tool options You can use these with a click drag release action Rectangle annotation tool Ll Use this to select a rectangular area where you can annotate 128 WebCente
376. w your approvers to give their approval on a certain condition for example if a barcode in the document is corrected The conditions like the comments and the reasons for rejection will be shown in e the Approval tab of the Document Details page e the Action History tab of the Document Details page e the Document History in the Viewer Note When working with an Automation Engine workflow documents you approve conditionally in WebCenter will go through the Approved with a Condition output of the Publish on Web task in your Automation Engine workflow Publish on Web Approved wy OK gt ie Elle Wait for Action Checkpoint Use a Wait for Action Checkpoint task for those documents so the Automation Engine operator can fix them manually Define How to Handle Document Rejection e Define what to do when one user rejects the document e Choose Stop approval cycle immediately if you don t want to bother the rest of the approvers with a document that will have to be corrected and re approved anyway 23 my ESKOS WebCenter Note That document version gets rejected as final approval status The approval request is removed from the to do list of the approvers who haven t evaluated the document yet in the current and next stages e Choose Stop approval cycle after the stage if you want to collect the opinion of all the approvers in the stage before a new version is created Note That docume
377. will be a restricted set a drop down list of items to select from you need to create this restricted set first Click Restricted sets to do this Note The restricted sets are shared with the Attributes restricted sets 3 Click New Specification on the top right 4 Enter information in the fields as appropriate Name name of the attribute for example Billable Description description of the attribute contents for example Indicates whether work on this project should be billed by finance Type the type of the attribute You can select from the drop down Select Attribute Type Area sq ft sq m Date and Time Distance in mm Distance in m Document Reference Float Integer Rich Text Text Volume cu in cu cm Volume cu in cu dm Volume cu ft cu m Weighti lbs gr Weight lbs kq Document References are attribute links pointing to different document sources When you select this option you will have more 211 1 2 S KO x WebCenter options Read more in Create a Document Reference Attribute Floats are numbers containing a decimal point e g 3 1415 and integers are whole numbers e g 42 Rich Text attribute type allows you in entering long and or rich text You can add set of least 16 different colors set the text bold and italic use bulleted and numbered lists Heading up to four levels and also add tables In the Preview you will see the Rich Text editor
378. with a single output pin You can attach this to any other node Note This node will not accept input connections When a workflow node has a failure the system will check the error dot of the node If this dot is NOT connected to anything and there is an error handler node on the canvas the system will put the token on the output dot of the error handler In the example below if Start Approval Cycle fails because there is no approval setup e the Error Handler will check if the error pin of the node is connected to any other node When the error pin is not connected to any workflow path Error Handler will receive the error e the Send Error Mail node will send an e mail to the person specified in this node e after the notification email the token will be placed on the original node The person receiving the e mail can then take action and retry the approval node s GetLegal by De e s Start Upload design Start Approval Cycle Gj V Daia Collector Produce Completed s Edi design ie oC ow Error Handler Send Error Email Note e Do not connect the Error Handler node and its following nodes to the main Workflow to avoid unexpected results e You only can add one Error Handler node in your canvas Feedback from the Error Handler node To know the source of the error click on the output token of the node connected to the Error Handler In the example below the green output pin of the
379. you want the task creator or assignee to enter into the system they can be required in which case the task will not be completed if they are not filled in e Checklist This is a set of items you want to assignee to check off before completing the task Optionally the system can enforce this e Documents This is a set of parameters that defines whether you can add or even have to add a document e Discussions You can allow to start a discussion in your task e Workflow In this section you can create a complete workflow using different task types and other nodes Specification A parameter for a task Specifications work much in the same way as attributes The list of specifications is determined by the task type Due Date The date and time by when a task must be completed Due dates are visible in all task overviews Due dates are mentioned clearly in the notifications sent to the person to whom the task is assigned If the task is not completed on the due date time the assignee will get a reminder Tasks going overdue are flagged in red in the task overviews and search results Estimated Date WelbCenter The estimated date is a date and time filled in by the task assignee It gives the best current estimation of when the task will be finished Estimated dates are allowed to fall before or after the due date but when they fall after the due date they will appear in red in the task overviews Changing the estimated date wil
380. zed layout Project SKVA_HTML5S Document Sandwich Tomato pdf Version 1 C User ADMIN ADMIN S oi xX Qaa aAA Q en CsmMHA Boe im Navigation Orientation Measure Annotation Annotation List A Q H All Users za Aid All Review States Oo JBE JAAA a Se 7 BREE EN e DOA lt S e This example layout has the top panel containing the information bar and the top tool panel the left sidebar the right sidebar collapsed widgets a modal widget Pah wD Customizing the Viewer Window Layout You can customize your window to suit your needs You can e click drag e a widget to the center of the window outside of the side panels the central panel where you will see the document image being viewed This will make this widget a modal window You can make a widget modal when you want this to always appear in the Viewer even when the browser window becomes small The widget will remain modal even when you restart the Viewer e a widget up or down in the same panel e a widget from one panel to the other e collapse or expand a widget by clicking on its header The sizes of the widgets in the side panel will adjust according to its contents The scroll bars will help you navigate within the widgets e adjust the width of the side panels by dragging the border line use the Toggle Sidebar option to collapse the sidebars WebCenter Note Your layout settings will
381. zontal distance between two selected points is larger than the vertical distance you will get a vertical form to measure the width lf the vertical distance measures more than the horizontal you will get a horizontal form to measure the height A popover will display the current gap size and the X Y coordinate of the end line The information is updated when you move the lines of the Caliper e You can Save the Gap size and the H W as a Preset on your profile This allows you to have a customized Caliper form for your future use Fixed In this mode you can specify a fixed gap size Use this when you want to standardize your artwork object to a pre determined size For example if you have a certain text height needed in the artwork specify that as the gap size and check the artwork text e Specify the Gap size e Use H or W button to fix the Caliper orientation Note When it is fixed the your mouse movement will not alter the Caliper orientation e Hold down the left or right mouse button to draw the start line and the end line will be drawn according to the gap size e Click Save to create a Preset with the current measurements the gap and the orientation Preset Select your saved preset in the style selector Hold down the mouse to draw the lines with your preset gap size and style Note In the Fixed and Preset mode you can grab the start or end line to drag the form to another position Open 3D View If you have

WebCenter 14.1 User Guide - Product Documentation

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents